HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL VOL 4 - 19-00727 - Spori Annex - Ceramic & Sculpture Labs
Brigham Young University - Idaho
Spori Annex Building
Volume 4 │ Divisions 26-33
Project Manual
November 27, 2019
BID SET
BYUI Project # 11513
BYU-Idaho Approvals
Blank Page
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 4
Facility Services Subgroup Continued
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 0000 ELECTRICAL 26 0501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0503 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
26 0519 LINE-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0950 POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 26 2000 LOW (LINE) VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION 26 2417 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 3560 TVSS FOR PANELBOARDS 26 3565 TVSS FOR SWITCHBOARDS INTEGRATED 26 5000 LIGHTING 26 5100 LIGHTING 26 6000 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 26 6000 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 26 6210 DATA SYSTEM CABLING 26 6411 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
DIVISION 27 – AUDIO / VIDEO SYSTEMS
27 0000 AUDIO / VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 5115 AUDIO SYSTEMS 27 5117 VIDEO SYSTEMS
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 0000 EARTHWORK 31 0501 COMMON EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS 31 1100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 1123 AGGREGATE BASE 31 1413 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING
31 2213 ROUGH GRADING 31 2216 FINE GRADING 31 2316 EXCAVATION 31 2323 FILL 31 2324 FLOWABLE FILL
BYU-Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 0000 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 0113 ASPHALT PAVING SURFACE TREATMENT: Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal 32 1216 ASPHALT PAVING: Superpave Method 32 1723 PAVEMENT MARKINGS
32 8400 PLANTING IRRIGATION (Landscape) 32 9001 COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS 32 9121 TOPSOIL PHYSICAL PREPARATION 32 9122 TOPSOIL GRADING 32 9200 TURF GRASSES (Landscape) 32 9300 PLANTS (Landscape) 32 9300 PLANTS DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 0000 UTILITIES 33 0500 EARTHWORK AND CONCRETE FOR UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 33 0501 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0513 MANHOLES 33 0660 UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 33 1116 SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 33 3313 SANITARY SEWER UTILITY SEWAGE 33 5100 NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION 33 6310 STEAM AND CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS AND REVISIONS END VOLUME 4
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS 26 0000 - 1
D I V I S I O N 26: E L E C T R I C A L
26 0000 E L E C T R I C A L
26 0501 COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0503 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 26 0519 LINE-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 0950 POWER MONITORING SYSTEM
26 2000 L O W (LINE) V O L T A G E D I S T R I B U T I O N
26 2417 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 3560 TVSS FOR PANELBOARDS 26 3565 TVSS FOR SWITCHBOARDS INTEGRATED
26 5000 L I G H T I N G
26 5100 LIGHTING
26 6000 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
26 6000 AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 26 6210 DATA SYSTEM CABLING 26 6411 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 1
SECTION 26 0501 - COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. General electrical system requirements and procedures. 2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in
Contract Documents. 3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections.
4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal
requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: 1. Provide following information for each item of equipment:
a. Catalog Sheets. b. Assembly details or dimension drawings.
c. Installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number.
e. Name of local supplier. 2. Furnish such information for following equipment:
a. Section 26 0550: Ladder Type Cable Tray b. Section 26 0943: Lighting Control Systems
c. Section 26 0950: Power Monitoring System d. Section 26 2417: Panelboards
e. Section 26 2726: Wiring devices. f. Section 26 2816: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers.
g. Section 26 3553: TVSS h. Section 26 5100: Interior lighting fixtures.
3. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. 4. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover (six sets)
B. Quality Assurance / Control: 1. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified.
2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or EEMAC and bear their label wherever standards have been established and label service is
available.
B. Materials and equipment provided under following Sections shall be by same Manufacturer:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 2
1. Sections 26 2416, 26 2816, and 26 2913: Panelboards, Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers, and Enclosed Controllers.
C. Contractor shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by local codes and ordinances applicable to this Division.
1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide competent instructor for time required to adequately train maintenance personnel in operation
and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare and submit (4) four complete copies of the O & M Manuals—manuals to contain informa-
tion listed below. Place each manual in a tabbed three-ring binder upon completion of the project. 1. Operation and Maintenance manual must contain the following items:
a. Copies of reviewed shop drawings. b. Letter of 1-year guarantee of workmanship.
c. Copy of voltage and ammeter readings. d. Copy of letter verifying owner’s receipt of spare parts.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Con-
tractor:
“The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to re-place or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative, any part of this installation which
may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance.”
1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. During the course of construction, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. These marked-up prints shall be turned
over to the Architect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work
shall be included without additional cost to Owner.
B. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with
site dimensions and with other Sections.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 26 0501 - 3
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations for proper installation.
2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served before installation or rough-in.
a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work. b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with
mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and functional.
3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable
Sections.
B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations
through walls, ceilings, and top plates of walls.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architect before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Measure current for each phase of each motor under actual final load operation, i.e. after air balance is completed for fan units, etc. Record this information along with full-load nameplates current rating
and size of thermal overload unit installed for each motor.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 26 0503 - 1
SECTION 26 0503-EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections or funished by Owner.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. In the even of conflict regarding equipment wiring system requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
As described in the related sections. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections, voltage, number of phases, and ampacity. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer.
3.03 INSTALLATION A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat-producing equipment. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in damp or wet locations and for connections to vibrating equipment. Make flexible connections to vibrating equipment of sufficient length to form a loop to restrict transmission of noise to structural elements or to the air.
C. Install prefinished cord set or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps. Refer to Section 26 2726, Wiring Devices, for details. D. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of prewired equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated. Tag all
interconnecting wiring to identify source and destination equipment and terminal numbers. Refer to Section 26 0553, Electrical Identification, for details. END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 1
SECTION 26 0519 - LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE
PART 1 -
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Line Voltage Conductors:
1. Copper with AWG sizes as shown: a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise.
b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger. 2. Insulation:
a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C). b. Standard Conductor Size No. 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg C).
c. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes. d. Type TC cable is acceptable for use in cable trays only.
3. Colors: a. 208Y / 120 V System:
1) Black: Phase A. 2) Red: Phase B.
3) Blue: Phase C.
4) Green: Ground. 5) White: Neutral. b. 480Y / 277 Volt System:
1) Brown: Phase A. 2) Orange: Phase B.
3) Yellow: Phase C.
4) Gray: Neutral. 5) Green: Ground. c. Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods
for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed. d. For feeder conductors larger than No. 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or taped band or color tag color-coded as specified above.
B. Line Voltage Cables: 1. Metal Clad Cable (MC) may be used as restricted below.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 26 0519 - 2
a. Copper Conductors
b. Use only indoor, dry locations where: 1) Not subject to damage. 2) Not in contact with earth.
c. Not in concrete. d. Is allowed by local codes.
C. Standard Connectors:
1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors. 2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs. 3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non-
hardening sealant.
D. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors:
1. Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors.
2. Acceptable Products: a. 16323 by Cooper Bussmann, St Louis, MO www.bussmann.com b. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.squared.com.
c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6000.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. 2. Do not use direct burial cable.
B. Line Voltage Conductors (Over 70 Volts): 1. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits.
2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings. 3. Neutrals:
a. On three-phase, 4-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits.
b. On single-phase, 3-wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits. c. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings.
d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted otherwise.
4. Pulling Conductors: a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet
boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors.
c. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1
SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents except as
excluded below.
B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-Installation Conference: Participate in pre-installation conference specified in Section 03 3111.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation.
C. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps listed for such use.
D. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices:
1. Make by compression type connectors designed specifically for this purpose. 2. Acceptable Products:
a. Burndy b. Thomas & Betts. c. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Section 03 3111 in installing grounding conductor and placing
concrete. Do not allow placement of concrete before Architect's inspection of grounding conductor installation.
B. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be continuous from terminal to terminal without splice. Provide grounding for following.
1. Electrical service, its equipment and enclosures. 2. Conduits and other conductor enclosures. 3. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system.
4. Main panelboard, power and lighting panelboards. 5. Non-current-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller cabinets, instrument cases, and lighting fixtures.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2
C. Grounding connection to main water supply shall be accessible for inspection and made within 6 inches of point of entrance of water line to building. Provide bonding jumpers across water meter and valves to assure electrical continuity.
D. Provide concrete-encased electrode system by embedding 20 feet minimum of No. 2/0 bare copper conductor in concrete footing, 2 inches minimum below concrete surface. Extend No. 2/0 copper conductor to main panel as shown on Drawings.
E. Ground identified common conductor of electrical system at secondary side of main transformer supplying building. Ground identified grounded (neutral) conductor of electrical system on supply side of main service disconnect.
F. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches in length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment.
G. Provide grounding bushings on all feeder conduit entrances into panelboards and equipment enclosures.
H. Bond conduit grounding bushings to enclosures with minimum #10 AWG conductor.
I. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground. 1. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG.
2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings.
J. Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel. Do not use intermediate connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet.
K. On motors, connect ground conductors to conduit with approved grounding bushing and to metal frame with bolted solderless lug.
L. Do not bond neutral conductor of emergency generator set to set frame at generator location.
M. Ground cabinet of transformers to conduit and ground wires, if installed. Bond transformer secondary neutral conductor to cabinet.
N. Ground each separately derived system neutral to nearest ground per NEC and local inspector.
O. Provide and install a #6 ground conductor from main service ground to telephone board. Terminate ground at board on a grounding bar.
P. Provide a separate, insulated equipment green grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing and to all metallic enclosures. A conduit ground is not acceptable.
Install grounding bushings on both ends of all feeder conduit and bond to ground system.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Notify Architect for inspection two days minimum before placing concrete over grounding conductor.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 0533 - 1
SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project but furnished under other Divisions.
2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under other Divisions. 3. Furnish and install main telephone service raceway as described in Contract Documents and to comply with
telephone company requirements. 4. Furnish and install main electrical service raceway to comply with electrical utility company requirements.
B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Raceway And Conduit:
1. Sizes: a. 3/4 inch for exterior underground use. b. 1/2 inch minimum elsewhere, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product. a. Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and galvanized IMC conduit
and fittings completely with vinyl tape. b. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Electrical Non-Metallic tubing (ENT) 1) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is:
a) Not subject to damage. b) Not in contact with earth. c) Not in concrete.
2) Flexible steel conduit or metal-clad cable required for final connections to indoor mechanical equipment.
c. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: 1) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC elbows and risers. d. Listed, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36 inches. 3. Prohibited Raceway Materials:
a. Aluminum conduit. b. Armored cable type AC (BX) cable.
B. Raceway And Conduit Fittings:
1. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use. 2. EMT: a. Compression type.
b. Steel set screw housing type. 3. PVC Conduit: a. PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes.
b. PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer. 4. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type. 5. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type. 6. Expansion fittings shall be equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 0533 - 2
7. Prohibited Fitting Materials: a. Crimp-on, tap-on, indenter type fittings. b. Cast set-screw fittings for EMT.
c. Spray (aerosol) PVC cement.
C. Outlet Boxes: 1. Outlet boxes shall be UL listed for the application, Heavy Duty PVC for NM and ENT of proper size and
shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following: a. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box. b. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required.
c. Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to bring box flush with finish surface. 2. Telephone / data outlet boxes shall be a deep box to accommodate Cat 6A cables. 4sq. deep box with single gang mudring where two or more cables come to one box.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Contact Information: 1. Cooper B-Line, Highland, IL www.bline.com. 2. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT www.hubbell-wiring.com.
3. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. 4. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. 5. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com.
6. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, www.wiremold.com. 7. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT www.wiremold.com.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC equipment.
2. Before rough-in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly located for purpose intended.
a. Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22. b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough-in. Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction. 3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for box doors. 4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be installed under other Divisions.
B. Conduit And Raceway: 1. Conceal raceways within ceilings, walls, and floors, except at Contractor's option, conduit may be exposed on walls or ceilings of mechanical equipment areas and above acoustical panel suspension ceiling systems.
Install exposed raceway runs parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. 2. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes. 3. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and outlet,
fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting. a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not effectively reduced.
b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC. 4. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have accumulated. 5. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger, and on all raceways where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS26 0533 - 3
6. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable accessible area and cap for future use. 7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise. All roof
penetrations shall be flashed, counter flashed and sealed per Roofing Contractor. Coordinate all roof penetrations with the Roofing Contractor. 8. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty conduit, except
sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit, and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as-built drawings. 9. Install expansion-deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion, seismic, or structural isolation
break (SIB) joints. 10. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL-listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. Fill void around perimeter of conduits with nonmetallic nonshrink grount in all concrete or masonry walls. 11. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply
PVC adhesive only by brush. 12. Installation In Framing: a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 1/3 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing
points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 1/3 of member width. b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 13. Underground Raceway And Conduit:
a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum. b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches deep at point of
exit from planting areas. 14. Conduit And Raceway Support: a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required.
b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by: 1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry.
2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units. 3) Wood screws on wood.
4) Metal screws on metal. 15. Prohibited Procedures: a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports, boxes, cabinets, or other equipment. b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed. c. Use of torches for bending PVC.
d. Spray applied PVC cement. e. Boring holes in truss members. f. Notching of structural members.
g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires.
C. Boxes: 1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover.
2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back. 3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets.
4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb. 5. Support switch boxes larger than two-gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed walls. 6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future use. 7. Install air / vapor barrier back boxes behind outlet boxes that penetrate vapor barrier. 8. Location:
a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and report discrepancies to Architect before rough-in. Distance of switch boxes from jamb shall be within 6 inches of door jamb.
b. Arrange boxes for ceiling light fixtures symmetrically with respect to room dimensions and structural features. c. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and consistent with
architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines with each other, if possible. d. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 1
SECTION 26 0553-ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract
Documents to establish the total requirements for electrical identification. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements B. In the event of conflict regarding electrical identification requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Split sleeve or tubing type. Cloth or wraparound adhesive types not approved. C. Conductor-color Tape: Colored vinyl electrical tape. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Secure nameplate to outside face of panelboard doors. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application.
E. Electrical Contractor shall write the circuit number to which each device is connected on the inside of the box (clearly visible when device is removed) and on the backside of each coverplate. Use a permanent black marker.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 2
3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A. Conductors for power circuits to be identified per the following schedule. System Voltage Conductor 480Y/277V 208Y/120V Phase A Brown Black Phase B Orange Red
Phase C Yellow Blue Neutral White with White orange stripe Grounding Green Green Isolated Ground Green with Green with
yellow stripe yellow stripe Switchleg (lighting) Purple Pink 3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source. C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify source to device and the load it serves, including location. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load served and source. E. Transformers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location. END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 26 0950 - 1
SECTION 26 0950 -POWER MONITORING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install a complete Power Monitoring System (PMCS) as detailed on the drawings and as described in this specification. The system is defined to include, but not be limited to, remote devices for monitoring, control and protection, device communication interface hardware, inter-communication wiring,
and ancillary equipment.
B. The manufacturer shall demonstrate the system is not a prototype and that similar systems have been field installed and successfully operated for at least five years. The PMCS vendor shall have full responsibility for insuring that the PMCS system performs as specified.
C. The PMCS shall utilize Ethernet as the high-speed backbone network that supports direct connection of an
unlimited number of personal computer workstations anywhere on the network.
D. Each Personal Computer Workstation (PCW) connected to the network shall have equal access to information provided by the power monitoring devices for centralizing data display, data logging, alarming, event recording, and other power monitoring operations. Each PCW shall be independent of the other PCWs with its own software to allow the user to retrieve and configure the information based on the user’s
needs.
E. The high-speed network shall allow direct access to data provided by the power monitoring.
F. The PMCS shall be POWERLOGIC as manufactured by Square D Company.
G. All products shall not violate any U. S. patents.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. All Power Meters and Circuit Monitors shall be UL 508 Listed and CSA approved, and have CE marking.
B. The system shall comply with the applicable portions of NEMA standards. In addition, the control unit shall
comply with FCC Emission Standards specified in Part 15, Sub-part J for Class A application.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. When PMCS components are installed by the power equipment manufacturer, the power equipment shop drawings shall clearly identify the components, the internal connections, and all contractor connections. The PMCS drawings shall show all PMCS components including necessary component dimensions; type, size, and weight; location of conduit entry and exit; single line diagram indicating external wiring requirements. Drawings shall identify terminal
blocks used for interconnections and wire type to be used.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate physical data and electrical performance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.
1.04 QUALITY
A. The PMCS vendor shall be ISO 9000 registered to demonstrate quality compliance.
B. PMCS components included within the power equipment lineups shall be factory installed, wired and tested prior to shipment to the job site.
1.05 SYSTEM START-UP AND TRAINING
A. On-site start-up and training of the PMCS shall be included in conjuction with power link start up and
training.
Sec 26 0943.
B. Start-up shall include a complete working demonstration of the PMCS with simulation of possible operating conditions which may be encountered.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 26 0950 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 CIRCUIT MONITORS (Quantity as Required)
Circuit monitors shall be SQ-D #ION 7650.
A. Electronic circuit monitors shall provide true rms metered values. Information provided by each circuit monitor shall include frequency, temperature, current, demand current, voltage, real power, reactive power, apparent power, demand power, predicted demand power, power factor, accumulated energy, accumulated reactive energy, total harmonic distortion (THD) of each current and voltage, and K-factor of each current.
B. The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to provide valid data for waveform analysis and true rms metering accurate beyond the 30th harmonic (fundamental of 60 Hz).
C. The Circuit Monitors shall be rated for an operating temperature range of -25° C to 70° C and have an overcurrent withstand rating of 500 amps for 1 second.
D. All setup parameters required by the Circuit Monitors shall be stored in nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of a control power interruption. Any battery or other device used to provide non-volatile memory shall be serviceable from the front of the circuit monitor and servicing shall not require removing the circuit monitor from the gear in which it is mounted.
E. The Circuit Monitor shall maintain in nonvolatile memory maximum and minimum values for each of the instantaneous values reported as well as the time and date that the minimum or maximum was set.
F. The Circuit Monitors shall accept inputs from industry standard instrument transformers (120 VAC
secondary PTs and 5 A secondary CTs). Connection to 480Y/277 VAC circuits shall be possible without use of PTs. In the interest of safety, provision shall be made that if PTs are not used, it shall not be necessary to bring voltages greater than 120 VAC (line to neutral) to the Circuit Monitor itself.
1. PT primaries through 1.2 kV shall be supported
2. CT primaries through 32 kA shall be supported
G. The Circuit Monitor shall be accurate to 0.15% of reading plus 0.05% of full scale for voltage and current metering and 0.3% for all power and energy functions.
1. These accuracies shall be maintained for both light and full loads.
2. No annual recalibration by users shall be required to maintain these accuracies.
3. Voltage and current for all phases shall be sampled simultaneously to assure high accuracy in conditions of low power factor or large waveform distortions (harmonics).
H. Any Circuit Monitor may be applied in three-phase, three- or four-wire systems. A fourth CT input shall be available to measure neutral or ground current. If the fourth CT is not used, then a residual current shall be calculated by vectorial addition of the phase currents. In four-wire connections the Circuit Monitor shall utilize the circuit neutral common reference and not earth ground, to provide metering accuracy.
I. The Circuit Monitor shall be capable of being applied without modification at nominal frequencies of 50, 60, or 400 Hz.
J. The Circuit Monitor shall operate properly over a wide range of control power including 100-264 VAC or 100-300 VDC. Connections to 18-60 VDC shall also be available.
K. Ride through capability shall be available for backup control power for up to 8 seconds.
L. The Circuit Monitor shall surface or flush mount to an enclosure and be provided with an attractive finish bezel ring.
1. The Circuit Monitors shall be equipped with an integral, continuous duty, long-life display to provide local access to the following metered quantities as well as the minimum and maximum value of each instantaneous quantity since last reset of min/max:
2. Current, per phase rms, 3-phase average and neutral (if applicable)
3. Voltage, phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral, and 3-phase average (phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral)
4. Real power, per phase and 3-phase total
5. Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total
6. Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total
7. Power factor, 3-phase total and per phase
8. Frequency
9. Demand current, per phase and three phase average
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 26 0950 - 3
10. Demand real power, three phase total
11. Demand apparent power, three phase total
12. Accumulated Energy, (MWh and MVARh)
13. THD, current and voltage, per phase
14. K-factor, current, per phase
15. Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from the front of the Circuit Monitor:
a. Peak demand current
b. Peak demand power (kW) and peak demand apparent power (kVA)
c. Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh)
16. Setup for system requirements shall be allowed from the front of the Circuit Monitor. Setup provisions shall include:
a. CT rating as required.
b. PT rating as required.
c. System type three-phase, 4-wire
d. Demand interval (5-60 min.)
e. Watt-hours per pulse
17. All reset and setup functions shall have a means for protection against unauthorized/accidental changes.
18. For ease in operator viewing, the display shall remain on continuously, with no detrimental effect on the useful life of the Circuit Monitor.
M. The Circuit Monitor shall be equipped with a front panel communications port as standard equipment. The port shall be completely accessible during normal operation and shall not require exposure of the operator to life-threatening voltage when in use. The operator shall be able to quickly connect a small Personal
Computer (PC) to this port without use of tools or splices. This front panel port shall have all of the communication functionality of the standard hard wired rear port. When a connection is made to the front port, the Circuit Monitor shall disregard communication from the rear port until the front port is disconnected.
N. It shall be possible to field upgrade the firmware in the Circuit Monitor to enhance functionality. These
firmware upgrades shall be done through either the front or rear communication connection. No Circuit Monitor disassembly or changing of integrated circuit chips shall be required. It shall not be necessary to de-energize the circuit or the equipment to upgrade the firmware.
O. The following metered values as well as the minimum and maximum instantaneous readings since last reset shall be communicated by the Circuit Monitor:
1. Frequency
2. Temperature
3. Current, per phase rms and neutral (if applicable)
4. Current, 3-phase average rms
5. Current, apparent rms
6. Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral
7. Voltage unbalance, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral
8. Power factor, per phase
9. Power factor, 3-phase total
10. Real power, per phase and 3-phase total
11. Reactive power, per phase and 3-phase total
12. Apparent power, per phase and 3-phase total
13. Demand current, per phase and three-phase average
14. Demand real power, three-phase average
15. Demand reactive power, three-phase average
16. Demand apparent power, three-phase average
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 26 0950 - 4
17. Accumulated energy, (MWh, MVAH, and MVARh)
18. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), voltage and current, per phase
19. K-factor, per phase
P. All power demand calculations shall be done by any one of the following calculation methods, selectable by
the user:
1. Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every 15 seconds. The window length shall be set by the user from 5-60 minutes in five minute increments.
2. Block interval, with optional sub-intervals. The window length shall be set by the user from 5-60 minutes in 5 minute intervals. The user shall be able to set the sub-interval length from 5-30 minutes in
5 minute intervals.
3. External Pulse Synchronization, utilizing a synch pulse provided externally. An optional status input shall be used to sense the pulse.
4. Sliding block interval with continuous sliding 15 second subintervals.
Q. The default demand calculation method shall be a 15 minute sliding window thermal demand.
R. The following demand readings shall be reported by the Circuit Monitor:
1. Average demand current, per phase
2. Peak demand current, per phase
3. Average demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power
4. Predicted demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power
5. Peak demand for real power, reactive power, and apparent power
S. Each Circuit Monitor shall be capable of receiving a broadcast message over the communications network that can be used to synchronize demand calculations by several Circuit Monitors. This message need not be addressed specifically to any one Circuit Monitor.
T. The following energy readings shall be reported by the Circuit Monitor:
• Accumulated energy
• Accumulated reactive energy
• Accumulated apparent energy
1. For real and reactive energy reported values, separate totals for energy flow in each direction shall be
kept, as well as an arithmetic sum.
2. Each Circuit Monitor shall be capable of operating a solid state KYZ output relay to provide output pulses for a user definable increment of reported energy. Minimum relay life shall be in excess of one billion operations.
U. All Circuit Monitors shall include current and voltage waveform capture capability. Waveform capture shall
be user selectable for 4, 12, 24, 36, 48, or 60 cycles of data.
1. Either type of waveform capture shall be initiated either from a Personal Computer Workstation (PCW) running the appropriate Power Monitoring and Control Systems software, or by the circuit monitor as a user defined response to an alarm condition. In addition, an external trigger can initiate the 12, 24, 36, 48, or 60 cycle waveform. The waveform capture sequence shall be initiated within 1 millisecond after
the trigger is sensed. A user definable delay of 2 - 10 cycles shall determine how many pre-event cycles are included in the waveform capture.
2. The Circuit Monitor shall capture, and store in internal memory, 64 digitally sampled data points for each cycle of each phase voltage and current.
3. The Circuit Monitor shall transmit the waveform samples over the network to the personal computer
workstation for display, archival, and analysis.
4. Each voltage and current of all the phases shall be sampled concurrently so that proper phase relationships are maintained, so that harmonic flow analysis can be performed, and so that the effect of a disturbance can be observed on all phase voltages and currents.
5. Harmonic analysis performed on the captured waveforms shall resolve harmonics through the 31st.
6. The data used for the four cycle waveform capture display shall also be used to derive metered quantities in order to provide meaningful additional data.
7. All waveforms must reflect actual circuit performance. Waveforms synthesized or composed over time shall not be acceptable.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 26 0950 - 5
V. Data logging may be accomplished either within the circuit monitor or at the PCW, or both. Each circuit monitor shall be able to log data, alarms and events, and multiple waveforms. The monitors shall offer up to 356 KB of on-board non-volatile memory. This information shall be communicated to the PCW upon demand. Logged information to be stored in each Circuit Monitor includes:
1. Up to 14 separate data logs shall be configurable by the user. Each log entry shall be date and time stamped. The type of data for the log shall be selected from a list of 175 monitored values. Each log entry shall be user configurable to consist of from one to over 75 values of instantaneous data, depending on the type of data. It shall be possible to set up each log to take data at a different user defined schedule interval. In addition, it shall be possible for a user to define an event or new min/max
condition that will trigger log file entries.
2. Data logs can be configured by users to be Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO).
3. A Min/Max log file shall include the time, date, and value for the minimum and maximum of each of the instantaneous metered values.
4. An alarm and event log shall contain time, date, event information, and coincident information for each user defined alarm or event. This log shall have a capacity of up to 1,000 events selected from over 100 alarms or events.
5. Waveform logs shall store captured waveforms, 4, 12, 24, 36, 48, and 60 cycle as defined by the user. Waveform log entries shall be scheduled at a user defined interval, externally triggered, or forced in
response to a user defined event. Waveform logs shall be either Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO) as defined by the user.
6. A simple user interface shall be available to enable the user to allocate Circuit Monitor memory to different log functions.
W. Circuit Monitor Input/Output Options: Input/Output modules shall be field replaceable. Circuit Monitors shall
be equipped with one of the following I/O options as shown on the project drawings:
1. Option One - One solid state output suitable for KYZ pulse initiation; one solid state input suitable for external end of demand interval demand pulse detection
X. Alarm events shall be user definable.
1. The following classes of events shall be available as alarm events:
a. Over/under current
b. Over/under voltage
c. Current imbalance
d. Phase loss, current
e. Phase loss, voltage
f. Voltage imbalance
g. Over kVA
h. Over kW or kVAR into/out of load
i. Over/under frequency
j. Under power factor, true or displacement
k. Over THD
l. Over K-factor
m. Over demand, current or power
n. Reverse power
o. Phase reversal
p. Status Input change
q. End of incremental energy interval
r. End of demand interval
s. Over/under analog inputs
t. Current sag/swell
u. Voltage sag/swell
2. For each over/under metered value alarm, the user shall be able to define a pick-up, drop-out, and delay.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 26 0950 - 6
3. There shall be four alarm severity levels in order make it easier for the user to respond to the most important events first.
4. Indication of an alarm condition shall be given on the front panel.
Y. Output Relay Control
1. Relay outputs shall operate either by user command sent over the communication link, or set to operate in response to user defined alarm event.
2. Output relays shall close in either a momentary or latched mode as defined by the user.
3. Each output relay used in a momentary contact mode shall have an independent timer that can be set by the user.
4. It shall be possible for individual relay outputs to be controlled by multiple alarms in a wired "OR" configuration.
Z. All Circuit Monitors noted on the project drawings shall include sag and swell detection capability. This capability is characterized by the following features:
1. The Circuit Monitor shall continuously monitor for disturbances in the currents and incoming voltage.
There shall be zero blind time; each cycle shall be individually monitored.
2. Disturbance events less than one cycle in length shall be detected.
3. The user shall be able to set a threshold and delay which shall be used by the circuit monitor to determine if an event has occurred. The threshold shall be user defined as either a fixed setpoint or
relative setpoint. When using the relative setpoint, the Circuit Monitor will set the nominal current or voltage equal to its present average value. The Circuit Monitor will automatically adjust the nominal current and voltage values to avoid nuisance alarms caused by gradual daily variations of currents and voltages.
4. Upon detecting a disturbance, the Circuit Monitor shall be capable of :
a. Logging a waveform of the event, 12, 24, 36, 48, or 60 cycles in length, of all phase currents and voltages. The sample rate shall be of sufficient resolution to show the 31st harmonic for each cycle.
b. Operating any output relay on an optional I/O module.
c. Recording the disturbance into an event log with a date and time stamp to the millisecond.
d. Causing an operator alarm at the PCW workstation.
5. All data and waveform logs shall be communicated over the local area network or through the front panel communications port so that the user may view and analyze the data using the PMCS software and workstation.
AA. Advanced harmonic information shall be available via the Circuit Monitor. This shall include the calculation
of the harmonic magnitudes and angles through the 31st harmonic.
1. This information shall be available for all three phases, current and voltage, plus the neutral current. To ensure maximum accuracy for analysis, the current and voltage information for all phases shall be obtained simultaneously from the same cycle.
2. The Circuit Monitor shall have a minimum of 100k of on board memory to log harmonic magnitudes and
angles.
3. The harmonic magnitude shall be reported as a percentage of the fundamental or as a percentage of the rms values, as selected by the user.
2.02 SYSTEM DISPLAY UNITS
A. System Display units shall be provided that include easy to read, pre-configured screens displaying data from the electronic trip units in an organized manner. The system display shall be UL Listed.
B. System Display Installation
1. System Display units shall be installed by the manufacturer in the switchgear as indicated on the drawings.
2. The System Display units shall be flush mounted on switchgear door panels.
C. System Display Keypad
1. The System Display unit shall allow for easy operation by providing a keypad with large keys for
operator selections.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
POWER MONITORING SYSTEM 26 0950 - 7
2. The keys shall have a raised perimeter and tactile feedback to provide a positive response even with gloved hand operation.
3. The keys shall be clearly marked to indicate the function and separated into meaningful groups with display prompting to assist the user in operation.
4. It shall be possible to sequentially view all available data from a selected device by single keystrokes advancing through the various display pages.
5. It shall be possible to view the same pages of data from other Electronic Trip Units by single keystroke advancing back and forth from device to device.
D. System Display Configuration
1. Each System Display unit shall be configured by the manufacturer with all necessary data.
2. It shall be possible to change the configuration for each System Display unit using the keypad provided on each display.
3. Access to configuration functions shall be password protected to prevent unauthorized or accidental modification.
E. Resetting Device Data Using the System Display
1. The System Display unit shall permit the reset of the stored min/max values in the electronic trip units.
2. It shall also permit the reset of the accumulated energy values, peak demands, and the time and date stamps stored in the Circuit Monitors.
3. These resets shall be limited to authorized persons by means of password protection.
2.03 PMCS NETWORK
A. Connecting and Networking of Power Monitoring Devices
1. All data stored in the Power Monitoring Devices shall be accessible to external devices by means of RS-485 serial communications.
2. It shall be possible to connect from one communications port to another (daisy-chain) such that up to 32 Power Monitoring Devices may be connected to form a continuous communications link extending up to 10,000 feet.
3. Communications links shall be compatible with the RS-485 multi-drop communications standards.
4. Communication rates on the links shall be adjustable up to 19.2 k baud to provide acceptable throughput of power monitoring device data.
5. It shall be possible to connect up to an unlimited number of communications links into a large network using ethernet hubs to form a high-speed power monitoring and control network.
B. General Network Information
1. The PMCS shall be connected by means of Ethernet as the high-speed backbone network.
2. The high-speed network shall consist of POWERLOGIC Ethernet Communications Card that allow display units, computers, programmable controllers, and other higher level or sub-networks to access the electrical data being gathered by the electronic Circuit Monitors, Electronic Trip Units, Transformer
Temperature Monitors, Electronic Motor Protective Devices, and Digital Protective Relays.
3. It shall be possible to add an unlimited number of Personal Computer Workstations (PCWs) to the high speed network. Addition of a new PCW shall not require any modification to any existing PCWs. Adding PCWs shall require only a simple network tap; extensive rewiring or wiring to each group of monitoring devices shall not be required.
4. Each personal computer connected to the network shall be a Windows NT or Windows 95 workstation with a standard Ethernet Network Interface Card (NIC).
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PANELBOARDS 26 2417 - 1
SECTION 26 2417-PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Distribution panelboards. B. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for panelboards.
1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements. 2. Section 26 0553 - Electrical Identification. B. In the event of conflict regarding panelboard requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following in addition to the standard requirements: Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
1.04 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish two each to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PANELBOARDS A. Square D NQOD – NF B. “Power Link” Panelboards shall be SQ-D ONLY. 2.02 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type: FS W-P-115; Type I, Class I. B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1. Cabinet size: 5 3/4 inches deep; 20-inches wide, mount per plans. C. Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps and hinged door with flush lock. Finish in manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.
D. Provide panelboards with aluminum bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide ground bus in all panelboards. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1; provide circuit breakers with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. F. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black background. Label to include panel identification, voltage and source. Label to be attached with
screws. 2.03 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB1; circuit breaker type. B. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1, mount per plans.
C. Cabinet Size: 5-3/4 inches deep; 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches for 480 bolt panelboards.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PANELBOARDS 26 2417 - 2
D. Provide flush surface cabinet front with typewritten directory, concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer’s standard gray enamel.
E. Provide panelboards with aluminum bus, ratings as scheduled on Drawings. Provide ground bus in all panelboards. F. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240 volt panelboards; 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as shown on Drawings. G. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, FS W-C-375; plug-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled on Drawings. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. H. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black background. Label to include panel identification and voltage. Label to be attached with screws. PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards plumb in conformance with NEMA PB 1.1. B. Height: 78 inches to top. C. Adjust trim to cover all openings. D. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. F. Provide typewritten circuit schedules in lighting and distribution panelboards and load centers to identify panelboard and load served by each branch breaker. Index shall include specific information
including actual room names and numbers and load served. Obtain actual room names from Architect prior to producing indexes.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the
phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multiwire branch circuits. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1
SECTION 26 2726-WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and box covers. D. Cords and caps.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related
Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for wiring devices. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. In the event of conflict regarding requirements for wiring devices between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
B. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle. C. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES. 1-POLE 3-WAY 4-WAY W-PILOT
A. Hubbell 1221 X 1223 X 1234 X 1221-P1 X B. P&S 20AC1 X 20AC3 X 20AC4 X 20ACI-CPL
C. Leviton 1223 X 1223 X 1224 X D. Eagle 2221X 2223X 2224X
2.02 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits FS W-S-896; ac general use snap switch with toggle rocker handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts ac. Handle: Standard color , to be
selected, in all areas. Screw type terminals only. (Standards color shall include brown, gray, ivory, black or a white for all devices.)
B. Pilot Light Type: Green pilot handle; handle lighted when switch is ON.
C. Locator Type: Lighted handle. D. Provide 3-way and 4-way switches of matching style, appearance and specification as
indicated on drawings.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 2
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES
MFGR. C.O.'S A. Hubbell 5352 X
B. P&S 5352 X
C. Leviton 5352 X D. Eagle 5362X
2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Convenience and Straight-blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1.
B. Locking-Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5.
C. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1; Type 5-20R. Nylon face: Standard color, to be selected, in all areas. Emergency receptacles: Red nylon face. (Standarad
colors shall include brown, gray, ivory, black and white for all devices.) D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Receptacles as specified mounted in a cast steel box with
gasketed, weatherproof device plate as specified.
E. Specific-use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings, brown nylon face.
F. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current interrupter. NEMA Type 5-20R. All units shall be feed-through type for downstream device
protection. All receptacles indicated to be installed in a toilet room, bathroom, roof top, and outdoors or within 6 feet of a sink, basin, tub or floor sink shall be GFIC protected
2.05 SPECIFIC PURPOSE RECEPTACLES
A. NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings. B. Isolated Ground Type: Straight blade type 5-20R as indicated on the Drawings. Grey nylon face.
C. Twist lock type. NEMA configuration as shown on the Drawings.
2.06 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless Steel in all areas. All isolated ground receptacle covers
shall bear the engraved phrase “ISOLATED GROUND”.
B. Engraved Plates: Same plate as specified herein. Provide with engraved characters 1/8 inch high characters (all letters in upper case) with filler of black color.
C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device covers.
2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CORDS AND CAPS
A. Hubbell. B. Leviton. C. Pass and Seymour.
2.08 CORDS AND CAPS A. Straight-blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 1.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 3
B. Locking-blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 5.
C. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
D. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multiconductor flexible cord
with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for hard usage in damp locations. E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit overcurrent
protection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position down. B. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 4 inches above backsplash, or as
noted, in a vertical position with grounding pole to the down.
C. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings. D. Install convenience receptacles in 4 square box in a vertical position with the ground pole
down.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 2816 - 1
SECTION 26 2816-DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Disconnect switches.
B. Enclosures.
1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related
Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for disconnect switches. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
2. Section 26 0526 - Grounding. B. In the event of conflict regarding individually enclosed low-voltage protective device
requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subjects to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of switch);
1. Square D Company
2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES A. General: Provide heavy duty type disconnect and safety switches as indicated herein.
Provide: 1. Heavy duty switches on 240 and/0r 600 volt rated circuits. 2. HP rated switches on all motor circuits.
2.03 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES A. Provide heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed switches, fusible or non-fusible as indicated
of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 and/or 600 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break switches which are so constructed that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Provide single phase or three
phase with solid neutral as required by applications. Equip with an interlocked operating handle which is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R
as required by application, unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits.
2.04 FUSES
A. Provide fuses for switches, as required of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for services indicated. Provide spare fuses amounting to one spare fuse for each 10 installed but not less than three of any one type and size.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings. B. Install disconnects plumb.
C. Maximum Height: Top of enclosure at 78 inches AFF (Above Finished Floor).
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 2816 - 2
D. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check for proper installation and tightness of connections for
disconnects.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
INTEGRATED TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR PANELBOARDS 26 3560 - 1
SECTION 26 3560 - Integrated Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS/ SPDs) for Panelboards
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description
This section describes the materials and installation requirements integrated Transient for Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS), also referred to as Surge Protective Device (SPD), in panelboards. These devices are used to protect AC electrical circuits from the effect of lightning induced currents, substation
switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and or capacitive load switching. 1.02 REFERENCES A. UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
B. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters
C. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 - IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC
Power Circuits; C62.41.2-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits; and C62.45-2002 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
D. NEC 2005, Article 285
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
A. Integral Surge Suppressor 1. TVSS shall be Listed in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 and UL 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
2. Integrated surge protective devices (SPD) shall be Component Recognized in accordance with UL 1449 Second Edition, Revision 2/9/2005 Section 37.3 and 37.4 at the standard’s highest short-circuit current rating (SCCR) of 200 kA, including intermediate level of fault current testing that will be effective
2/9/2007.
3. TVSS shall be tested with the ANSI/IEEE Category C High exposure waveform (20kV-1.2/50µs, 10kA-
8/20µs).
4. TVSS shall provide suppression for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, and N-G in WYE systems.
5. The manufacturer of the TVSS shall be the same as the manufacturer of the service entrance and distribution equipment in which the devices are installed and shipped. Also, this distribution equipment shall be fully tested and certified to the following UL standards:
UL 67 = Panelboards,
UL 845 = Motor Control Centers,
UL 857 = Busway,
UL 891 = Switchboards,
UL 1558 = Low Voltage Switchgear.
6. Recommended TVSS ratings:
a. Minimum surge current rating shall be 160 kA per phase (80 kA per mode) for service entrance and
80 kA per phase (40 kA per mode) for distribution applications.
b. UL 1449 clamping voltage must not exceed the following:
VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G
240/120 800/400V 800/400V 400V
208Y/120 400V 400V 400V
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
INTEGRATED TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS FOR PANELBOARDS 26 3560 - 2
480Y/277 800V 800V 800V
600Y/347 1200V 1200V 1200V
c. Pulse life test: Capable of protecting against and surviving 5000 ANSI/IEEE Category C High transients without failure or degradation of clamping voltage by more than 10%.
7. TVSS shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of not less than 115% of nominal RMS voltage.
8. TVSS shall be constructed of one self-contained suppression module per phase.
9. Visible indication of proper TVSS connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator lights shall indicate which phase as well as which module is fully operable. The status of each TVSS module shall be monitored on the front cover of the enclosure as well as on the module. A push-to-test button shall
be provided to test each phase indicator. Push-to-test button shall activate a state change of dry contacts for testing purposes.
10. TVSS shall be equipped with an audible alarm which shall activate when any one of the surge current
modules has reached an end-of-life condition. An alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm. The switches and alarm shall be located on the front cover of the enclosure.
11. A connector shall be provided along with dry contacts (normally open or normally closed) to allow connection to a remote monitor or other system. The output of the dry contacts shall indicate an end-of-life condition for the complete TVSS or module.
12. Terminals shall be provided for necessary power and ground connections.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Vendors: Square D/Schneider Electric, Surgelogic IMA Series END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5100 - 1
SECTION 26 5100 - LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. SECTION INCLUDES
1. Interior luminaires and accessories
2. Lamps
3. Ballasts
B. DEFINITIONS:
1. Luminaire: A luminaire is a complete lighting unit including light source(s) and parts required to distribute the light, position and protect the light source(s), and connect the light source(s) to the power supply.
2. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under specified operating and starting condition.
3. Total harmonic distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the fundamental current.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with project submittal procedures:
1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing luminaires, lamps, and ballasts. Include
data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. Arrange data for luminaires in the order of fixture designation.
2. Performance Curves/Data:
a. Submit certified photometric data for each type of luminaire.
b. Submit supply-air, return-air, heat-removal, and sound performance data for air
handling luminaires.
3. Drawings: Submit shop drawings for non-standard luminaires.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the International Building Code (IBC) for components and installation.
B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.
C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and ballasts
similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware and trim with the ceiling system.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5100 - 2
1.4 WARRANTY
A. LED Luminaires: Submit a warranty, mutually executed by the LED luminaire manufacturer
and the installer, agreeing to replace LED luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within five years, beginning on the date of substantial completion of project.
1.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A. Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to the following NECA National
Electrical Installation Standards:
1. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting
Systems (ANSI)
2. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish interior luminaires that comply with requirements specified below, indicated on the Drawings, and as required to meet conditions of installation.
B. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.
C. Metal components shall be formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.
D. Steel parts shall be finished with manufacturer's standard finish applied over a corrosion-resistant primer. Finish shall be free from runs, streaks, stains, holidays or defects.
E. Doors and frames shall be smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating
conditions. Relamping shall be possible without the use of tools. Doors, frames, lenses and diffusers shall be designed to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when
secured in the operating position.
F. Lenses, diffusers, covers and globes shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic unless specified otherwise on the Drawings. Lenses shall have 0.125 inches minimum thickness. Lenses for fluorescent troffers shall be injection molded.
G. Luminaires shall conform to UL 1598 - Luminaires. Provide product with damp location
listing or wet location listing as required by installation location.
H. Light diffusers, other than those made of metal or glass, used in air-handling light fixtures
shall be listed and marked “Fixture Light Diffusers for Air-Handling Fixtures.”
2.2 LED LUMINAIRES
A. For LED lighting in interior spaces, use NRTL-listed 120V or 277V luminaires with the performance characteristics listed below:
1. Minimum luminaire efficacy per IES LM-79-08, Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurement of Solid-State Lighting Products:
a. 90 lumens/watt for general lighting,
b. 50 lumens/watt for accent and display lighting, down-lighting, and special purpose lighting.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5100 - 3
2. Correlated color temperature (CCT) per IES LM-79-08 and ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008, Specification for the Chromaticity of Solid-State Lighting (SSL) Products:
a. as indicated in fixture schedule
3. Color rendering index (CRI): 90 or better per IES LM-79-08.
4. LED Design life (L70): Not less than 50,000 hours per IES LM-80-08, Approved Method:
Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
5. Driver System Design Life: Not less than the LED design life; note that the driver system
includes all associated components, not just the driver integrated circuit. Driver system design life is defined as when 2 percent of the systems would have failed.
6. Power factor: 0.90 or better.
7. Design ambient temperature: 35 °C (95 °F); note that this is the ambient temperature surrounding the luminaire, not the LED or driver heat-sink temperature.
8. EMI/RFI: Meet FCC 47 CFR Part 15.
9. Minimum dimming provisions or capability:
a. 50% step for general lighting,
b. Down to 20% for accent and display lighting, and special purpose lighting.
2.3 LUMINAIRE ACCESSORIES
A. Provide stud supports, mounting brackets, frames, plaster rings and other accessories required for luminaire installation.
B. Furnish hangers as specified below and as required by conditions of installation:
1. Stem hangers shall be made of 1/2-inch steel tubing with 45 degrees swivel ball hanger fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish the same as the luminaire.
2. Rod hangers shall be made of 1/4 inch threaded zinc-plated steel rod.
3. For HID luminaires provide hook hangers that are integrated assemblies matched to the
luminaire and line voltage; equip with threaded attachment, power cord and locking type plug. Provide a safety chain or cable for each luminaire that will attach to the building structure, the ballast housing, and to the reflector/diffuser assembly.
C. Use NRTL-listed T-bar safety clips for lay-in fluorescent luminaires.
D. Where indicated on the Drawings or where lamp breakage is detrimental, such as above
food counters, provide open fluorescent luminaires with:
1. Self-locking sockets or lamp retainers, two per lamp, and
2. Clear polycarbonate protective lamp sleeves with end caps over each lamp. Sleeve shall
have a light transmission of 95 percent and shall be rated for the thermal profile of the lamp and ballast.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's installation
instructions, approved shop drawings, and the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5100 - 4
1. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI)
2. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI).
B. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the Project site.
C. Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of the luminaire for wall-mounted fixtures.
D. Where the ceiling forms the protective membrane of a fire resistive assembly, install protective coverings over luminaires in accordance with NRTL requirements.
E. Install slack safety wires as described below for luminaires in or on suspended ceilings.
1. Wire shall be minimum 12 gage galvanized soft annealed steel wire conforming to ASTM A641.
2. Attach wire to the building structure directly above the attachment point on the box or luminaire; make trapezes of framing channel material as required to span obstacles
3. Secure wire(s) at each end with not less than three tight turns in 1-1/2 inches.
F. Install fluorescent emergency luminaires in suspended ceilings as follows:
1. Fasten the four corners of each luminaire to the suspended ceiling main channels or
framing members.
a. Use sheet metal screws or bolts to fasten luminaires above exit pathways.
b. Use NRTL listed clips, sheet metal screws, or bolts or to fasten luminaires that are not above exit pathways.
2. Install two independent slack safety wires per luminaire with dimensions not exceeding 2
ft x 4 ft. Install four independent slack safety wires per luminaire with dimensions exceeding 2 ft x 4 ft. Attach wires to the luminaire not more than 6 inches from the
luminaire corners.
G. Support pendant-mounted or cable-supported luminaires directly from the structure above using a 9 gage wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support.
1. Install seismic restraints for pendant-mounted and cable-supported luminaires.
2. Pendants, rods, cables, or chains 4 ft or longer shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degrees separation.
H. Connect luminaires in suspended ceilings using 6 ft. lengths of flexible wiring method
arranged accommodate not lea than 4 inches of differential seismic movement in any direction. Refer to Section 26 0533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, install lamps, energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver spare parts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:
1. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI)
2. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI)
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5100 - 5
B. Test electronic dimming ballasts for full range dimming capability.
1. Burn-in dimmer controlled fluorescent lamps at full output for not less than 100 hours
before dimming.
2. Check for visually detectable flicker over the full dimming range.
C. Provide factory certified programming and commisioning of the Lighting control panel and
Daylight sensors.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 26 6100/1
SECTION 26 6100 - AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. The Auxiliary Systems of this specification are sections that have numbers between 26 6100 – 26 6900. This specification will include the Auxiliary Sections that are relative to this project.
B. Each system mentioned herein is a complete system. Each network is a new system, an extension of an existing and/or a new system that incorporates an existing system into the new. Whatever the condition, the contractor shall provide all the equipment, materials, labor, etc. for a complete and operable network. Each system is specified to perform a
definite function. The function and operation of a system is the final objective and whatever the requirement to accomplish that objective shall be included. If for any reason the specifications do not complete the network, the bidder and/or manufacturers representative shall call the deficiencies to the attention of the engineer by facsimile five (5) days prior to the bid date, so they can be included in the addendum. Failure to
submit this information to the attention of the engineer does not relieve the bidder from supplying and installing the equipment needed for a complete and operable system. C. Walk through the system when the project is complete and each auxiliary system has been tested and ready to be set into operation, the contractor, the owner’s and
manufacturer’s representative shall test each component of each system for normal operation and report in writing to the architect and engineer that the system meets all the conditions and functions of the specifications for normal operation. 1. Example: In the case of the Fire Detection and Alarm System, the people mentioned above plus the local Fire Marshall (or his representative) shall check out the Fire Alarm System. Each component (break glass station, heat detector, ionization detector, alarms, etc.) shall be tested individually to prove their function in the total system. Any and all defective components shall be repaired and/or replaced. 2. Likewise each of the other auxiliary systems, one by one (sound, F.A., telephone, computer, etc.) shall be tested and written reports made on the results of the test. D. Return visits: Six months after the system has been accepted by the owner, the factory representative shall return to the project and check-out the system to determine the condition of operation, answer any questions of the operator and/or administrator, make repairs, etc., to determine if the system is operating to its full potential. E. The factory representative shall review with the operator and administrator on their use of the equipment making sure the equipment is used to the ultimate. F. Each auxiliary system shall carry a one year warranty from the date of acceptance by the owner.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Data Cabling 26 6210-1
SECTION 26 6210 – DATA SYSTEM CABLING
GENERAL
1.0 See drawings for additional system requirements.
2.0 The following specification and its associated drawings are intended to provide a set of instructions and materials needed to furnish and install Telecommunications Cabling, within parameters set by
industry standards. A. The information is modular in nature.
1. Each facility will have one or more of each module discussed. 2. Specifically included in this specification are cables, connecting hardware requirements to provide a Category 6A compliant link to each data port of the
workstations. B. Some of the information contained in the following is directed to the owner's architects,
electrical, mechanical, and structural engineers. This information points toward ideal conditions and may vary by site depending on actual conditions.
3.0 Cable and raceway installation and data room layouts shall conform to the 2011 BYUI Cabling
standards with the following EXCEPTION:
1. Contractor shall provide and install all raceway, cable tray, J-hooks, cable, jacks, racks, patch panels, ladder tray etc. for a complete horizontal cabling system.
END OF SECTION
2011
BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY – IDAHO
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD
Guidelines and best practices for those who have involvement in the cabling operations on the campus
of BYU-Idaho.
Table of Contents
Section 1: General Requirements for Doing Work on BYU-Idaho Cable Plant .......................................... 1
1.1 Contractor Requirements ......................................................................................................... 1
Section 2: BYU-Idaho Students Doing Work on the BYU-Idaho Cable Plant ............................................. 2
2.1 Student Team Members ........................................................................................................... 2
2.2 Student Tasks ............................................................................................................................ 2
Section 3: Telecommunication Rooms and Building Entrance Facilities...................................................3
3.1 Placement of TR’s and Entrance Facilities…………………………………………………………………………....3
3.2 TR’s and Entrance Facilities as Secure and Dedicated Rooms……………………………………………..…3
3.3 Equipment Consistency in TR’s and Entrance Facilities………………………………………………………….4
3.4 Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI) TR Standard Equipment………………………………………………..……..5
3.5 Minimum SYSTIMAX GigaSpeed Components of a TR or Entrance Facility……………………………5
3.6 Size and Dimensions of TR’s and Entrance Facilities……………………………………………………………..6
3.7 Guidelines for Cable Pathways Within, Entering, and Leaving TR’s and Entrance Facilities….6
3.8 Environmental Requirements for TR’s and Entrance Facilities……………………………………………..7
3.9 Power Requirements Inside of TR’s and Entrance Facilities………………………………………………….7
3.10 TR and Entrance Facility Grounding and Bonding Requirements………………………………………..8
3.11 Work Accessibility in TR’s and Entrance Facilities……………………………………………………………….8
3.12 Example TR Layout Diagrams with Minimum Requirements………………………………………………9
Section 4: Backbone Cabling……………………………………………..…………………………………………………………………10
4.1 Backbone Cable Count Requirements………………………………………………………………………………..10
4.2 Backbone Cabling in Utility Vaults……………………………………………………………………………………..10
4.3 Backbone Containing Conduits in Entrance Facilities………………………………………………………….11
4.4 Requirements for Entrance Facilities that Exceed Those of TR’s…………………………………………12
Section 5: Riser Cabling………………………………………………………………………………..………………………………………12
5.1 Fiber Riser Cable Count Requirements……………………………………………………………………………12
5.2 Copper Riser Cable Count Requirements…………………………………………………………………………13
Section 6: Horizontal Station Cabling…………………………………………………………………………………………………13
6.1 Requirements for Uniform Horizontal Station Cabling……………………………………………………..13
6.2 Horizontal Station Cabling Count Requirements……………………………………………………………….14
6.3 Guidelines for Horizontal Cable Dressing in the TR or Entrance Facility……………………………15
6.4 Example of Well Pencil Dressed Horizontal Cable……………………………………………………………..15
Section 7: Horizontal Pathways…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..15
7.1 Guidelines for Surface Raceways and In-Wall Installations………………………………………………..16
7.2 Guideline for Using Basket Style Cable Trays…………………………………………………………………….16
7.3 Guidelines for Horizontal Cable Runs in Conduits……………………………………………………………….17
7.4 Guidelines for J-Hooks and Cable Saddles as Cable Support……………………………………………...17
Section 8: Testing and Test Reports…………………………………………………………………………………………………….18
8.1 Guidelines for Testing…………………………………………………………………………………………………………18
8.2 Guidelines for Submission of Test Reports………………………………………………………………………….19
Section 9: Labeling of Copper and Fiber Optic Cabling…………………………………………………………………………19
9.1 Labeling Copper Horizontal Station Cables, Backbone Cables, and Riser Cables…………………19
9.2 Example of Labeling Horizontal Station Cable Faceplates……………………………………………………20
9.3 Guidelines for Labeling of Fiber Optic Cables……………………………………………………………………..20
9.4 Example of Labeling Fiber Optic Cabling…………………………………………………………………………….21
Section 10: Demolition of Cabling and Infrastructure…………………………………………………………………………21
10.1 Guidelines for Cable Demolition……………………………………………………………………………………….21
Section 11: Miscellaneous……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………22
Approved Contractors…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..23
Verification Sheet……………………………………………………………………………………….…………………………………………24
1
Section 1: General Requirements for Doing Work on
BYU-Idaho Cable Plant
1.1 Contractor Requirements
Cable contractors that do work on any aspect of the BYU-Idaho cable plant must meet the
following requirements.
Contractors doing work on campus must be certified members of Building Industry Consulting
Services International (BICSI).
Have a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) as a member of the staff and
team that actively participates in the work being done on campus.
Contractors must be Certified SYSTIMAX Structure Cabling System installers of copper and fiber
solutions and be a SYSTIMAX Certified VAR.
Company must have at least 10 years of experience in the installation of copper and fiber
solutions. This includes but is not limited to termination of fiber and copper ends and splicing of
large count fiber and copper cables.
Individual technicians must understand and be formally trained in the installation of copper and
fiber cabling and have 5 years of experience in such work. This experience includes but is not
limited to the status of SYSTIMAX Certified Installer.
On jobs and projects awarded to a contractor a lead technician must be assigned. This lead
technician shall not be replaced or removed from the project until its completion without
coordination with BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure personnel representing the project. BYU-Idaho
also reserves the right to request a new lead technician for unacceptable work during the
process of the project.
Contractor is required to have a Labor and Performance Bond equal to value of the contract.
Contractor is responsible for repair or replacement of items damaged by them in the work
process. The repair or replacement must match, meet, or exceed the model, and or quality, and
or value of the item damaged.
All work performed shall be in accordance to all NEC, NFPA, NESC, ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards, local
codes, this BYU-Idaho Cabling Standard, and all other applicable codes and standards.
Contractors must provide at least 1 year of warranty on their installation. This warranty assures
that all equipment, materials, and workmanship are in accordance with this document, contract
bid specification documents, and previous and for-mentioned codes in this document.
Contractor must be capable and authorized to provide manufacturer product warranty including
but not limited to the SYSTIMAX 20 year materials and installation warranty.
Bidders shall be selected from a list of pre-approved cabling contractors. This list is ever subject
to change based on past performance of contractors and availability of contractors that do this
type of work. The approved list is included in this document. (Refer to page 23 – Approved
Contractors)
2
Individuals doing work on the BYU-Idaho campus shall be respectful and considerate of
students, faculty, and staff of this University. This includes using modesty in language and dress
while working on campus.
When doing work in and around buildings, it may be necessary to temporarily navigate vehicles
on sidewalks for ease of loading and unloading. Effort shall be made to minimize this type of
vehicle traffic. Also, special care will be taken to avoid damage to landscape. Damage to
landscape will be the contractor’s responsibility to repair.
Bidders shall be required to read this document before submission of bid. Potential workers on
the cable plant of BYU-Idaho signify that they understand this document by signature on the last
page. These include outside contractors, student employees, and full time employees of BYU-
Idaho.
Section 2: BYU-Idaho Students Doing Work on the BYU-
Idaho Cable Plant
2.1 Student Team Members
BYU-Idaho employs students as technicians doing work on the various cabling and network systems on
campus. BYU-Idaho considers very valuable the contributions that students make. Students are trained
in the methods and approaches that we use on campus. Students doing work on campus will read and
understand this document before doing work. Work done in deviation from what is outlined in this
document will be done again. Students shall approach their different tasks with consideration to safety.
Student will use best safety practices when working on campus. This includes but is not limited to
proper use of tools and ladders and the use of Personal Protective Equipment such as safety glasses and
hardhats when necessary. There is a lead student who is a resource for questions from other student
team members concerning what are best practices for work on the BYU-Idaho campus. In addition to
the lead student, questions can be directed to members of the IT-Infrastructure team. Questions about
how to best accomplish tasks are not only necessary, but encouraged. Students who are not able and or
not willing to work in accordance to this standard and or not able to follow instruction from members of
the IT Network Infrastructure team will be dismissed.
2.2 Student Tasks
Demolition of cabling and other infrastructure that is no longer needed or used.
Pulling of copper horizontal permanent link station cables.
Termination and testing of copper horizontal permanent link station cables.
Pulling of fiber cables.
Termination and testing of fiber permanent link cables.
Labeling of cables on TR end and station end.
3
Installation of appropriate pathway components including J-hooks, cable tray, raceways, and
conduits.
Connection of patch cables to create links between equipment and users.
Documentation of cables, connections, and infrastructure.
Section 3: Telecommunication Rooms and Building
Entrance Facilities
In this document, and in related discussions, BYU-Idaho uses the term Telecommunication Room or TR
in accord with TIA/EIA and industry standard. We also use the term Entrance Facility to designate a TR
that is allocated for the room where network cabling and other service enter the building from the
outside. Entrance Facilities need to follow the same minimum guidelines as basic TR’s with possible
additional guidelines. Special considerations for Entrance Facilities will be outlined in more detail in
Section 4 of this document. Other previously used terms for these types of rooms but not used on this
campus include: BDF, IDF, and closet. Telecommunication Rooms are rooms that provide a secure
location for network and telecommunication cabling and supporting network equipment.
Telecommunication Rooms provide a distribution and connection point between backbone cabling and
distribution cabling. Whenever possible at least 1 TR should be located on each building floor. In new
constructions, careful consideration to network standards and network protocol limitations including
cable length should be made in selection of a location for a TR.
3.1 Placement of TR’s and Entrance Facilities
TR placement in new construction should be a decision that is made in close coordination with
representatives from contracted engineers tasked with building design, members of IT Infrastructure,
and members of the Physical Facilities design team. Any deviation from what is outlined in this
document should be agreed upon by all parties involved.
Considerations for placement of Telecommunication Rooms:
Size of allocated space that will be served by the TR.
Centrality on floor that TR will be serving.
Allowance for copper horizontal station cable permanent link runs to be less than 295 feet.
Accessibility to receive pathway from other parts of building including cable trays and conduits.
Ability to follow the TR stack approach when another floor serving TR is above or below.
Accessibility to TR from a common space such as a hall way.
3.2 TR’s and Entrance Facilities as Secure and Dedicated Rooms
The secure nature of a Telecommunication Room makes it necessary that it not be a shared space. Only
authorized individuals doing specific tasks should be allowed into the rooms that are considered TR’s.
This approach makes it necessary that functionality of the room be limited to activities associated with
4
moves, adds, and changes to network infrastructure and be performed by personnel in the Network
Infrastructure group. Entrance from other personnel and activities outside of this shall be prohibited.
TR’s must be secured with a campus 4165 key. This key should only be in possession of individuals that
have regular need of entering TR’s including Network Engineers in the Network Infrastructure group.
Any deviation from this outline of appropriate use of TR spaces should be agreed upon by the members
of the Network Infrastructure group.
TR’s can contain but are not limited to containing the following:
Patch cables
Permanent link cables
Cable management components
Grounding equipment
Hook-up wire for cross connection.
Network switching gear
Uninterruptable Power Supplies
Copper Station Cables
Single mode and multimode fiber cables
Power Transfer switching gear
Cabling and ground/lightning protection equipment for outside Emergency Phones
TR’s shall not be used for:
Storage for miscellaneous items from around the building
Custodial rooms for storage of mops, cleaning supplies, etc.
Office space
Electrical / HVAC / Security Systems
Tool and material storage
Student study or quiet space at any time of day
Space for miscellaneous IT equipment connectivity without coordination with IT Infrastructure
A pass through point for wiring for other systems not related to network infrastructure
An equipment location for systems not related to network infrastructure without coordination
with IT Infrastructure
3.3 Equipment Consistency in TR’s and Entrance Facilities
TR’s on campus consist of a uniform combination of equipment, cable management, cable, connectors,
and patch panels. This consistent approach allows us to keep a manageable stock of supplies for scaling
our cable plant and network infrastructure. We have adopted specific manufacturers of parts and
equipment that we accept as standard equipment in TR’s on campus. Individuals in IT Infrastructure
have received training in the installation and maintenance of many of these components. Support and
5
warranties are based on the professional installation of these specific components by BYU-Idaho
personnel and approved outside contractors.
3.4 Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI) TR Standard Equipment
Minimum Chatswork Products Inc. components of a Telecommunication Room:
3 ea. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI) 19” x 7’ Equipment Rack black in color (See diagram on
page 9)
4 ea. CPI 6” Dual-Sided Verticle Wire Manager Black to be installed on both sides of each 19”
rack black in color (See diagram on page 9)
3 ea. CPI 19” Horizontal Wire Manager Black in color
1 ea. CPI Rack Installation Kit black in color (1 ea. per rack)
CPI Rack Grounding Kit (1 ea. per rack)
CPI 18” Cable Runway Ladder Rack w/ appropriate joining hardware. Ladder rack should span
the entire top of the black in color
CPI 18” Cable radius maintaining waterfall for all locations where cable drops off Ladder Rack
CPI Ladder Rack stand-off kits for raising ladder rack above tops of 19” racks black in color
CPI 18” Wall angle support kit for all locations where ladder rack runs to wall
8 ea. CPI 6” Cable Retaining Posts black in color
CPI 18” Rack to Runway mounting plates as necessary to secure rack to stand off kits and
runway black in color
CPI Ladder Rack Rubber Bumpers to finish cut ends of Ladder Rack where necessary black in
color
Appropriate hardware to anchor racks to concrete floor and interconnect sections of Ladder
Rack.
3.5 Minimum SYSTIMAX GigaSpeed Components of a TR or Entrance
Facility:
Systimax 2091 Category 6A rated cabling in new buildings or new TR’s. In existing TR’s where
cable is being added to an existing cable plant and Category 6 is already installed, SYSTIMAX
2071 cable is adequate. Color of cable in new buildings should be white. Cable added to
existing buildings should match the color of cable currently in TR. (White or green)
SYSTIMAX GigaSpeed XL X10D 48 port patch panels with cable management rings shall be
installed in new buildings. In existing TR’s where cable is being added to an existing cable plant
and Category 6 is already installed, SYSTIMAX XL 48 port patch panels with cable management
rings are adequate.
Cable retaining clips provided with each SYSTIMAX patch panel will be used on all patch panel
terminations.
SYSTIMAX plastic label holders will be installed above each bank of six patch panel ports.
6
SYSTIMAX LIU get parts specific
SYSTIMAX FIBER (OR CORNING)
SYSTIMAX PATCH CABLES COPPER
SYSTIMAX FIBER JUMPER CABLES YELLOW OR ORANGE
3.6 Size and Dimensions of TR’s and Entrance Facilities
The size and dimensions of the TR and or Entrance Facility/TR are crucial to accommodating large pieces
of networking gear and often large counts of building cable. Typically larger spaces are needed for
additional Telecommunication Rooms that are also considered Building Entrance Facilities. Close
coordination between contracted engineers, IT Infrastructure, and facilities should occur when planning
a space for a TR or an Entrance Facility/TR.
General layout requirements for the Telecommunications Room include but are not limited to:
Rooms considered TR’s shall be at least 10’ by at least 8’. This size requirement may need
expanded based on the circumstantial demands on the room. These special circumstance
demands could include size of floor space served, building occupant needs, future requirements
of expansion and growth, and special network/telecom services used.
Rooms that are considered Entrance Facilities in addition to Telecommunication Rooms shall
have dimensions of at least 16’ by at least 8’ to accommodate the extra racks and gear
associated. (Refer to 4.4 for more details on Entrance Facility size)
The front most protruding portion of any equipment rack within the TR or Entrance Facility/TR
shall not be closer than 4 feet from the front wall of the TR. (See Diagram on page 9)
The back most protruding portion of any equipment rack within the TR or Entrance Facility/TR
shall not be closer than 3 feet from the back wall of the TR. (See Diagram on page 9)
It is preferred that no sprinkler heads be installed in TR’s or Entrance Facility/TR’s. In the event
that code requires sprinkler head(s) a wire protective cage shall be installed to protect the head.
Also, troughs shall be installed under water carrying pipes to prevent water damage to network
equipment.
3.7 Guidelines for Cable Pathways Within, Entering, and Leaving TR’s
and Entrance Facilities
Conduits and trays are the preferred form of pathway bringing cables to and from a TR and Entrance
Facility. Within the TR or Entrance Facility Black CPI 18” Ladder Tray is the preferred method for
supporting cables. In special cases cables may be routed inside of the TR using D rings as support.
These cases include the routing of cable for a wall mount TR phone, or the routing of grounding cable.
The smallest D Ring that accomplishes a neat and finished end product shall be used.
7
Inside TR pathway requirements include but are not limited to:
A minimum of 4 ea. 4” EMT conduits feeding a TR from the Building Entrance Facility.
A minimum of 4 ea. 4” EMT conduits from the TR to each of the individual floors that it serves.
Waterfall style cable management shall be installed to make the transition from the basket
cable tray that enters the TR or Entrance Facility to the 18” Ladder Tray within 36” of the basket
tray entering the TR or Entrance Facility.
Feeding conduits or conduit sleeves shall enter a TR or Entrance Facility and protrude at least 3”.
This 3” protrusion shall be typical of conduits entering through a floor, wall, or ceiling.
All conduits shall be reamed and have a plastic bushing installed.
Conduits shall not be left open. All applicable codes shall be followed regarding the installation
of appropriate fire stopping materials including but not limited to UL 1497, ASTM E814, and
ASTM E119. Acceptable fire stopping materials include but are not limited to putty, caulks, and
expanding pillows.
3.8 Environmental Requirements for TR’s and Entrance Facilities
TR’s and Entrance Facilities shall be part of an HVAC system that is able to maintain an ambient
temperature between 64 and 74 degrees Fahrenheit.
Relative humidity in TR’s shall be between 30% and 55% non-condensing.
Positive pressure shall be maintained in TR’s and Entrance Facilities with a minimum of one air
change every hour.
TR’s and Entrance Facilities must be part of an HVAC system that can maintain the above
mentioned temperatures and humidity range and air changes 24 hours each day and 365 days
each year.
Necessary maintenance to HVAC systems and replacement of filters shall be performed on a
regular schedule.
3.9 Power Requirements Inside of TR’s and Entrance Facilities
Power needs in the TR’s and Entrance Facility change depending on how the space will be used and
special requirements of the network gear that will be housed in the room. Close coordination shall be
made to discuss the individual power needs of each new TR or Entrance Facility with contracted
engineers, representatives from IT Infrastructure and Physical Facilities on new constructions. Below
are minimum requirements for a basic TR without consideration to special needs.
Each TR and Entrance Facility shall have a dedicated electrical panel that is servicing only of the
TR or Entrance Facility that it is in. This panel shall have circuitry to a building UPS system or to
E-power or to generator power that is considered E-power.
There shall be a minimum of 4 dedicated 3 wire 120 V 30 A circuits using NEMA L 6-20R.
There shall be a minimum of 2 ea. 120 V 20 A circuits on normal building power for use of
power tools and testers within the TR.
8
3.10 TR and Entrance Facility Grounding and Bonding Requirements
Applicable codes and standards must be adhered to with regard to grounding and bonding
including but not limited to NEC 250, ANSI/NFPA 780, and ANSI/EIA/TIA-607.
All racks, equipment, and cable shields shall be properly grounded. All cable trays shall be
bonded between sections and tied to ground.
The minimum cable that shall be used for grounding or bonding shall be of 6 gauge stranded
copper.
Direct attachment shall be made to the closest grounding point that is considered building
ground on the electrical grounding system of the building. This connection must provide the
necessary proper grounding equalization.
As mentioned in 3.3 of this document, the preferred manufacturer of parts for constructing a
ground bus bar or ground window is Chatsworth Products Inc.
3.11 Work Accessibility in TR’s and Entrance Facilities
Constant network moves adds and changes in a building mandate that TR’s and Entrance Facilities be
constructed in a fashion that facilitates adding station cables, demolishing station and riser cable, adding
network electronic equipment, and changing or replacing equipment. Special considerations in the
construction of the room should be made to facilitate this work. This includes but is not limited to:
Any type of ceiling that hinders the addition of cables to TR or Entrance Facility pathways shall
not be installed. When a ceiling is absolutely required by code the minimum floor to ceiling
height shall be no less than 8’ 6”. False or drop in grid ceilings are also not preferred.
TR’s and Entrance Facilities shall have fully opening doors that swing outward. Door openings
shall be without thresholds as they make difficult the maneuvering of heavy equipment. In dual
door openings, center posts shall not be installed. Doors shall be a minimum of 36” wide. Door
shall be secured with the 4165 campus key.
Fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be placed with consideration to rack placement. Lights shall
be mounted on walls at least on both sides of rack facing each other when possible. (See TR
diagram) Motion detecting light switches shall be installed. A minimum of 12” of space should
be between any portion of a light or lighting fixture and a cable tray or cable runway. Walls shall
be white to enhance room lighting.
3/4” AC grade Fire-rated Plywood shall be mounted on walls where there is a need to mount
multiple and various equipment items on walls. Flush hardware will be used for mounting this
plywood to wall. Plywood shall be painted white to match the rest of the room.
Floor shall have loading capacity of 100 pounds per square foot. Polished concrete or tile is
preferred for the floor finish. Carpet in TR’s or Entrance Facilities is not allowed.
All TR’s and Entrance Facilities shall be equipped with a broom, dust pan, and waste basket.
These items are not to leave the TR or Entrance Facility.
9
3.12 Example TR Layout Diagrams with Minimum Requirements
10
Section 4: Backbone Cabling
Backbone cables typically originate out of the Joseph F. Smith Building and extend through our system of
utility vaults on campus. Entrance Facilities are the point at which these backbone services enter a
building. These rooms typically must be larger than a regular TR space because of the higher number of
racks, backbone cabling, and equipment that goes into these rooms. Building Entrance Facilities are the
point where backbone cables entering the building are usually terminated.
4.1 Backbone Cable Count Requirements
Each building on the BYU-Idaho campus shall receive at least 24 single mode fibers. This count
requirement could be increased based on the services that are needed in the building. All fibers
and fiber terminating components shall be of the SYSTIMAX product line.
Each building on the BYU-Idaho campus shall receive at least 25 pairs of copper backbone
cabling. Outside copper backbone cabling shall be 24 gauge.
There are multiple large fiber and copper dark cable counts that are available in utility vaults for
splicing and taking cable counts into new constructions. Close coordination with BYU-Idaho IT
Infrastructure, Facilities personnel and contracted engineers and installers should occur when
splicing into existing infrastructure in utility vaults.
All backbone copper cable counts shall be protected with gas style cable protection fuses on
both ends of the cable.
All backbone copper cable counts shall be terminated on a 110 style panel in the Entrance
Facility with a separate cable extending the connectivity to a SYSTIMAX patch panel ready for
distribution to other TR’s in the building via risers.
All fiber backbone cable counts shall be terminated with LC style connectors that are loaded in
bulkheads and mounted in SYSTIMAX LIU(s).
Sharp kinks or bends will not be accepted on fiber or copper backbone cables.
A service loop of at least 20’ shall be installed on all backbone cables within the Entrance Facility
and be neatly looped and secured with Velcro and supported on Ladder Racks or attached to a
wall.
4.2 Backbone Cabling in Utility Vaults
Utility Vaults shall be cabled in a neat and organized manner.
Splice cases that are housed in utility vaults shall not be left on the ground, or hanging, or
suspended from the cables that they are splicing.
Splice cases shall be labeled according to the cables that they are splicing.
Angle supports shall be installed with necessary trays and shelves to keep cable loops off the
ground in a neat and organized manner.
11
Utility vaults on campus are a shared resource with our high voltage plant. Communications
cables shall not weave, cross, or mix in any way with the cables that are for high voltage. As
much distance as possible should be maintained between the two cable types.
Precautionary safety measures are the responsibility of the individual contractors that will be
doing work in the vaults. Utility vaults are considered a confined space on the campus of BYU-
Idaho. Safety measures should be taken by the contractor to assure a safe working
environment. This includes but should not be limited to testing for adequate oxygen levels in
vaults before entry.
20’ of service loop shall be installed in a neat manner in each vault that a new cable install
passes through.
Vaults should be maintained free of water and mud.
Vaults should be kept secure through the process of work that is happening in them and around
them. Workers shall make certain that all vaults are locked and secure when they are not
immediately attended to.
4.3 Backbone Containing Conduits in Entrance Facilities
At least 4 ea. 4” conduits shall be installed for the telecommunication systems cables entering
the building.
Cables shall not be installed between the utility vault or manhole and the Entrance Facility
without inner-duct. Cables pulled through 4” conduits without any type of inner-duct will not
be accepted.
At least one of the four conduits shall have 4 ea. 1” corrugated inner-duct installed. All conduits
that are cable containing at the time of turnover to owner will be threaded with the maximum
number of 1” inner-ducts to maximize the capacity of the 4” conduit.
All inner-ducts, fabric or corrugated that do not have cables installed shall be threaded with pull
lines.
Fabric inner-duct is a viable replacement solution for corrugated inner-duct. If fabric duct is
used, 3 ea. x 3 channel fabrics shall be installed using best practices to mitigate problems with
twist and bind in the fabric. Max Cell is the fabric inner-duct of choice on campus.
Conduits shall slope to the outside of the building as to not allow possible water drainage into
the building.
All best practices as defined by BICSI’s TDMM, electrical codes, and standards will be used in the
installation of underground conduits that feed Entrance Facilities. To be considered best
practice on BYU-Idaho campus the following is applicable:
o No conduit bends shall exceed 90 degrees.
o The conduit run must extend all the way into the building. No direct buried cable will be
accepted.
o Max bend radius of a 4” conduit is 10 times the inside diameter of the conduit. The max
bend radius of a 4” conduit is 40”.
12
o Empty conduits that enter a building shall be plugged with an appropriate fitting that
does not allow water or creatures to enter building.
o All conduit banks shall be encased in red concrete from the point where they leave the
utility vault until they either reach the building or reach the next utility vault.
Outdoor cables entering a building in a conduit must be terminated within 50’ of exiting the
conduit.
4.4 Requirements for Entrance Facilities that Exceed those of TR’s
Entrance Facilities must be in a location that is in proximity to the utility vault that will be
feeding the building.
The minimum size of an Entrance Facility shall be 8’ x 16’. This dimension is a minimum size.
The equipment and demands of the room could necessitate that the room be larger.
5 CPI equipment racks and corresponding CPI cable managers, CPI Ladder Racks, etc. shall be
typical of each building’s Entrance Facility. Refer to 3.4 for list of accepted CPI parts.
Section 5: Riser Cabling
Riser cabling is fiber or copper cabling that is used to extend services and connectivity from the Entrance
Facility to other TR’s within the same building.
5.1 Fiber Riser Cable Count Requirements
In most cases single mode fiber riser cable counts shall match the backbone cable counts to
each of the TR’s from the Entrance facility. This means that at least 24 strands of SYSTIMAX
single mode fiber shall be installed from the Entrance facility to each of the other TR’s in the
building.
At least 24 strands of SYSTIMAX 62.5 micron multimode fiber shall also be installed between the
Entrance Facility and each TR of the building.
All multimode and single mode fiber shall be terminated with SYSTIMAX LC style connectors on
both the Entrance Facility end and the TR end. These terminations shall be loaded in bulk heads
and mounted in the SYSTIMAX rack mounted LIU.
Fiber risers shall be installed free of sharp kinks or bends
Fiber risers shall be installed in 1” plenum rated corrugated inner-duct. An alternate method
may be the use of armored cable for the riser.
In all cases, fiber cables installed between the Entrance Facility and the TR must be
appropriately rated for plenum spaces.
Refer to 8.3 and 8.4 for information on labeling fiber optic cables.
13
5.2 Copper Riser Cable Count Requirements
In most cases copper riser cable counts shall match the backbone cable counts to each of the
TR’s from the Entrance facility. This means that at least 25 copper pairs of 24 gauge shall be
installed from the Entrance facility to each of the other TR’s in the building. This cable shall be
of the SYSTIMAX product line.
All copper riser cable counts shall be terminated on a 24 port SYSTIMAX XL patch panel mounted
in the CPI 19” rack with one pair terminated per patch panel port. This patch panel supports
termination positions for 24 pairs. The 25th pair shall be left coiled and un-terminated on both
ends.
In all cases, copper cables installed between the Entrance Facility and the TR must be
appropriately rated for plenum spaces.
Section 6: Horizontal Station Cabling
Horizontal cable is the connecting cable that typically extends from the TR to the user or station that it is
providing network connectivity for. Typically this cable is terminated on a patch panel on the TR end
and a jack or information outlet on the user end. Horizontal cabling on the BYU-Idaho campus is part of
a SCS or Structure Cabling System. The manufacturer of choice for our SCS is SYSTIMAX. Lack of cable
connectivity or network jacks in a particular location is solved by installing additional cables to meet the
specific user need. Solutions for lack of connectable ports do not include altering existing terminated
cable, connecting hubs, switches, or wireless devices.
6.1 Requirements for Uniform Horizontal Station Cabling
Only one Structure Cabling Solution shall be allowed to be installed on campus. The solution
shall be SYSTIMAX SCS.
Category 6 cabling is the standard for our campus. Category 3, 5, and 5e are not acceptable
grades of cable. They will not be allowed. The BYU-Idaho Center and the Hyrum Manwaring
Building are cabled with Category 6A white cabling. When additional cables are added to these
buildings they shall match in color and grade.
There are two colors of cables that shall be installed on campus. These colors are white and
green. Cable installed after the initial wiring of the building shall match the color of the rest of
the cable installed; either white or green.
We use the colors electric ivory and grey for our faceplates, information outlets or jacks. The
color of the jacks shall match the color of the rest of the jacks in the building. In new
constructions the color of the faceplates and jacks shall be coordinated with representatives of
IT Infrastructure, Facilities Management, and the contracted engineer.
14
The patch panel, cable and jack shall match in grade in all cases. This means that CAT 6 cable
shall be terminated on CAT 6 patch panels and CAT 6 Jacks. Mismatches in grade or
manufacturer of components will not be accepted.
Styles of faceplates shall be uniform throughout an entire building.
All cabling shall meet requirements of the space that it is installed in. Spaces that are
considered plenums shall be cabled with plenum rated cables.
Station cabling shall have at least a 10’ service loop inside the TR. The service loop shall be
neatly dressed and managed on the Ladder tray. Loops shall be managed and maintained in the
TR using Velcro. Plastic wire ties will not be accepted.
Horizontal or vertical orientation of faceplates shall match orientation of existing faceplates or
electrical outlets in the room.
6.2 Horizontal Station Cabling Count Requirements
Each space that is considered an office at the time of construction shall have at least 2 separate
locations of 3 station cables installed. These locations shall fit with the design of the furniture
that will be installed.
Each space that is considered for a location for vending machines shall have at least 1 location of
6 station cables installed
Each space that is considered a location for a wireless access point shall have at least 1 location
of 3 cables installed.
Each space that is considered for locating mechanical controls or networkable HVAC equipment
shall have at least 1 location of 3 cables installed.
Each space that is considered for locating electrical controls or networkable electrical
equipment shall have at least 1 location of 3 cables installed.
Classroom teaching stations or podiums shall have at least 1 location of 6 station cables installed
inside the podium to the standard and specification of our current campus podium design.
Each location where a TV or monitor would be mounted shall have at least 1 location of 3
station cables installed.
Each location where a multi-use printer/fax/copier machine will be shall have at least 1 location
of 6 station cables installed.
Each outdoor location of an Emergency Phone shall have 2 cables pulled in a conduit from the
phone pedestal outside to the nearest TR inside the nearest building to the phone. These cables
shall be of grade suitable for outside exposure, and be protected and grounded.
Courtesy phone locations shall have a single location of 1 cable installed. The jack shall be
installed in a SYSTIMAX stainless steel faceplate for durability.
Cabling counts for computer labs and other special needs areas will be addressed on an
individual lab basis. Sensible cabling counts will be installed to accommodate the needs of the
lab.
15
6.3 Guidelines for Horizontal Cable Dressing in the TR or Entrance
Facility
Cables shall be neatly pencil dressed upon entering the TR or Entrance Facility. This pencil style
dressing shall be maintained until termination at the patch panel.
Tangled or taught cables within the TR will not be accepted.
Cables shall be bundled in groups of 48 and Velcro wrapped every 2’. Cables adds shall build off
of partially formed bundles until the bundle reaches the count of 48 cables at which point a new
bundle shall be formed.
These bundles shall consist of a service loop of at least 10’ of horizontal cable.
6.4 Example of Well Pencil Dressed Horizontal Cable
Section 7: Horizontal Pathways
Horizontal pathways dictates how and where cables are routed. This includes the equipment that is put
in place in ceilings and on walls to keep cables managed and contained. Horizontal pathways should
also be engineered to protect cables from damage caused by work done in ceilings by other trades and
harmful effects of EMI on data signals on a copper cable.
16
7.1 Guidelines for Surface Raceways and In-Wall Installations
In new constructions conduits shall be extended from the jack location through walls to ceiling
spaces and continue to the main cable pathway for the building; usually a cable basket tray.
Surface raceways should never be the first choice of pathway for extending cable down a wall.
In adding cable to a finished building when possible wall cavities shall be fished to extend cable
to a location. A cut in box or old house box shall be used to attach a faceplate to a dry wall
where cable has been fished through the wall.
When the wall is unable to be fished the accepted pathway product to use is Wiremold brand
2300 series non-metallic raceway. This raceway shall be electric ivory in color. Components of
this raceway system that must be used include but are not limited to the following:
o Wiremold 2300 Series 5’ length pieces
o 2300 Series Entrance End Fitting for butting raceways up to ceiling
o 2300 Series Join Covers to cover all seams in raceway installations
o 2300 Series Deep Device Box for surface mount box installations
o 2300 Series Flat Elbow
o 2300 Series Inside Elbow
o 2300 Series Outside Elbow
Wiremold 2300 Series raceway shall be installed using wall anchors and not the sticky adhesive
backing.
The maximum number of cables to be fit in Wiremold 2300 Series raceway is 8.
All locations in raceway or not in raceway shall extend to the same off the floor distance as the
rest of the power outlets and data outlets in the room unless otherwise specified.
All raceway installations shall be straight and neat with no exposed cable to be seen.
7.2 Guidelines for Using Basket Style Cable Trays
Basket Trays are the preferred method of pathway for extending large amounts of cable for long
distances. The preferred model of tray in new constructions shall be CPI FastTrak with all of its
interconnecting components.
In new constructions basket trays should follow main hallways or corridors that are routes for
large amounts of cable.
Basket trays shall be installed with a minimum of 12” of clearance of lighting fixtures in ceilings.
Basket trays and all cable supports shall never make contact with the ceiling grid or use the
ceiling grid support wires for extra support.
In new construction conduits shall be extended from the location on the wall to a basket tray to
carry the cable the rest of the distance back to the TR.
Wire ties shall not be used to fasten cables to basket trays.
Cables shall not route tightly around basket tray intersections and corners, but rather loop
gradually with slack around the corners.
17
Trays in the ceiling shall be securely fastened to structurally sound members in the ceiling to
avoid sagging and swaying of tray.
Rough cut and Sharp edges on basket tray shall be filed off to avoid future injury to workers
installing cables.
Basket trays shall be sized appropriately for the amount of cable they will be supporting. Over
or undersized basket trays will not be acceptable.
Basket trays installed for support of network cables shall only be used for that purpose. Basket
trays shall not be used as support for other types of ceiling infrastructure.
7.3 Guidelines for Horizontal Cable Runs in Conduits
In new construction conduits shall be used to extend cable runs from their location on the wall
to a cable tray or to the TR.
Conduits feeding cable from cable tray shall extend 2” to 3” inches into the tray.
All conduits installed for the purpose of providing pathway for horizontal cable shall be at least
1” inside diameter regardless of the number of cables called for at the immediate install. Larger
than 1” trade size conduit shall be installed based on cable counts in reference to the table
below.
No more than 6 cables shall be installed in a 1” inside diameter conduit.
All conduit ends shall be fitted with a plastic bushing.
Conduit runs shall be installed with appropriate pull boxes and bends that do not exceed 90
degrees for ease and ability of pulling cable.
Conduits that do not have cable immediately installed shall be equipped with a pull line for
future cable installation.
Open conduits shall be stopped with fire-stopping putty or caulk in accordance to UL 1479 and
ASTM E814.
7.4 Guidelines for J-Hooks and Cable Saddles as Cable Support
J-Hooks are an acceptable pathway for cable only when a basket tray is not able to be installed,
or doesn’t make sense to install because of space and or accessibility limitations.
18
Erico Caddy CAT32 and CAT425 are the preferred model of cable support to be used on the BYU-
Idaho campus.
Minimum J-Hook size shall be 2 inches.
Cable retaining clips shall be installed with all J-Hooks to prevent cables from falling out of the
hooks
Hooks and cable saddles shall be properly and securely fastened using angle hanging brackets
and or beam clamps.
J-Hooks and or saddles shall be installed every 4’ to 5’. With a staggered distance between 4’
and 5’ to avoid a harmonic anomaly in the data signal.
3 Velcro tie wraps shall be installed between each J-Hook or saddle maintaining a neat and
contained bundle of cable.
Grid wire, sprinkler pipe, electrical conduit, HVAC duct work, ceiling grid, and ceiling tile are
never acceptable fasteners or supports for cabling.
Section 8: Testing and Test Reports
8.1 Guidelines for Testing
All Category 6 and 6A horizontal station cables and singlemode and multimode fiber optic cables
shall be tested using Fluke DTX 1800 Cable Analyzer. Contractors who wish to use other test
equipment may do so only with the approval of representatives of IT Infrastructure.
The Fluke DTX 1800 used for testing shall be within 1 year of its most recent calibration to be
used for certifying cable on campus.
The Fluke DTX 1800 shall be updated with the latest firmware when testing on our campus.
The Fluke DTX 1800 shall be set to the SYSTIMAX GigaSpeed cable Auto testing mode.
Horizontal copper cabling shall be tested only after the finishing faceplate has been put in place.
If for any reason the faceplate is removed and replaced, all horizontal cables at the location shall
be tested and certified again.
No cable installation is considered finished until a passing test result is achieved.
Copper riser and backbone pairs shall be tested using a DC continuity test.
Fiber optic cabling shall be tested in both directions using the correctly referenced and
calibrated Fluke DTX 1800 with fiber modules corresponding to the mode of fiber under test.
Multimode fiber shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm wavelengths.
Singlemode fiber shall be tested at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm wavelengths.
Each strand’s splice loss shall be no greater than 0.2 db. This shall not be an average measure of
all strands tested, but an individual strand requirement.
Loss per mated connector shall be 0.6 db or less for acceptance. This shall not be an average
measure of all strands tested, but an individual strand requirement.
No sampling testing will be allowed. All cables installed shall be tested and submitted.
19
8.2 Guidelines for Submission of Test Reports
The individual PASS test files shall be saved as the label of the cable that was tested.
An electronic copy of the test results shall be submitted to a representative of IT Infrastructure
before the install shall be considered complete.
Test results shall be submitted as .FLW file format for viewing with use of the Fluke Linkware
software.
On new constructions, as part of the test result submission a certificate noting a Certified
SYSTIMAX install has been performed shall also be submitted by the contractor who did the
installation.
Section 9: Labeling of Copper and Fiber Optic Cabling
Labeling is a crucial component of a finish cable install. Labeling shall be consistent in all building across
campus. An install will not be accepted until cables are properly labeled.
9.1 Labeling Copper Horizontal Station Cables, Backbone Cables, and
Riser Cables
All labels shall be printed. No hand written labels will be accepted.
Station cables shall have a wrap style label on the cable jacket behind the faceplate within 1” of
the termination to the jack, and another identical label that is on the jacket 1” from the
termination on the patch panel. This label shall be printed off from a professional model labeler
such as P-Touch, Brady, or Dyno Labeler.
Installers shall consistently follow the BYU-Idaho cable labeling schemes for copper cables. New
methods and or schemes of cable labeling will not be allowed.
Labels on SYSTIMAX patch panels shall be inserted into the plastic label holder accessory
available through SYSTIMAX. Gluing, taping, or hanging labels on patch panels will not be
accepted.
Labels on SYSTIMAX faceplates shall be printed. They shall also neatly and squarely be installed
behind the clear plastic window on the top or far left of the faceplate. The second clear plastic
window shall be inserted in the bottom or right side position available. This label shall have the
TR room number that the cable terminates in. The opaque window strip provided in the
SYSTIMAX faceplate kit shall not be used.
Backbone cable pairs shall be labeled at the patch panel where they terminate. They shall be
labeled with the four digit call out number that corresponds with its identifying label on the
Smith Building end of the cable. Coordination with BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure personnel shall
be made to determine the sequence of numbers to use.
20
Backbone cable jackets shall be labeled with their pair sequences as the leave splice cases in
utility vaults.
9.2 Example of Labeling Horizontal Station Cable Faceplates
In reference to faceplate diagram below
AAA = 3 letter building designation. Each building has a 2 or 3 letter designator. Consult with a
representative of BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure to know the correct building designator.
### = Room number that cable location is in. Sometimes a room has a letter designator to go
along with the room number. This letter designator shall be part of the faceplate label.
1 = Position of faceplate in the room. Rooms with multiple faceplates shall be labeled starting
with the location to the left of the main entrance of the room and rotate around the room
clockwise. A room with three separate face plates would be labeled 1 through 3 clockwise going
around the room.
ABC = Letter designator for position of individual cable in faceplate.
An example of a real face plate label could be: TAY-224-1 (this is only an example and shall not
be used verbatim on future installations)
9.3 Guidelines for Labeling of Fiber Optic Cables
A label shall be applied that calls out each strand in a fiber optic cable.
Labels shall be left hanging in the front of the LIU on both ends of the fiber cable.
Fiber labels shall match on both ends of the fiber.
21
Jackets of fiber optic cables shall be wrap labeled with their sequence and range where they
leave a splice case in the utility vault.
9.4 Example of Labeling Fiber Optic Cabling
AAA-###-BSM-123
AAA = 3 letter building designation. Each building has a 2 or 3 letter designator. Consult with a
representative of BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure to know the correct building designator.
### = Designates the TR room or the Entrance Facility where the far end of the fiber is
terminated.
BSM = Backbone Single Mode. This calls out the mode of the fiber and distinguishes the cable as
either backbone or riser fiber. A fiber designated for Multi Mode Riser use would be RMM for
Riser Multi Mode.
123 = Designates the strand count. This would be 123rd strand in that sequence.
An example of a real single mode backbone fiber 8th strand label in the Taylor building TR might
be: TAY-107-BSM-008. (this is only an example and shall not be used verbatim on future
installations)
Section 10: Demolition of Cabling and Infrastructure
Cables are typically considered a valuable resource even when they are not connecting a current
network device. Cables that are not connecting devices usually shall be left terminated in place for
possible future use. Arbitrary demolition of cable simply because they are not currently being used shall
not occur. In the event of a remodel or reworking of a space it often becomes necessary to remove old
cabling or unused cabling from a building. When a cabling system becomes outdated and due for
upgrade, the old cabling system must be completely demolished and removed.
10.1 Guidelines for Cable Demolition
Cable that is to be demolished shall be completely removed end to end. No remnants of the
cable shall be left in the ceilings, walls, pull boxes, or device boxes.
When a cable system is upgraded no left over components of the old system shall be savaged
and used in the new system. This includes jacks, patch panels, and cable lengths.
When a contractor is commissioned to do demolition work that contractor shall be responsible
for the complete demo and discard of all aspects of the infrastructure to be demolished.
Any damage by a contractor to infrastructure during the demolition process shall be the
responsibility of that contractor.
22
In the event of a building re-cable the cable demo and new cable installation shall be closely
coordinated with representatives of IT Infrastructure to minimize and or mitigate down time to
connected users of the cables in question.
Section 11: Miscellaneous
BYU-Idaho adheres to any new standards and codes that may be applicable that are not a
current part of this document. Anyone doing work on the BYU-Idaho cable plant is expected to
follow above mentioned new codes and standards.
BYU-Idaho considers all standards, codes, and best practices applicable that are outlined in the
BICSI Publication TDMM 12. (Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 12th Release)
Any exceptions or suggestions that deviate from this standard must be discussed with and
approved by members of the BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure team.
The BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure team desires to take a roll in the overall design of cabling
solutions and network systems of new constructions in conjunction with contracted engineers.
The IT Infrastructure team shall design TR layout, information outlet locations, and network
equipment placement strategies.
Those who shall understand and adhere to this document include:
o All employees of a cabling contractor doing work on the campus of BYU-Idaho.
o All technical staff of BYU-Idaho that may have dealings in the cable plant.
o All involved with the design, consulting, and implementation of new construction.
23
Approved Contractors
Cache Valley Electric
2345 South John Henry Drive
Salt Lake City, UT 84119
Contact: Brad Christensen
Phone: 801-908-4179
Mobile: 801-870-7198
System Tech Inc.
2854 Featherly Way
Boise, ID 83709
Contact: Jaren Layton
Phone 208-709-7521
24
Verification Sheet
I ________________________________, have read and understand the BYU-Idaho Cabling
Standard. I agree to use this standard along with all applicable local codes and standards in
designing, installing and maintaining the cabling infrastructure of BYU-Idaho. I understand that
any questions regarding this code should be directed to members of the BYU-Idaho IT
Infrastructure team. I also understand that suggestions of changes or new ideas must be
reviewed and accepted by members of the BYU-Idaho IT Infrastructure team.
___________________________________________
Signature
Verification can be sent to:
Travis Williams
525 S. Center Street
Rexburg, ID 83460
Phone: 208-496-7097
Mobile: 208-709-2192
williamstr@byui.edu
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 1
SECTION 26 6411 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The work covered by this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, equipment, materials and services to furnish and install a complete addressable fire alarm system with voice evacuation. It shall be complete with all necessary hardware, software and memory
specifically tailored for this installation. All equipment herein specified shall comply with application standards of Underwriters Laboratories, the National Fire Protection Association
and local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Location of the controls, alarm initiating devices, and alarm indicating devices shall be as
shown on the prints.
C. Electrical Contractor shall include in this bid $3000.00 cash allowance and ten man hours for miscellaneous additions and/or requirements imposed by local authority having jurisdiction.
1.01 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Installation shall be in accordance with UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES listings, the manufacturer’s recommendations, these specifications and the following standards:
1. NFPA 70-The National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 72-Chapters 1 through 9
3. Currently adopted IBC 4. Currently adopted IFC 5. Authorities having jurisdiction
B. Fire Alarm System shall be installed per Data Sheet 5-40, Fire Alarm Systems. The fire
alarm system and all related equipment shall be approved by FM Global. 1.02 GUARANTEE
A. All equipment and systems shall be guaranteed by the contractor for a period of three years
following acceptance by the owner. The guarantee shall include all parts, labor, prompt field service, pickup, installation and delivery.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing of fire alarm and detection equipment and accessories of the types and sizes required.
B. Installer: The contractor for the automatic fire alarm system shall be a duly licensed fire
alarm contractor by the state of Idaho. The contractor must by regularly engaged in the installation, testing and maintenance of automatic fire alarm and detection systems. The contractor shall be fully familiar with all local conditions, codes and requirements.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades. Work and/or equipment provided in other Sections and related to the fire alarm system shall include, but
not be limited to: 1. Sprinkler waterflow and supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed by the
plumbing contractor, but wired and connected by the electrical contractor.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 2
2. Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, installed wired and connected by the
Electrical Contractor. The contractor shall also furnish necessary duct openings to install the duct smoke detectors. Provide a monitor module per duct detector and a control module for each HVAC unit for fire alarm shut down.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CIRCUITING GUIDELINES
A. Each addressable analog loop shall be circuited as shown on the drawings but device loading is not to exceed 80% of loop capacity in order to leave for space for future devices. The loop shall have Class B operation.
B. Where it is necessary to interface conventional initiating devices provide intelligent input
modules to supervise zone wiring. C. Each of the following types of devices or equipment shall be provided with supervised
circuits as shown on the drawings but shall be typically as follows: 1. Sprinkler valve supervisory switches: Provide one (1) supervisory module circuit for
each sprinkler valve supervisory switch or flow. 2. Emergency generator: provide two (2) supervisory module circuits: one (1) for "Emergency Generator one"; one (1) for "Fire Pump Power Failure".
3. Dry pipe/deluge sprinkler release valves: Provide one (1) releasing module circuit for each dry pipe/deluge sprinkler release valve.
4. Computer room smoke alarm control panels: Provide one (1) alarm module circuit for each computer room smoke alarm control panel. 5. Kitchen hood suppressor system.
D. Each of the following types of alarm notification appliances shall be circuited as shown on
the drawings but shall be typically as follows: 1. Audible signals: provide one (1) notification appliance circuit for each twelve (12) alarm bells, speaker strobes and speakers.
E. Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system shall
be provided with a form 'C' control relay contact as shown on the drawings, but shall be typically as follows: 1. HVAC fan systems: Provide one (1) shutdown addressable control relay contact for each HVAC fan system. 2. HVAC supply fans: Provide one (1) shutdown addressable control relay contact for
each HVAC supply fan. 3. HVAC return fans: Provide one (1) shutdown addressable control relay contact for
each HVAC return fan. 4. HVAC exhaust systems: Provide one (1) shutdown addressable control relay contact for each HVAC exhaust fan as required.
2.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. The system shall identify any off normal condition and log each condition into the system
database as an event. 1. The system shall automatically display on the control panel Liquid Crystal Display the
first event of the highest priority by type. The priorities and types shall be alarm, supervisory, trouble, and monitor.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 3
2. The system shall have a labeled color coded indicator for each type of event; alarm-
red, supervisory - yellow, trouble - yellow, monitor - green which shall turn on when active events exist. 3. For each event, the display shall include the current time, the total number of events,
the type of event, the time the event occurred and up to a 40 character custom user description.
4. The user shall be able to silence the local signal and review each event by simply selecting scrolling keys (up-down) for each event type. 5. New supervisory or trouble events shall sound a silence-able signal at the control
panel.
B. Operation of any Alarm initiating device shall automatically: 1. Update the control/display as described above (2.02, A). 2. Sound all alarm signals throughout the building as the evacuation rate.
3. Turn on all strobe lights throughout the building. 4. Turn on a red alarm zone LED at the fire alarm control panel.
5. Operate the alarm relay contacts to initiate the transmission of an alarm to a central station agency via leased telephone lines. 6. Operate addressable control relay contacts to shutdown all HVAC units serving floor
of alarm. 7. Operate control relay contacts to return all elevators that serve the floor of alarm
initiation to the ground floor. If the alarm originates from the ground floor, operate control circuits contacts to return all elevators to the floor above or to a level as directed by the local fire department.
8. Operate control relay contacts to release all magnetically held smoke doors throughout the building.
9. Visually annunciate the zone of alarm on the remote annunciator panel. The visual indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal.
C. Activation of a sprinkler supervisory initiating device shall: 1. Update the control/display as described above and turn on the trouble relay.
2. Turn on a yellow zone LED at the fire alarm control panel. 3. Operate the supervisory relay contacts to initiate the transmission of an alarm to a central station agency via leased telephone lines.
4. Visually annunciate the zone of alarm on the remote annunciator panel. The visual indication shall remain on until the alarm condition is reset to normal.
D. The entire fire alarm system wiring shall be electrically supervised to automatically detect and report trouble conditions to the fire alarm control panel. Any opens, grounds or disarrangement of system wiring and shorts across alarm bell/strobe wiring shall automatically.
1. Update the control/display as described above (2.02, A). 2. Operate the supervisory relay contracts to initiate the transmission of an alarm to a
central station agency via leased telephone lines. 3. Visually and audibly annunciate a general trouble condition, on the remote annunciator panel. The visual indication shall remain on until the trouble condition is
repaired.
2.03 SUPPORT FOR INSTALLER AND OWNER MAINTENANCE A. Provide a coded one man walk test feature. Allow audible or silent testing. Signal alarms
and troubles during test. Allow receipt of alarms and programmed operations for alarms from areas not under test.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 4
B. Provide internal system diagnostics and maintenance user interface controls to display/report the power, communication, and general status of specific panel components,
detectors, and modules. C. Provide loop controller diagnostics to identify common alarm, trouble, ground fault, and
Class A fault. Addressable loop faults include device type changes by location, device additions/deletions and conventional open, short, and ground conditions.
D. Allow the user to display/report the condition of addressable analog detectors. Include device address, device type, percent obscuration, and current sensitivity indicator. The
sensitivity indicator shall provide the user with a measure of contamination of a device upon which cleaning decisions can confidently be made.
E. Allow the user to report history for alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, smoke verification, and restore activity. Include Facility Name, and the time and date of the History Report.
F. Allow the user to disable/enable devices, zones, actions, timers and sequences. Protect the
disable function with a password. G. Allow the user to activate/restore outputs, actions and sequences.
H. Allow the service user to enter time and date, reconfigure an external port for download
programming, initiate auto programming and change passwords. Protect these functions with a password.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS & INSTALLERS
A. The catalog numbers used are those of FCI Inc. and constitute the type and quality of equipment to be furnished. Acceptable manufacturers are: FCI, by Nelson Fire Systems, No Substitution. To meet the following specifications.
2.05 MATERIALS
A. Fire Alarm Control Panel: 1. The fire alarm control panels shall be Fire Control Instruments (FCI) E3 with Focal
Point Module and shall be a complete networked fire alarm system, with all wiring, programming, and connections as described on the drawings and this document. The
networked system shall be wired in a supervised, 2-wire fashion. The network shall include the capability of utilizing either twisted pair wiring, a pair of fiber optic cables up to 200 microns, or both, to maximize flexibility in system configuration. The system shall be a true peer to peer network and shall incorporate all control electronics, relays, and necessary modules and components in a semi-flush mounted cabinet. The
operating controls and zone/supervisory indicators shall be located behind locked door with viewing window. All control modules shall be labeled, and all zone locations shall
be identified. The assembly shall contain a base panel, system power supply and battery charger with optional modules suitable to meet the requirements of these specifications. The control panels shall have the capability to accept firmware
upgrades via connecting with a laptop computer, without the requirement of replacing microchips.
2. System circuits shall be configured as follow: Addressable analog loops Class B; Notification Appliance Circuits Class B. 3. Single stage operation.
4. The system shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design with expansion modules to serve up to 198 detectors and 196 remote modules, and
multiple notification appliance circuits (NACs) convertible to power risers to serve remote multiple NAC modules for zoned signal applications.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 5
5. The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in non-
volatile memory. The system shall survive a complete power failure intact. 6. The system shall have built-in automatic system programming to automatically address all system devices and provide a minimum default single stage alarm system
operation with support of alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, lamp test, and reset common controls.
7. The system shall allow down loading of a job specific custom program by means of a Field Configuration Program (FCP). It shall support programming of any input point to any output point.
8. The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the following operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, environmental
compensation, pre-alarm, normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, and isolator bases. 9. The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable loop devices for placement, correct location, and operation. It shall allow swapping of
"same type" devices without the need of addressing and impose the swapping of the "location" parameters on replacement device. It shall initiate and maintain a trouble if
a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble when the new device is addressed and defined into the system. 10. The system shall automatically test each analog smoke sensor a minimum of three
times daily. Failure of a sensor shall activate the system trouble circuitry, display a "test failed" indication, and identify the individual unit.
11. The system shall support 100% of all remote devices in alarm and provide support for a 100% compliment of detector isolator bases. 12. All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and return trouble if damaged or
removed. 13. The system shall have a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU fail.
14. The system evacuation signal rate shall be Temporal pattern. 15. Provide a signal silence inhibit feature set to enter integer time between 0-99 minutes and an automatic signal silence timer set to enter integer time between 0-99 minutes.
Audible notification appliances shall be affected by signal features. 16. The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes and
standards, and satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 17. Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations. 18. The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring to
automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. All outputs shall
be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm for 5 minutes. 19. The LCD Display shall be membrane style construction with a 2 line by 40 character Liquid Crystal Display. The LCD shall use backlighting for high contract visual clarity. In the normal mode display the time, the date, and provide 40 characters of user
defined text. In the alarm mode display space for user custom messages. The module shall have visual indicators for the following common control functions; AC
Power, alarm, supervisory, trouble, disable, ground fault, cpu fail, and test. There shall be common control keys and visual indictors for; reset alarm, silence, trouble silence, and drill. Provide Three pairs of display control keys for selection of event
display by type (alarm, supervisory, and trouble) and forward/backward scrolling through event listings. The operation of these keys shall be integrated with the related
common control indicators to flash the indicators when undisplayed events are available for display and turn on steady when all events have been displayed. Allow the first event of the highest priority to capture the LCD for display so that arriving fire
fighters can view the first alarm event "hands free". Provide system function keys; status, reports, enable, disable, activate, restore, program, and test. The module shall
have a numeric keypad, zero through nine with delete and enter keys.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 6
20. The Basic System Module shall contain the power supply, microprocessor, memory, system operating software stored on a non-volatile EPROM, system configuration
memory stored on a non-volatile EEPROM, and the circuits necessary to support a fire alarm system. Volatile memory shall not be acceptable. The module shall function as the system control center, processing all messages from the field devices
(supervisory, trouble, alarm). The microprocessor shall execute all supervisory programming to detect and report the failure or disconnection of any module or
peripheral device. 21. The microprocessor shall access the system program, for all control-by-event (CBE) functions. The system program shall not be lost upon failure of both primary and
secondary power. The basic system module shall provide communication with all analog/addressable devices (initiation/control) connected to the 7100 via two (2)
signaling line circuits. Each signaling line circuit shall communicate with a maximum of ninety-nine (99) analog sensors and ninety-eight (98) addressable monitor/control devices.
22. The basic system module shall contain a real-time clock capable of monitoring all real-time programming and all time control functions.
23. Two independent notification appliance circuits shall be provided on the basic module, polarized and rated at 1.5 amperes DC per circuit, individually overcurrent protected and supervised for opens, grounds, and short circuits.
24. Operate a Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) mounted in the Fire Alarm Control Panel for automatic transmission of the specific zone Alarm/Trouble to
a Digital Alarm Communicator Receiver station. The DACT shall support dual telephone lines, 20 PPS 3/2, 4/2 or ADEMCO Contact ID communications and configure for dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) or pulse modes. It shall be possible to
delay AC power failure reports, and auto test call. Selection of a central monitoring station agency, it’s equipment, its fees and fees for telephone lines are the
responsibility of the owner or his representative. B. Peripheral Devices
1. Analog Ionization Smoke Sensor, FCI model ASD-IL a) Analog ionization sensors shall have a low profile and contain dual ionization
chambers. Each sensor shall be capable of being set at seven (7) sensitivity settings ranging from 3.0 to 1.0 %/ft equivalent obscuration, with a predefined setting of 3.0%.
b) Automatic and manual functional sensitivity and performance tests shall be possible on all sensors without the need for generating smoke.
c) Two LED's providing 360- degree visibility of operating status and alarm indication shall be provided on each sensor. The LED's shall pulse periodically indicating that the sensor is receiving power and communication is taking place. This feature shall be field programmable. Upon alarm, these LED's shall light continuously. An alarm output shall be available for remote annunciation.
d) The system shall check the sensitivity of each sensor periodically. If a sensor alarm threshold sensitivity has changed, due to aging and/or dust accumulation,
the system shall automatically compensate for this change (drift compensation). e) Each sensor shall allow for setting of two sensitivity levels. These levels may
be programmed so that when the building is occupied, a sensor will be less sensitive than when the building is unoccupied. This feature permits the
sensors to be more reliable and at the same time reduces/minimizes unwanted alarms. This feature shall also incorporate programmable weekend days, where the sensor will remain at unoccupied sensitivity levels.
f) The sensor screen and cover assembly shall be removable for field cleaning.
2. Addressable Thermal Sensor, FCI model ATD-RL
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 7
a) Addressable thermal sensors shall have a low profile and operate on the combination "rate of rise" and "fixed temperature" principles with the fixed
temperature set point at 135 degrees F. They shall contain dual thermistor sensing circuitry for fast response. b) Two LED's providing 360- degree visibility of operating status and alarm
indication shall be provided on each sensor. The LED's shall pulse periodically indicating that the sensor is receiving power and communication is taking place.
This feature shall be field programmable. Upon alarm, these LED's shall light continuously. An alarm output shall be available for remote annunciation.
3. Monitor Modules a) Addressable Monitor Module, AMM-2
An addressable monitor module with an initiating circuit wired Class B, Style B shall be furnished to provide an address for individual, normally open (N.O.) contact devices.
b) Addressable Dual Monitor Module, AMM-2I An addressable monitor module with two (2) initiating circuits wired Class B,
Style B shall be furnished to provide two addresses for individual, normally open (N.O.) contact devices. c) Addressable Monitor Module, AMM-4S
An addressable monitor module with an initiating circuit capable of being configured with Class A, Style D or Class B, Style B shall be furnished to
provide an address for an individual, normally open (N.O.) contact device, or a collective address for a group of such devices. The AMM-4 module shall contain a red status LED that shall flash in a
quiescent mode and light continuously in an alarm mode. The LED shall be programmable not to provide quiescent status indication, if so desired.
d) Addressable Subloop Monitor Module, AMM-4S An addressable monitor module with an initiating circuit capable of being configured eith Class A, Style D or Class B, Style B shall be furnished to
provide a collective address for up to twenty (20) conventional two-wire smoke detectors.
The AMM-4S module shall contain a red status LED that shall flash in a quiescent mode and light continuously in an alarm mode. The LED shall be programmable not to provide quiescent status indication, if so desired.
e) Addressable Output Module. AOM-2R/S An addressable output module shall be connected to the same signaling line
circuit as the analog/addressable monitor devices and shall provide a DPDT relay output (2 form "C" 2 amp @ 24 VDC, resistive only) for the AOM-2R. The AOM-2S shall provide a notification appliance circuit output (1 amp @ 24 VDC, requiring separate power input) or a solenoid energizing circuit or releasing service.
The AOM-2R/S module shall contain a red status LED that shall flash in a quiescent mode and light continuously in an alarm mode. The LED shall be
programmable not to provide quiescent status indication, if so desired. f) Fault Isolator Module, Model (M500X) This module enables part of the signaling line circuit to continue operating when
a short circuit occurs on a section of it. An LED flashes in the normal condition and lights during a short circuit condition. The module automatically restored
the entire circuit to the normal condition when the short circuit is removed. This module may be used in multiple ways, in any combination with other modules, providing circuit operation similar to that of NFPA Style 7. It does not require an
address on the signaling line circuit.
4. Manual Fire Alarm Station, MS-2
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 8
a) Furnish and install a manual station (MS-2) as indicated. Each station shall be of the non-coded, double action type, requiring an outer door to be lifted to
expose the actuator door. Upon pulling forward of the actuator door, the unit shall lock into a readily observable "alarm" position. b) The station shall be constructed of aluminum (6063/T5), equipped with a break
glass rod feature, and require a key to reset. This key shall be keyed alike with the control cabinet. The stations shall employ a highly reliable action to activate
an alarm. This feature shall provide an exceptionally high resistance to accidental operation.
5. Duct Smoke Detector, ASD-RP200 a) A duct smoke detector shall be furnished and installed where required on
HVAC units. Each duct smoke detector shall be provided with two (2) form "C" relay rated @ 10 amperes. b) The ASD-RP200 shall contain a red status LED that shall flash in a quiescent
mode and light continuously in an alarm mode. The LED shall be programmable not to provide quiescent status indication, if so desired.
C. FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES 1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans:
a) Strobes shall be manufactured by Wheelock, RSS series. They shall provide
synchronized flash output. Provide strobe outputs as indicated on drawing. b) Speaker/Strobes shall be manufactured by Wheelock, E70 series for wall mount applications and Wheelock E90 series for ceiling mount applications. In-
Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Provide speaker/strobes as indicated on the drawings.
c) All notification appliances shall be white in color with red lettering. D. FIRE ALARM NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE POWER BOOSTER, FCI Model SNAC-4
1. Furnish and install where shown on plans; a) Furnish and install FCI SNAC-4 power booster for surface or semi-flush
mounting as shown on the plans. The power booster shall have four (4) Class 'A' or Class 'B' circuits. The power booster shall use a switching power supply. The output circuits may be activated in groups of two or four at a time. The
power booster shall be fully supervised for ground faults, short circuits, open circuits, and low battery. Any fault condition shall transmit a trouble signal to
the main panel. The power booster shall have an integral battery charger. The power booster shall have a 10 hour delay on transmission of trouble for AC power failure. E. ANCILLARY DEVICES;
1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans; a) Furnish and install magnetic door holder, FCI FM series, for flush wall
mounting as shown on the plans. The housings and contact plates shall have a brushed zinc finish. All units shall have a holding of force of approximately 25 lb. ft.
F. Tie panel to direct phone line for control station monitoring.
2.06 AUDIO EVACUATION SUBSYSTEM
A. Provide a tone and voice evacuation fire alarm subsystem as indicated below. The system shall be an extension of and integral part of the building fire alarm system. This subsystem
shall be activated, monitored, and controlled by the building fire alarm system. This
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 9
subsystem shall be U.L. listed with the fire alarm system as one system. It shall not be a stand alone evac system not listed with the FACP.
B. The subsystem shall be provided with a tone and voice evacuation control panel to be located as shown on the drawings. 100 watts minimum rms audio amplifiers shall be
provided along with all necessary 24 volt DC power supplies. Provide battery back up as required in other sections of the specification.
C. This subsystem shall be provided with the following features and functions. 1. Supervised System Microphone
2. Built-in Tone Generator 3. Minimum 3.5 Amp regulated Power Supply with battery charger
4. Two Digital 50 watt Audio Amplifiers 5. 25 volt rms Audio output 6. Auxiliary Audio input for Public Address Microphone
7. Minimum two supervised Speaker Circuits expandable to a total of 6 Circuits 8. All-Call-Switch
9. Trouble Silence Switch 10. Remote Reset Input
D. System shall be provided with a Digital Message Repeater. This module shall provide pre-recorded voice evacuation messages and tones. System shall provide for an alert tone
followed by a programmed message with the message repeated up to 7 times. The message shall be followed by a temporal alarm tone.
2.07 RECEIVER/GATEWAY SYSTEM
A. Receiver/Gateway System, Radionics Model 6600. 1. The supplier shall provide as indicated within this specification a Radionics 6600 Digital Alarm Communicator Receiver (DACR). Monitoring Automation Software
Package; Phoenix 2000 Desktop
B. The supplier shall provide as indicated within this specification a Phoenix 2000 Desktop automation software package including all necessary on-site and off-site training. The automation software shall be installed on a supplier provided computer station which shall
meet the specifications provided herein. The computer shall be installed per the owners specified location.
C. The Receiver/Gateway specified herein shall incorporate Digital Signaling Processing (DSP) techniques to receive and analyze different communication data formats, receive multiple formats from multiple communication paths and provide the flexibility to handle a wide range of communication requirements.
1. RECEIVER/GATEWAY SYSTEM FEATURE/CAPABILITY SUMMARY
The following indicates system software/hardware capabilities, capacities and formats: Telephone Network (PSTN) Communications: The Telephone Network (PTSN) Communications shall include the following features:
a) Receives signals on up to 32 phone lines simultaneously b) Independently configurable communication format settings for each phone line
c) A standard of 4 phone lines per card for each line card d) Visual front panel LED indicators for on-line and line-fault status conditions. LAN/WAN Gateway Communications:
2. The LAN/WAN Gateway Communications shall include the following features:
a) Supervised network automation computer links b) Supports up to 3200 network accounts (depending on supervision interval)
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 10
c) Supports Ethernet or Token Ring configurations
3. Programming Software: The Programming Software shall include the following features: a) Serial or LAN/WAN connection with Receiver/Gateway
b) Fully configurable user authority level control c) Receiver/Gateway parameter editing and storage
d) Receiver/Gateway software upgrade ability e) Event history buffer uploading
4. Central Processing Unit (CPU): The CPU shall include the following features: a) Re-programmable FLASH memory for software upgrades and future product
enhancements b) Direct interface to automation computers c) Event acknowledgement can be automation or manual push-button
d) 10,000 event history buffer
5. Inputs and Outputs: The Inputs and Outputs shall include the following features: a) Three serial ports 1. RS232 - DB9 connector
2. 2 Com ports - standard 3. 1 Com port – optional
b) One parallel port 1. DB25 connector c) Two programmable inputs
d) Two programmable outputs e) I/O signals isolation and transient suppression
6. Separate telephone line terminator cards for isolation and transient suppression 7. Front panel LCD display for manually reviewing status and event information
8. Front panel access for easy service of CPU card and line cards 9. PC-based platform design for future expandability
2.08 RECEIVER/GATEWAY SYSTEM INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
A. All Installations: The Receiver/Gateway shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code, the National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA 72 and the Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction. B. UL Installations: The Receiver/Gateway shall be installed in accordance with the following UL requirements: 1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 827 requires that any central station listed
for NFPA 72, Central Station Protective Signaling, UL Central Station Burglary and/or Police Station Connect Service must have a redundant receiver on premises to
be used in the event that the primary receiver malfunctions. 2. UL Standard 827 also states that the Receiver/Gateway operator must be able to switch from one receiver to a standby receiver within 30 seconds.
3. NFPA 72 requires that if more than eight telco lines are used, then receiving equipment must be completely duplicated so switch-over can be accomplished in 30
seconds. (Per NFPA 72-1996 4-5.3.2.2.1.1) 4. Burglar Alarm Applications: The Receiver/Gateway is intended to be installed in accordance with UL Standard 827 for Central Station Burglar Alarm Systems. To
supervise certificated accounts, this receiver must be used in a central station that has backup AC power per UL 827.
5. Fire Alarm Applications: The Receiver/Gateway is suitable for Central Station Signaling when it is installed and used in compliance with NFPA 72.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 11
C. SYSTEM HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
1. Receiver/Gateway System: The Receiver/Gateway shall be provided, at minimum, with the following components. Additional accessories shall be provided based on the quantities and features required for the application.
a) D6600 Communication Receiver/Gateway b) D6610 CPU Card
c) D6615 CPU Terminator Card d) D6640 Telephone Network Line Card e) D6645 Telephone Network Line Terminator Card
D. Minimum Specifications for Automation System Management Configuration:
1. PHOENIX 2000 Desktop Software Package 2. Pentium class processor or equivalent 3. 128 MB RAM
4. 10 GB Hard Disk 5. CD ROM Drive
6. 17" color monitor (1024x768 resolution) 7. Keyboard/Mouse 8. Two Serial Ports
9. 1 Parallel Port 10. 56K baud Internal Modem
11. Ethernet Network Card 12. Windows 8 Workstation/Win 98/2000 Professional
E. Supplier shall provide at no cost to the owner eight (8) hours minimum on-site training. Supplier shall also provide all necessary off-site training including transportation, lodging,
meals, and training manuals. 2.09 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Upon activation of any initiating device within the building, the building fire alarm evacuation
indicating appliances shall operate. This includes the voice evacuation subsystem described herein. Upon alarm all indication devices will activate. Upon manual command from the annunciators or fire alarm control panel, all evacuation tones and signals will
cease. Panel will reset upon reset command initiated at fire alarm annunciators
B. The FACP shall cause any existing sound or P.A. system to cease operation while the audio Evac system takes priority and after three rounds of the repeats the designated message until silenced by authorized personnel. C. The FACP shall transmit a digital signal via Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter
(DACT) to a central station receiver for dispatch of appropriate personnel.
D. Voice Evacuation 1. The voice evacuation subsystem shall be provided with a microphone allowing for local paging from the evacuation panel.
2. Provide high output UL listed fire alarm speakers as indicated on the plans. Speakers shall be provided with aluminum projectors and shall be capable of a minimum of 116
dba sound power at 15 watts. 3. All system components and interfaces shall be provided per UL 864.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION A. The control and other panels shall be mounted with sufficient clearance for observation and
testing.
B. All fire alarm junction boxes must be clearly marked (painted red) for easy identification. C. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
Article 760 and the following: 1. All fire alarm wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit, free-air wiring is prohibited.
2. All conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes, panels, detectors, alarm devices, etc. shall be mounted and fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the entire system.
3. No wiring other than that directly associated with the fire alarm and detection systems shall be permitted inside the fire alarm conduits.
4. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the maximum extent possible, if needed, they must be made only in junction boxes. Transposing or changing wire color coding of the wires shall not be permitted.
3.02 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Provide one year testing and maintenance, conducted by the qualified, factory trained fire alarm equipment supplier. The testing shall consist of the following, as a minimum:
1. Semi-annual testing of each automatic (heat, smoke) fire detector and manual fire alarm station.
2. Semi-annual testing of each supervisory signal device. 3. Tests and written reports which certify that all initiating and indicating devices have been tested and are operational shall be submitted bimonthly to the owner and
engineer. 4. The fire alarm equipment supplier shall offer a testing and maintenance agreement
providing the same service, as described above, to commence after expiration of the above program.
B. Final test and inspection shall be held in the presence of the engineer, the owner, and the authority having jurisdiction to their satisfaction. The fire alarm equipment supplier shall
conduct the tests. The contractor shall supply the personnel and equipment necessary to conduct the testing at no additional cost to the owner. C. All fire detection devices shall be marked in nominal 1/2” high letters with the zone and device number (for example 1-20, indicates zone 1, device number 20).
3.03 EQUIPMENT
A. The equipment shall be manufactured by a firm having an established reputation and experience, who shall have produced similar equipment for a period of at least five years.
The equipment supplier shall be able to refer to similar installations providing satisfactory service within the state of Idaho.
B. Part numbers and functions described herein are used to describe the levels of quality, features, and performance required by this specification. It is not the intent of these
specifications and plans to eliminate approved competitive equipment.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 26 6411 - 13
PART 4 - CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
4.01 PRELIMINARY A. Within thirty days after the contract award and prior to the purchase of any equipment, the
fire alarm system contractor shall submit for approval six (6) copies of the following: 1. A list of materials that are to be used on the project, including manufacturer, model
number and technical information. 2. Preliminary circuit diagrams showing interconnection of all modules, detectors, horns, panels and wiring counts. Diagrams are to be 11” x 17” done in a good workmanlike
manner. 3. Technical manuals for all of the equipment that is to be used on the project.
4. Submit shop drawings and calculations to the local authority having jurisdiction. Obtain a written Letter of Acceptance of the proposed system. Include with shop drawings submittal to engineer.
4.02 TESTS AND REPORTS
A. The contractor shall perform all of the electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment manufacturer. All test reports shall be submitted as part of the Acceptance Test
Procedure required by these specifications.
4.03 FINAL A. Before final acceptance of the work, the fire alarm system contractor shall deliver eight (8) copies of the operating and maintenance manual of this system to the Electrical Contractor
for inclusion in the Div. 26 O & M manuals. Each manual shall contain as a minimum the following:
1. As built circuit drawing. 2. Technical manuals containing information on the testing and maintenance of all equipment.
3. Recommended testing and maintenance schedule for all equipment including a recommended spare parts list.
4. The name, address, and telephone number of the person and/or firm to be contacted in the event of equipment failure. 5. The one year guarantee including effective date and the equipment that is covered.
6. Provide complete FA system database on disk to be stored with the Owner’s Manual at the job site.
7. Provide complete site map with zone addresses to be posted at the FACP for quick identification of device conditions. 8. Provide training for the Owner, at his convenience. No less than four hours of training shall be provided. 9. Provide training for the owner to the extent he desires. Owner should be completely
comfortable with the operation of the system when training is complete.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
AUDIO SYSTEMS 27 5115 - 1
SECTION 27 5115 - AUDIO SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install complete and operational sound systems as described in Contract Documents to include all equipment and materials, whether specifically mentioned herein or not, to ensure complete and operational systems. 2. Assist Audio / Video Consultant with commissioning and equalization of system and provide necessary test equipment for sound system tests. Correct problems found at time of commissioning of system. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26: a. Raceways, boxes, and fittings. 2. Audio / Video Consultant will perform commissioning, system balance, and equalization. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate commissioning schedule with Audio / Video Consultant three weeks minimum before Consultant's commissioning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Itemized list of equipment to be supplied with product data sheets in order shown on drawings
2. Shop drawings 3. System programming B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Equipment Manufacture’s manual 2) Sound system operation and maintenance instructions. 3) List of equipment provided, including portable equipment, showing make, model, and serial number. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranties. c. Record Documentation: 1) As-built drawings 2) Software and Programming: Copies of all manufacturers’ software used for programming various components and functions of the system shall be furnished to the Owner: a) Original source codes and compiled codes used for system control, audio setup and any other computerized functions of the system including screen layout generation, configuration and layouts and any other related computer files shall also be furnished to the Owner.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
AUDIO SYSTEMS 27 5115 - 2
b) In each and every case, all programming, code generation, configuration files, layout files and any other software and/or code written and generated of the setup and operation of this system are the property of the Owner of the system and not of the consultant, contractor or integrator. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements is not limited to following: 1. Installers Qualifications:
a. Approved Installers. Specified installers are to both furnish and install components of sound system. 1) Avidex: (801) 973-6483 2) Cache Valley Electric: (801) 908-2670 3) General Communications: (801) 266-5731 4) Marshall Industries: (801) 266-2428. 5) Poll Sound: (801) 261-2500. 6) Professional Systems Technology, Inc. (801)649-6696 7) TPI: (801)702-8242 8) Bids submitted by non-pre-qualified bidders will not be accepted. b. Installer’s Qualifications: 1) The work of this section will be contracted to a single firm, referred to as the Sound Installer for undivided responsibility. 2) The Sound Installer must be experienced in the installation of professional sound systems and have completed within the past five years at least five sound system projects of a size and scope comparable to the project described herein. 3) The Sound Installer shall have capabilities and in-house facilities for installation, shop fabrication and repair service of professional sound systems. 4) The Sound Installer shall have on his full-time payroll at least one staff engineer having five years minimum experience as an Audio engineer. In place of a qualified staff engineer, the Sound Installer may retain a consulting engineer to direct the project. Prior to bid acceptance, the qualifications of the consulting engineer shall be submitted for the approval of the Audio / Video Consultant. Said staff or consulting engineer shall: a) Provide all technical liaisons between the Sound Installer and the Consultant. b) Represent the Sound Installer at meetings and conferences, and be present at the job site for final inspection/ c) Be responsible for supervision of all technical and engineering work required executing the contract, and in particular, approving and signing of all shop drawings. 5) Must be a dealer or distributor of equipment included in bid and provide documents from manufacturers stating such. 6) Outline the general scope of past project, normal staffing levels, and union status of shop and field installation personnel. 7) List a minimum of three (5) projects of similar scope successfully completed, indicating the location, type of system installed, total contract amount, date completed, and include persons and telephone number to contact. 8) Submit confirmation of current state or local contracting licenses, as required to perform the work under this section. 2. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: a. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of sound system components and accessories for more than 5 years. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide complete warranty repair or replacement for one year from commissioning at no cost to
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
AUDIO SYSTEMS 27 5115 - 3
Owner, except in case of obvious abuse. 2. Honor component warranties for term established by Manufacturer if greater than one year. 3. Activate all manufacturers’ equipment warranties in Owner’s name to commence on the date of acceptance. 4. Replace defective equipment and faulty workmanship within 72 hours of discovery at no cost to the Owner during the warranty. 5. If, during the warranty period, any component is out of service for more than one week due to unavailability of parts or service, supply and install an identical new component. If an identical component is not available, substitute equivalent equipment, but only with approval of the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Performance:
1. Capabilities:
a. Installations with equalizers shall meet following performance parameters: 1) From 100 Hz to 2 kHz, flat within plus or minus 2 dB. 2) Above 2 kHz, slope down along an approximate 3 dB per octave slope to 8 kHz. b. No noise, hum, RFI pickup or distortion shall be audible under normal operating conditions. c. Sound systems shall reproduce program material at level of 80 to 85 dBA without audible distortion. d. All input levels shall be pre-set, so system may be operated without going into feedback under normal conditions. e. Seat-to-seat variations in the 2kHz octave band shall not exceed plus or minus 2 dB. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD COOPERATION A. Cooperate at all times and to the fullest extent with all trades during work to the end that lost time, work stoppages, interference, and inefficiencies do not occur.
3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings of systems prior to fabrication: 1. System functional block drawings including all equipment names and model numbers. 2. Provide full scale drawings of all custom plates and panels indicating exact lettering, critical dimensions, and finish. 3. Provide a list of test equipment, including manufacturer, description and model number of the test equipment expected to be employed in the test and adjustment of the systems. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Verify compliance with following items before beginning work of this Section.
a. No cables spliced. b. Isolated grounds run back to electrical panel from all equipment cabinets. c. Specified conduit, cables, speaker enclosures and equipment cabinets are properly installed. 3.4 INSTALLATION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
AUDIO SYSTEMS 27 5115 - 4
A. Equipment
1. Provide new equipment that shall meet or exceed the latest published specifications of the manufacturer in all respects as specified in the Equipment List on the drawings. 2. Supply the latest model, available at the time of bidding, of each piece of equipment. 3. Color of devices shall be reviewed and approved by the architect. B. Speakers: 1. Maintain uniform polarity in speakers and wiring. 2. Employ no positive stop in rotation of speaker volume controls. Controls shall be capable of continuous rotations in either direction. 3. Neatly mount speaker grilles, panels, connector plates, control panels, etc., tight, plumb, and square unless indicated otherwise on drawings. 4. Aim speakers as shown on the drawings. 5. Provide adequate fastenings and supports with a safety load factor of at least three and adhere to all seismic requirements. C. Equipment Cabinet: 1. Install vent panels at top and bottom of equipment cabinets for maximum ventilation. Locate amplifiers at top of cabinet if convection cooled or at the bottom if amplifier contains fans. Locate digital signal processors in the middle of equipment cabinet, separated by several blank panels. 2. Securely fasten equipment plumb and square in place. Utilize all fastening holes in front of cabinet. 3. Securely fasten in place equipment that is not rack mounted, including relays and other small components. Do not use sticky-back tape. 4. Install balancing / isolation transformer when balanced and unbalanced components are connected. 5. Wire XLR-type connections with pin 2 hot, pin 1 shield. 6. Connect powered components to 120 VAC outlets on voltage suppressors or power bars. Do not connect to outlets on other components. 7. Identification: a. Legibly identify user-operated system controls and system input / output jacks using engraved, permanently attached laminated plastic plates or imprinted Lexan labels. Label equipment and controls within equipment cabinets using similar labels or printed labels from a label maker or laser printer. b. Affix label to rack panel inside cabinet listing name and telephone number of installer. Appropriate warranty instructions may be included. D. Cables:
1. Leave sufficient service loops of uniform length on cables to allow for future equipment replacement. 2. Make parallel connections or splices on standard barrier terminal blocks, or on equipment terminals using appropriate connection type. Do not attach more than three wires under any one screw terminal. 3. Strip and heat shrink tubing on wires installed in Euroblock or Phoenix connectors so 1/16 inch (2 mm) of wire is exposed outside connector when wire contacts back of connector: a. Secure wires using screwdriver with blade of same width as screw slot and handle 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum diameter and of length to allow applying sufficient torque to prevent wires from becoming disconnected. 4. Terminate conductors with proper mating connectors: a. Do not use adapters. b. Use proper crimp tool as recommended by Connector Manufacturer.
5. Male CAT-6 connectors shall be grey-smoked or blue-smoked RJ-45's. a. After installing RJ-45 connectors, test CAT-6 cables for shorts, opens, and cross-pairing with two-piece wire-mapping continuity tester. 6. Secure cables to equipment cabinet with wire ties to ensure neat installation: 7. Ground both ends of each cable shielded within equipment cabinet only. Ground microphone
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
AUDIO SYSTEMS 27 5115 - 5
cables only at mixer. 8. Label within 6” of both ends of cables with source and destination. Use Hellermann Tyton Tag 49L-105 or similar label types. a. Example 1: PULPIT MIC: MIXER IN 1. b. Example 2: DSP OUT B: CC1 AMP IN. c. Group all cables according to the signals being carried. In order to reduce signal contamination, form separate groups for the following cables: 1) Microphone cables 2) UTP, sound system control, telephone, video or ATC cables 3) Loudspeaker cables 4) Antenna cables 5) Power cables at least a foot away from the above.
9. Install no cable with a bend radius less than that recommended by the cable manufacturer. 10. Grommets and other devices shall be used to insure the integrity of the cable now and in the future. 11. Bundle multiple cables in Tech Flex if in full view of the owner. 12. Use plenum rated cable, tie-wraps, and supports when conditions require it.
13. Free wire cable shall be supported every 4 feet and not lay on top of ceiling or other objects in the plenum space. E. Equipment installed in millwork shall be cut in with the upmost care and aesthetic value. Verify that adequate cooling for the electronics is sufficient. F. During installation if surfaces become damaged intentionally or unintentionally, they shall be repaired in a professional manner at no cost to the owner. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Installer Testing: a. After completion of installation but before commissioning by Audio / Video Consultant, perform following: 1) Conduct system tests and make necessary corrections for proper system operation including, but not limited to, following: a) Output level uniformity. b) Polarity. c) Shock, strain excited hum, and oscillation. d) Clipping, hum, noise, and RFI in all system configurations. e) Speaker line impedances.
f) Loose parts and poor workmanship. 2) Sweep speaker systems with high-level sine wave noise source. Correct causes of buzzes or rattles related to speakers or enclosures. Notify Contractor and Audio / Video Consultant of external causes of buzzes or rattles. 3) Aim speakers as shown on drawings and verify coverage. 4) Rough Balance: Balance system well enough that it can be used before commissioning. b. Complete documentation and submit to consultant 5 days prior to Substantial Completion. 1) Written notification with settings and as-built drawings. 2) Electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Manual. B. Field commissioning: 1. Audio / Video Consultant commissioning: a. Coordinate commissioning schedule with Audio / Video Consultant three weeks minimum before Consultant's visit. b. Have copy of redlined record documents available 5 days prior to Substantial Completion. c. Have loose equipment (microphones, cables, etc.) available at time of commissioning.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
AUDIO SYSTEMS 27 5115 - 6
d. Assist Audio / Video Consultant in the commissioning of completed systems. e. Provide following test equipment in good working order: 1) Laptop computer, 100 MHz Pentium or better, with 16-bit sound card, software, and interfacing adapters for microprocessor controlled equipment in system. 2) 1/12 octave real-time audio spectrum analyzer with SPL meter, and precision microphone. 3) Digitally generated random pink noise generator, 20Hz-20KHz, minimum 2-hour repetition rate or 10 minutes minimum of equivalent signal. 4) Direct reading audio impedance meter, minimum 3 frequencies, and 10 percent accuracy. 5) Digital Volt-Ohmmeter. 6) Audio oscillator, variable frequency, 20 Hz to 20 KHz.
7) MP3 player, with pre-recorded speech and music program material. 8) Necessary chargers, cables, test leads, adapters, and other accessories for test equipment. 9) Tools and spare parts for making adjustments and corrections to system. 10) CAT-6 / RJ-45 continuity tester similar to Ideal 62-200 or Amprobe DCT-300. f. Correct minor items so Audio / Video Consultant may certify satisfactory completion during his visit. C. Training 1. Provide training in the operation and maintenance of the systems by a qualified instructor or equipment manufacture for personnel designated by the Owner. 2. Training shall be after the systems are operational but before the commissioning. 3. Provide two DVD recordings of the training to the owner. 3.6 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. System acceptance tests shall not be performed until the initial system checkout has been completed. The system acceptance tests shall be supervised by the Consultant and shall consist of the following: 1. Take a physical inventory of all equipment on site and compare to equipment lists in the contract documents. 2. Demonstrate the operation of all system equipment. 3. Both subjective and objective tests will be required by the Consultant to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide test equipment specified by the Consultant for these tests. 4. Provide all final, "as-built" drawings, manuals, instruction video (DVD format) and other required documents. B. In the event that the systems are not completely installed, or further adjustment is required, or defective equipment must be repaired or replaced, tests may be suspended or continued at the option of the Consultant. The Consultant’s return trip shall be paid for by the installer prior to the Consultants return. 1. If the need for further adjustments becomes evident during the demonstration and testing, continue work until the installation operates properly. Included in the continued work shall include, but not be limited to, readjustment of loudspeaker aiming, adjustment of system equalizers, programming changes to the control system, if in the judgment of the Consultant, these adjustments are required. 2. If acceptance of the system is delayed because of defective equipment or because the equipment does not fulfill this specification, reimburse the Consultant for all time and expenses of the Consultant for these tests during any extensions of the acceptance-testing period. 3.7 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of the work, remove all refuse and rubbish from and about the premises daily, and shall leave the relevant areas and equipment clean and in an operational state. Repair any damage caused to the premises by the installation activities, at no cost to the Owner. 3.8 PROTECTION OF WORK
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
AUDIO SYSTEMS 27 5115 - 7
A. During the installation, and up to the date of final acceptance, protect finished and unfinished work against damage and loss. In the event of such damage or loss, replace or repair such work at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 27 5115
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 5117 - 1
SECTION 27 5117 - VIDEO SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install complete and operational video systems as described in Contract Documents to include all equipment and materials, whether specifically mentioned herein or not, to ensure complete and operational systems. 2. Assist Audio / Video Consultant with commissioning of systems and provide necessary test equipment for video system and partition noise isolation tests. Correct problems found at time of commissioning of system. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 26: a. Raceways, boxes, and fittings. 2. Audio / Video Consultant will perform commissioning, system balance, and equalization. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate commissioning schedule with Audio / Video Consultant three weeks minimum before Consultant's commissioning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Itemized list of equipment to be supplied with product data sheets in order shown on drawings
2. Shop drawings 3. System programming B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual: a. Operations and Maintenance Data: 1) Equipment Manufacture’s manual: 2) Video system operation and maintenance instructions. 3) List of equipment provided, including portable equipment, showing make, model, and serial number. b. Warranty Documentation: 1) Include copy of final, executed warranties. c. Record Documentation: 1) As-built drawings 2) Software and Programming: Copies of all manufacturers’ software used for programming various components and functions of the system shall be furnished to the Owner: a) Original source codes and compiled codes used for system control, video setup and any other computerized functions of the system including screen layout generation, configuration and layouts and any other related computer files shall also be furnished to the Owner.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 5117 - 2
b) In each and every case, all programming, code generation, configuration files, layout files and any other software and/or code written and generated of the setup and operation of this system are the property of the Owner of the system and not of the consultant, contractor or integrator. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Requirements is not limited to following: 1. Installers Qualifications:
a. Approved Installers. Specified installers are to both furnish and install components of video system. 1) Avidex: (801) 973-6483 2) Cache Valley Electric: (801) 908-2670 3) General Communications: (801) 266-5731 4) Marshall Industries: (801) 266-2428. 5) Poll Sound: (801) 261-2500. 6) Professional Systems Technology, Inc. (801)649-6696 7) TPI: (801)702-8242 8) Bids submitted by non-pre-qualified bidders will not be accepted. b. Installer’s Qualifications: 1) The work of this section will be contracted to a single firm, referred to as the Video Installer for undivided responsibility. 2) The Video Installer must be experienced in the installation of professional video systems and have completed within the past five years at least five video system projects of a size and scope comparable to the project described herein. 3) The Video Installer shall have capabilities and in-house facilities for installation, shop fabrication and repair service of professional video systems. 4) The Video Installer shall have on his full-time payroll at least one staff engineer having five years minimum experience as a Video engineer. In place of a qualified staff engineer, the Video Installer may retain a consulting engineer to direct the project. Prior to bid acceptance, the qualifications of the consulting engineer shall be submitted for the approval of the Consultant. Said staff or consulting engineer shall: a) Provide all technical liaisons between the Video Installer and the Consultant. b) Represent the Video Installer at meetings and conferences, and be present at the job site for final inspection/ c) Be responsible for supervision of all technical and engineering work required executing the contract, and in particular, approving and signing of all shop drawings. 5) Must be a dealer or distributor of equipment included in bid and provide documents from manufacturers stating such. 6) Outline the general scope of past project, normal staffing levels, and union status of shop and field installation personnel. 7) List a minimum of three (5) projects of similar scope successfully completed, indicating the location, type of system installed, total contract amount, date completed, and include persons and telephone number to contact. 8) Submit confirmation of current state or local contracting licenses, as required to perform the work under this section. 2. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: a. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of video system components and accessories for more than 5 years. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide complete warranty repair or replacement for one year at no cost to Owner, except in case of obvious abuse.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 5117 - 3
2. Honor component warranties for term established by Manufacturer, if greater than one year. 3. Activate all manufacturers’ equipment warranties in Owner’s name to commence on the date of acceptance. 4. Replace defective equipment and faulty workmanship within 72 hours of discovery at no cost to the Owner during the warranty. 5. If, during the warranty period, any component is out of service for more than one week due to unavailability of parts or service, supply and install an identical new component. If an identical component is not available, substitute equivalent equipment, but only with approval of the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM A. Performance:
1. Capabilities:
a. No noise, hum, RFI pickup or distortion shall be seen under normal operating conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD COOPERATION A. Cooperate at all times, and to the fullest extent with all trades during work to the end that lost time, work stoppages, interference, and inefficiencies do not occur. 3.2 SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings of systems prior to fabrication: 1. System functional block drawings including all equipment names and model numbers. 2. Provide full scale drawings of all custom plates and panels indicating exact lettering, critical dimensions, and finish. 3. Provide a list of test equipment, including manufacturer, description and model number of the test equipment expected to be employed in the test and adjustment of the systems. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify compliance with following items before beginning work of this Section.
a. No cables spliced. b. Isolated grounds run back to electrical panel from all equipment cabinets. c. Specified conduit, cables, and boxes are properly installed. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Equipment 1. Provide new equipment that shall meet or exceed the latest published specifications of the manufacturer in all respects as specified in the Equipment List on the drawings. 2. Supply the latest model, available at the time of bidding, of each piece of equipment. 3. Color of devices shall be reviewed and approved by the architect.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 5117 - 4
B. Equipment Cabinet: 1. Install vent panels at top and bottom of equipment cabinets. Securely fasten equipment plumb and square in place. Utilize all fastening holes in front of cabinet. 2. Securely fasten in place equipment that is not rack mounted, including small components. Do not use sticky-back tape. 3. Connect powered components to 120 VAC outlets on voltage suppressor or power bars. Do not connect to outlets on other components. 4. Identification: a. Legibly identify user-operated system controls and system input / output jacks using engraved, permanently attached laminated plastic plates or imprinted Lexan labels. Label equipment and controls within equipment cabinets using similar labels or printed labels from a label maker or laser printer. b. Affix label to rack panel inside cabinet listing name and telephone number of installer. Appropriate warranty instructions may be included. C. Cables:
1. Leave sufficient service loops of uniform length on cables to allow for future equipment replacement. 2. Terminate conductors with proper mating connectors: a. Do not use adapters. b. Use proper crimp tool as recommended by Connector Manufacturer. 3. Secure cables to equipment cabinet with wire ties to ensure neat installation:
4. Label within 6” of both ends of cables with source and destination. Use HellermannTyton Tag 49L-105 or similar label types. a. Example 1: PULPIT MIC: MIXER IN 1. b. Example 2: DSP OUT B: CC1 AMP IN. c. Group all cables according to the signals being carried. In order to reduce signal contamination, form separate groups for the following cables: 1) Microphone cables 2) UTP, video system control, telephone, video or ATC cables 3) Loudspeaker cables 4) Antenna cables 5) Power cables at least a foot away from the above. 5. Install no cable with a bend radius less than that recommended by the cable manufacturer.
6. Grommets and other devices shall be used to insure the integrity of the cable now and in the future. 7. Bundle multiple cables in Tech Flex if in full view of the owner. 8. Use plenum rated cable tie-wraps and supports when conditions require it. 9. Free wire cable shall be supported every 4 feet and not lay on top of ceiling or other object in the plenum space. D. Equipment installed in millwork shall be cut in with the upmost care and aesthetic value. Verify that adequate cooling for the electronics is sufficient. E. During installation if surfaces become damaged intentionally or unintentionally, they shall be repaired in a professional manner. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: 1. Installer Testing: a. After completion of installation but before commissioning by Audio / Video Consultant, perform following: 1) Conduct system tests and make necessary corrections for proper system operation including, but not limited to, following:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 5117 - 5
a) Output level uniformity. b) Polarity. c) Shock, strain excited hum, and oscillation. d) Hum, noise, and RFI in all system configurations. e) Loose parts and poor workmanship. 2) Introduce test signal patterns and adjust system for highest quality.
b. Complete documentation and submit to consultant 5 days prior to Substantial Completion. 1) Written notification with settings and as-built drawings. 2) Electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Manual. B. Field commissioning: 1. Audio / Video Consultant commissioning:
a. Coordinate final inspection schedule with Audio / Video Consultant three weeks minimum before Consultant's visit. b. Have copy of redlined record documents available 5 days prior to Substantial Completion. c. Have loose equipment available at time of inspection. d. Assist Audio / Video Consultant in commissioning of completed system. e. Provide following test equipment in good working order:
1) Video test generator similar to Extron VTG 300R 2) Oscilloscope 3) Test DVD similar to Digital Video Essentials Professional Edition 4) Tools and spare parts for making adjustments and corrections to system. 5) Blank cassette tape for testing cassette recorder. 6) CAT-6 / RJ-45 continuity tester similar to Ideal 62-200 or Amprobe DCT-300.
f. Correct minor items so Audio / Video Consultant may certify satisfactory completion during his visit. C. Training 1. Provide training in the operation and maintenance of the systems by a qualified instructor or equipment manufacture for personnel designated by the Owner. 2. Training shall be after the systems are operational but before the commissioning. 3. Provide two DVD recordings of the training to the owner. 3.6 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A. System acceptance tests shall not be performed until the initial system checkout has been completed. The system acceptance tests shall be supervised by the Consultant and shall consist of the following: 1. Take a physical inventory of all equipment on site and compare to equipment lists in the contract documents. 2. Demonstrate the operation of all system equipment. 3. Both subjective and objective tests will be required by the Consultant to determine compliance with the specifications. Provide test equipment specified by the Consultant for these tests. 4. Provide all final, "as-built" drawings, manuals, video (DVD format) and other required documents. B. In the event that the systems are not completely installed, or further adjustment is required, or defective equipment must be repaired or replaced, tests may be suspended or continued at the option of the Consultant. The Consultant’s return trip shall be paid for by the installer prior to the Consultants return. 1. If the need for further adjustments becomes evident during the demonstration and testing, continue work until the installation operates properly. Included in the continued work shall include, but not be limited to, changes to or installation of resistive pads, readjustment of loudspeaker aiming, adjustment of system equalizers, programming changes to the control system, if in the judgment of the Consultant, these adjustments are required.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 5117 - 6
2. If acceptance of the system is delayed because of defective equipment or because the equipment does not fulfill this specification, reimburse the Consultant for all time and expenses of the Consultant for these tests during any extensions of the acceptance-testing period. 3.7 CLEANUP AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of the work, remove all refuse and rubbish from and about the premises daily, and shall leave the relevant areas and equipment clean and in an operational state. Repair any damage caused to
the premises by the installation activities, at no cost to the Owner. 3.8 PROTECTION OF WORK A. During the installation, and up to the date of final acceptance, protect finished and unfinished work against damage and loss. In the event of such damage or loss, replace or repair such work at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 27 5117
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Earthwork Requirements 31 0501-1
SECTION 31 0501
COMMON EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited to: 1. General procedures and requirements for earthwork.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’ for multiple contracts.
2. Pre-Installation conferences held jointly with Section 31 0501 as described in Administrative Requirements on Part 1 of this specification section:
3. Section 32 9001: ‘Common Planting Requirements’: a. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other landscape related sections.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. Aggregate Base: Layer of granular material immediately below concrete and asphalt paving or miscellaneous site concrete (sidewalks, curbs, etc) and below interior concrete slabs on grade.
2. Base: See aggregate base. 3. Building Grading: sloping of grounds immediately adjacent to building. Proper grading causes
water to flow away from a structure. Grading can be accomplished either with machinery or by hand.
4. Compacted Fill: Placement of soils on building site placed and compacted per Contract Documents. Used to replace soils removed during excavation or to fill in low spot on building site.
5. Excavation: Removal of soil from project site or cavity formed by cutting, digging or scooping on project site.
6. Fine Grading (FG): Preparation of subgrade preceding placement of surfacing materials (aggregate base, asphalt or concrete paving, and topsoil) for contour of building site required.
Fine Grading is conducted to ensure that earth forms and surfaces have been properly shaped and subgrade has been brought to correct elevations. It is performed after rough grading and
placement of compacted fill but before placement of aggregate base or topsoil. 7. Finish Grading: Completed surface elevation of landscaping areas for seeding, sodding, and
planting on building site. 8. Natural Grade: Undisturbed natural surface of ground.
9. Rough Grading (RG): Grading, leveling, moving, removal and placement of existing or imported soil to its generally required location and elevation. Cut and fill is part of rough grading.
10. Subgrade (definition varies depending upon stage of construction and context of work being performed):
a. Prepared natural soils on which fill, aggregate base, or topsoil is placed. or
b. Prepared soils immediately beneath paving or topsoil. 11. Topsoil Placement and Grading: Topsoil placement and finish grading work required to prepare
site for installation of landscaping.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference for common earthwork sections:
a. Schedule conference after completion of site clearing but before beginning grading work.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Earthwork Requirements 31 0501-2
B. Sequencing: 1. General Earthwork:
a. Excavation. b. Rough Grading.
c. Fill. d. Fine Grading.
e. Aggregate Base or Topsoil Grading.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing And Inspection: 1. Owner is responsible for Quality Assurance. Quality assurance performed by Owner will be used
to validate Quality Control performed by Contractor. a. Owner will employ testing agencies to perform testing and inspection as specified in Field
Quality Control in Part 3 of this specification: 1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and perform contractor testing and inspection.
2) See Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Perform minor, investigative excavations to verify location of various existing underground
facilities at sufficient locations to assure that no conflict with the proposed work exists and sufficient clearance is available to avoid damage to existing facilities.
2. Perform investigative excavating ten (10) days minimum in advance of performing any excavation or underground work.
3. Upon discovery of conflicts or problems with existing facilities, notify Architect by phone or fax within twenty-four (24) hours. Follow telephone or fax notification with letter and diagrams
indicating conflict or problem and sufficient measurements and details to evaluate problem. 4. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection:
1. Spillage: a. Avoid spillage by covering and securing loads when hauling on or adjacent to public streets
or highways. b. Remove spillage and sweep, wash, or otherwise clean project, streets, and highways.
2. Dust Control: a. Take precautions necessary to prevent dust nuisance, both on-site and adjacent to public
and private properties. b. Correct or repair damage caused by dust.
3. Existing Plants And Features: a. Do not damage tops, trunks, and roots of existing trees and shrubs on site that are intended
to remain. b. Do not use heavy equipment within branch spread.
c. Interfering branches may be removed only with permission of Architect. d. Do not damage other plants and features that are to remain.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Earthwork Requirements 31 0501-3
3.3 REPAIR / RESTORATION
A. Adjust existing covers, boxes, and vaults to grade.
B. Replace broken or damaged covers, boxes, and vaults.
C. Independently confirm size, location, and number of covers, boxes, and vaults that require adjustment.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests And Inspections:
1. Civil and structural field tests, laboratory testing, and inspections are provided by the contractor as an independent Testing Agency as specified in Section 01 4523 ‘Testing And Inspection
Services’: a. Quality Control is sole responsibility of Contractor.
2. Testing and inspection of earthwork operations is required. 3. Field Tests and Laboratory Tests:
a. Owner reserves right to require additional testing to re-affirm suitability of completed work including compacted soils that have been exposed to adverse weather conditions.
4. Field Inspections: a. Notify Architect forty-eight (48) hours before performing excavation or fill work.
b. If weather, scheduling, or any other circumstance has interrupted work, notify Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before intended resumption of grading or compacting.
c. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
B. Non-Conforming Work: 1. If specified protection precautions are not taken or corrections and repairs not made promptly,
Owner may take such steps as may be deemed necessary and deduct costs of such from monies due to Contractor. Such action or lack of action on Owner's part does not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for proper protection of The Work.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Clearing And Grubbing 31 1100-1
SECTION 31 1100
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform clearing and grubbing as necessary to prepare site for rough grading and structure
excavation as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 31 0501: Common Earthwork Requirements: a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork.
b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections. c. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other landscape related sections.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Participate in pre-installation conferences as specified in Section 31 0501.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE
A. Tree And Brush Removal: 1. Cut off trees, shrubs, brush, and vegetative growth 12 inches (300 mm) maximum above ground.
2. Do not pull up or rip out roots of trees and shrubs that are to remain. If excavation through roots is required, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. Make clean, smooth, sloping cuts.
3. Cut roots 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in diameter only with Architect's written permission.
B. Grubbing:
1. Grub out stumps and roots 12 inches (300 mm) minimum below original ground surface, except as follows:
a. Under buildings, remove roots one inch and larger entirely. b. Entirely remove roots of plants that normally sprout from roots, as identified by Architect.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Remove from site trees, shrubs, uprooted stumps, vegetative layer, and surface debris and dispose of
legally.
B. Do not bury cuttings, stumps, roots, and other vegetative matter or burnt waste material on site.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Aggregate Base 31 1123-1
SECTION 31 1123
AGGREGATE BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install the following as described in Contract Documents:
a. Aggregate Base: 1) Interior concrete slabs-on-grade.
2) Miscellaneous exterior concrete (sidewalks, curb, gutter and equipment pads). 3) Asphalt paving.
4) Concrete paving. 5) Brick unit pavers.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’ for multiple contracts.
2. Section 01 4523: ‘Testing and Inspecting Services’ for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods.
3. Section 03 3111: 'Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete'. 4. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’:
a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork. b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections.
5. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’. 6. Section 31 2216: 'Fine Grading' for subgrade procedures.
7. Section 31 2323: 'Fill' for compaction procedures and tolerances. 8. Section 31 3116: 'Termite Control'.
9. Section 32 1216: 'Asphalt Paving. 10. Section 32 1313: 'Concrete Paving'.
11. Section 32 1416: 'Brick Unit Pavers'.
C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:
1. Vapor Retarder: a. Interior slabs on grade:
1) Under-slab vapor retarder and seam tape.
D. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 2616: 'Below-Grade Vapor Retarders' for: a. Furnishing of vapor retarder and seam tape.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. Aggregate (Asphalt Paving): a. Aggregate: A hard inert mineral material, such as gravel, crushed rock, slag, or sand.
b. Coarse Aggregate: Aggregate retained on No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve. c. Dense-Graded Aggregate: Aggregate that is graded from maximum size down through filler
with object of obtaining an asphalt mix with controlled void content and high stability. d. Fine Aggregate: Aggregate passing No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve.
e. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): Existing asphalt mixture that has been pulverized, usually by milling, and is used like an aggregate in recycling of asphalt pavements.
2. Gravel (Concrete Paving): a. Gravel: Material passing 75-mm (3-inch) sieve and retained on 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Aggregate Base 31 1123-2
b. Coarse Gravel: Material passing 75-mm (3-inch) sieve and retained on 19.0-mm (3/4-inch) sieve.
c. Fine Gravel: Material passing 19.0-mm (3/4-inch) sieve and retained on 4.75-mm (No. 4) sieve.
d. Maximum Size (of aggregate) - in specifications for, or description of aggregate, smallest sieve opening through which entire amount of aggregate is required to pass.
e. Nominal Maximum Size (of aggregate) - in specifications for, or description of aggregate, smallest sieve opening through which entire amount of aggregate is permitted to pass.
3. Sand (Concrete Paving): a. Sand: Material passing 4.75-mm sieve (No. 4) and retained on 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve.
b. Coarse Sand: Material passing 4.75-mm sieve (No. 4) and retained on 2.00-mm (No. 10) sieve.
c. Medium Sand: Material passing 2.00-mm sieve (No. 10) and retained on 0.475-mm (No. 40) sieve.
d. Fine Sand: Material passing 0.475-mm (No. 40) sieve and retained on 0.075-mm (No. 200) sieve.
e. Maximum Size (of aggregate) - in specifications for, or description of aggregate, smallest sieve opening through which entire amount of aggregate is required to pass.
f. Nominal Maximum Size (of aggregate) - in specifications for, or description of aggregate, smallest sieve opening through which entire amount of aggregate is permitted to pass.
B. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM C131/C131M-14, 'Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine’.
b. ASTM D1556/D1556M-15, ‘Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method’.
c. ASTM D1557-12, ‘Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))’.
d. ASTM D1883-16, 'Standard Test Method for California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of Laboratory-Compacted Soils.
e. ASTM D2167-15, ‘Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method’.
f. ASTM D2419-14, ‘Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate’.
g. ASTM D4318-17, ‘Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils'.
h. ASTM D6938-17, 'Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)’.
i. ASTM E1643-18a, 'Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs’.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in MANADORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 0501. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 31 0501, review following:
a. Review requirements and frequency of testing and inspections. b. Review termite control application requirements.
c. Review aggregate base installation requirements. d. Review vapor retarder installation requirements.
e. Review proposed miscellaneous exterior concrete schedule. f. Review proposed asphalt paving schedule.
g. Review proposed concrete paving schedule. h. Review proposed brick unit pavers schedule.
i. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section.
1) Review frequency of testing and inspections.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Aggregate Base 31 1123-3
B. Sequencing: 1. Compaction as described in Section 31 2216 'Fine Grading'.
2. Termite Control: a. Termite application as described in Section 31 3116 ‘Termite Control’:
1) Application OPTION A: a) Apply termite protection on top of soil base before aggregate base and vapor
retarder is installed. 2) Application OPTION B:
a) Install vapor retarder after application of termite protection on top of aggregate base.
3. Exterior Footings and Foundations are installed. 4. Vapor Retarder below interior concrete slabs on grade:
a. Install below-grade vapor retarder on top of aggregate base. 5. Aggregate Base:
a. Install aggregate base at location shown in Contract Drawings. 6. Concrete Slab is installed.
C. Scheduling: 1. Interior slab-on-grade concrete:
a. Notify Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before installation of concrete to allow inspection of vapor retarder installation.
b. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before installation of interior concrete slabs to allow inspection of aggregate base.
c. Allow special inspector to review all sub grades and excavations to determine if building pad has been prepared in accordance with geotechnical report prior to placing any aggregate
base. 2. Miscellaneous exterior concrete:
a. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before placing concrete for exterior site work concrete (sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc.), footings, foundation walls,
and building slabs to allow inspection of aggregate base. 3. Asphalt Paving:
a. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before placing aggregate base to allow inspection of aggregate base.
4. Concrete Paving: a. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before placing
aggregate base to allow inspection of aggregate base. 5. Brick Unit Pavers:
a. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before placing aggregate base.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation:
1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of aggregate base.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing And Inspection:
1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for aggregate base: a. Owner is responsible for Quality Assurance. Quality assurance performed by Owner will be
used to validate Quality Control performed by Contractor. b. Owner will employ testing agencies to perform testing and inspection for aggregate base as
specified in Field Quality Control in Part 3 of this specification.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Aggregate Base 31 1123-4
1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of
Contract Documents and perform contractor testing and inspection. 2) See Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Do not perform work during unfavorable conditions as specified below:
a. Aggregate Base: 1) Presence of free surface water.
2) Over-saturated sub base materials. b. Vapor Retarder:
1) Unacceptable conditions for installation include presence of high winds which would tear or damage vapor retarder.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate Base: 1. Under Interior Slab-On-Grade Concrete (Section 03 3111 'Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete'):
a. New Aggregate Base: 1) Gravel: 3/4 inch 18mm minimum to one inch 25 mm maximum well-graded, clean
gravel or crushed rock. 2) Base type gravel or crushed rock, graded by weight as follows (three-quarter to one-
inch clean gap-graded gravel): a) Road Base type gravel or crushed stone (slag not allowed), graded as follows:
(1) Sieve Percent of Weight Passing (a) 1 inch (25.4 mm) 100
(b) 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) 90 - 80 (c) 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) 20 - 40
(d) 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 5 - 10 (e) No. 4 (4.750 mm) 0 - 12
2. Under Exterior Concrete (Section 03 3111 'Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete') excluding Concrete Paving):
a. New Aggregate Base: 1) Road Base to conform to State DOT Specifications.
3. Under Asphalt Paving (Section 32 1216 'Asphalt Paving'): a. New Aggregate Base:
1) Road Base to conform to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minus State DOT Specifications and Gradations.
2) Aggregate base shall be non-plastic. 4. Under Concrete Paving (Section 32 1313 'Concrete Paving'):
a. New Aggregate Base: 1) Road Base to conform to 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) minus State DOT Specifications and
Gradations. 2) Aggregate base shall be non-plastic.
5. Brick Pavers (Section 32 1416 'Brick Unit Pavers): a. New Aggregate Base:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Aggregate Base 31 1123-5
1) Road Base type gravel or crushed stone, graded as follows: a) Sieve Percent of Weight Passing
(1) 1 inch (25.4 mm) 100 (2) 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) 85 - 100
(3) No. 4 (4.750 mm) 45 - 60 (4) No. 10 (2.000 mm) 30 - 50
(5) No. 200 (0.075 mm) 5 - 10 (non plastic)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Stockpiles:
1. Provide area for each stockpile of adequate size, reasonably uniform in cross-section, well drained, and cleared of foreign materials.
2. Locate piles so that there is no contamination by foreign material and no intermingling of aggregates from adjacent piles. Do not use steel-tracked equipment on stockpiles.
3. Do not store aggregates from different sources, geological classifications, or of different gradings in stockpiles near each other unless bulkhead is placed between different materials.
4. Do not use washed aggregates sooner than twenty-four (24) hours after washing or until surplus water has drained out and material has uniform moisture content.
5. Do not stockpile higher than 15 feet (4.57 m). Cover or otherwise protect stockpiles for use in HMA to prevent buildup of moisture.
B. Surface Preparation (Miscellaneous Exterior Concrete): 1. Subgrade:
a. Finish grade to grades required by Contract Documents. b. Compact subgrade as specified in Section 31 2323.
C. Surface Preparation (Asphalt Paving): 1. Subgrade:
a. Finish grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents. b. Aggregate base and paving must be placed before any moisture or seasonal changes occur
to subgrade that would cause compaction tests previously performed to be erroneous. Recompact and retest subgrade soils that have been left exposed to weather.
D. Surface Preparation (Concrete Paving): 1. Subgrade:
a. Finish grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents. b. Aggregate base and paving must be placed before any moisture or seasonal changes occur
to subgrade that would cause compaction tests previously performed to be erroneous. Recompact and retest subgrade soils that have been left exposed to weather.
E. Surface Preparation (Interior Slab-On-Grade Concrete): 1. Vapor Retarder:
a. Install vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 except where Contract Documents indicate otherwise and following instructions:
1) Install vapor retarder over aggregate base over compacted subgrade so entire area under slab is covered.
2) Install vapor retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 at interior stem walls. 3) Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) minimum and seal with specified seam tape.
4) Seal vapor retarder around pipes, conduits, and other utility items that penetrate vapor retarder using factory-fabricated boot installed as recommended by Manufacturer.
5) Except for punctures required for reinforcing and anchor bolts at top of stem walls, seal tears and punctures.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Aggregate Base 31 1123-6
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Aggregate Base:
1. General: a. Do not place aggregate base material when subgrade is frozen or unstable.
b. Spread aggregate base material with equipment except in limited or restricted areas where use of hand spreading is allowed.
c. Spread aggregate base material in manner that does not break down material and eliminates segregation, ruts, and ridges.
d. Correct damage to aggregate base caused by construction activities and maintain corrected aggregate base until subsequent course is placed.
e. Do not allow traffic on aggregate base. f. Remove all standing storm water.
2. Under interior concrete slab-on-grade aggregate base: a. Place 4 inches (100 mm) minimum of aggregate base under vapor retarder, level, and
compact with vibratory plate compactor. 3. Under miscellaneous exterior concrete aggregate base:
a. Except under mow strips, place 4 inches (100 mm) minimum of aggregate base, level, and compact as specified in Section 31 2323.
4. Asphalt paving aggregate base: a. 4” thick minimum after compaction in accordance with Contract Drawings.
b. If roller is smaller than 8 ton (7260 kg), lay aggregate base and compact in two courses. c. Compact as specified in Section 31 2323.
d. Priming: Prime aggregate base with application of 0.2 to 0.5 gallons (2 to 5 liters) of asphalt cement primer per square yard (meter) if pavement will be laid more than three days after
compaction of aggregate base, or if precipitation is anticipated between completion of compaction of aggregate base and laying of asphalt paving.
e. Recompact unprimed aggregate base if it receives precipitation before pavement is laid. f. Remove or repair improperly prepared areas as directed by Architect.
5. Concrete paving aggregate base: a. 4” thick minimum after compaction in accordance with Contract Drawings.
b. Compact to ninety-five (95) percent minimum density as determined by ASTM D1557. c. Recompact unprimed aggregate base if it receives precipitation before paving is laid.
d. Remove or repair improperly prepared areas as directed by Architect. 6. Brick unit pavers aggregate base:
a. 6 inches (150 mm) thick minimum after compaction. b. Compact to ninety-five (95) percent minimum density as determined by ASTM D1557.
c. Remove or repair improperly prepared areas as directed by Architect.
B. Tolerances:
1. Asphalt Paving Areas: a. Aggregate base:
1) 0.00 inches (0.00 mm) high. 2) Measure using string line from curb to curb, gutter, flat drainage structure, or grade
break. 3) Finished base course shall be true to line and grade within plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10
feet (6 mm in 3 meters). 4) Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot (28 mm).
b. Concrete Paving Areas: 1) 0.00 inches (0.00 mm) high.
2) Measure using string line from curb to curb, gutter, flat drainage structure, or grade Measure using string line from curb to curb, gutter, flat drainage structure, or grade
break. 3) Finished base course shall be true to line and grade within plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10
feet (6 mm in 3 meters). 4) Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot (28 mm).
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Aggregate Base 31 1123-7
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests And Inspections:
1. Civil and structural field tests, laboratory testing, and inspections are provided by Owner’s
independent Testing Agency as specified in Section 01 4523 ‘Testing And Inspection Services’:
a. Quality Control is sole responsibility of Contractor. 1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform testing and inspection as part of his Quality Control: a) Testing and inspections, if performed by Contractor, will be responsibility of
Contractor to be performed by an independent entity. 2. Aggregate Base:
a. Interior slab-on-grade concrete areas: 1) Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for interior aggregate base.
2) Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. 3) Testing Agency will test compaction of base in place according to ASTM
D1556/D1556M, ASTM D2167, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at following frequency:
a) Building Slab Areas: One test for every 2,500 sq. ft. (232 sq. m) or less of building slab area but no fewer than three tests.
b. Miscellaneous exterior concrete areas: 1) Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for exterior aggregate base.
2) Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. 3) Testing Agency will test compaction of base in place according to ASTM
D1556/D1556M, ASTM D2167, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at following frequency:
a) Sitework Areas: One test for every 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or less of exterior pads area but no fewer than three tests.
c. Asphalt paving area: 1) Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for exterior aggregate base.
2) Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. 3) Testing Agency will test compaction of base in place according to ASTM
D1556/D1556M, ASTM D2167, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at following frequency:
4) Sitework Areas: One test for every 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or less of exterior pads area but no fewer than three tests.
d. Concrete paving area: 1) Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for exterior aggregate base.
2) Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. 3) Testing Agency will test compaction of base in place according to ASTM
D1556/D1556M, ASTM D2167, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at following frequency:
a) Sitework Areas: One test for every 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or less of exterior pads area but no fewer than three tests.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Interior Slab-On-Grade Concrete:
1. Vapor Retarder: a. Do not allow water onto vapor retarder or aggregate base before placing concrete.
b. Protect membrane from possible punctures caused by reinforcing bar supports before placing concrete.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling 31 1413-1
SECTION 31 1413
TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Strip and stockpile acceptable topsoil as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’:
a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork. b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections.
c. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other landscape related sections. 2. Section 31 1100: ‘Clearing and Grubbing’.
3. Section 31 2213: 'Rough Grading'. 4. Section 31 2316: ‘Excavation’.
5. Section 32 9001: 'Common Planting Requirements'. 6. Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’ for topsoil evaluation and placement required for
topsoil grading. 7. Section 32 9121: ‘Topsoil Physical Preparation’ for physical preparation of topsoil (section
included based on Topsoil Testing Report). 8. Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’ for preparation of topsoil and addition of amendments prior to
landscaping.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions: 1. Existing topsoil: Defined as total amount of soil stripped and stored for reuse, less vegetation
layer stripped and disposed of as specified in Paragraphs below.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in pre-installation conferences as specified in Section 31 0501.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE
A. Strip existing vegetation layer 3 inches deep minimum from areas of site to receive buildings,
landscaping, and paving and remove from site before stripping topsoil for storage and reuse.
B. After stripping vegetation layer, strip existing topsoil additional 3 inches deep minimum from areas of
site to receive buildings and paving and store on site for later use. 1. Existing topsoil is property of Contractor with restriction that topsoil is to be used first for Project
landscape topsoil requirements and second for non-structural fill and backfill.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling 31 1413-2
2. After Project fill, backfill, and landscape topsoil requirements are satisfied, remove excess existing topsoil from site. Do not remove existing topsoil from site without Architect's written
approval.
C. Screen existing topsoil to meet standards established as specified in Section 32 9120 ‘Topsoil And
Placement’.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Rough Grading 31 2213-1
SECTION 31 2213
ROUGH GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform rough grading work required to prepare site for construction as described in Contract
Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 3100: ‘Project Management and Coordination’ for pre-installation conference. 2. Section 03 3053: Miscellaneous Exterior Cast-In-Place Concrete.
3. Section 03 3713: 'Shotcrete'. 4. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’ for:
a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork. b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections.
5. Section 31 1123: ‘Aggregate Base’ for aggregate base requirements. 6. Section 31 1413: ‘Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling’ for stripping and storing of existing topsoil.
7. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for grading of subgrade below aggregate base and topsoil. 8. Section 31 2316: ‘Excavation’.
9. Section 31 2323: ‘Fill’ for compaction procedures and tolerances for base. 10. Section 32 1216: ‘Asphalt Paving’.
11. Section 32 1313: ‘Concrete Paving’. 12. Section 32 1214: 'Pervious Concrete'.
13. Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’ for preparation of topsoil and addition of amendments prior to landscaping.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 0501: 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 31 0501, review following:
a. Identify benchmark to be used in establishing grades and review Contract Document requirements for grades, fill materials, and topsoil.
b. Examine site to pre-plan procedures for making cuts, placing fills, and other necessary work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials used for fill shall be as specified for backfill in Section 31 2323 'Fill'.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Verify elevations of rough grading are correct before compacted fill, fine grading, aggregate base
or landscape grading are placed.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Rough Grading 31 2213-2
2. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: 1. When existing grade around existing plants to remain is higher than new finish grade, perform
regrading by hand. 2. Do not expose or damage shrub or tree roots.
B. Surface Preparation: 1. Before making cuts, remove topsoil over areas to be cut and filled that were not previously
removed by stripping specified in Section 31 1413 'Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling'. Stockpile this additional topsoil with previously stripped topsoil.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Subgrade (Natural Soils):
1. Subgrade beneath compacted fill or aggregate base under asphalt or concrete paving shall be constructed smooth and even.
B. Special Techniques: 1. Compact fills as specified in Section 31 2323 'Fill'.
2. If soft spots, water, or other unusual and unforeseen conditions affecting grading requirements are encountered, stop work and notify Architect.
C. Tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot (28 mm).
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fine Grading 31 2216-1
SECTION 31 2216
FINE GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform fine grading of subgrade work required to prepare site for paving finish grading and for
placement of topsoil as described in Contract Documents. 2. Asphalt Paving:
a. Prepare natural soil subgrade as described in Section 31 2213 ‘Rough Grading’ or prepare fill subgrade as described in this specification section for asphalt paving.
3. Concrete Paving: a. Prepare natural soil subgrade as described in Section 31 2213 ‘Rough Grading’ or prepare
fill subgrade as described in this specification section for concrete paving. 4. Pervious Concrete Paving:
a. Prepare natural soil subgrade as described in Section 31 2213 ‘Rough Grading’ or prepare fill subgrade as described in this specification section for pervious concrete paving.
5. Brick Unit Pavers: a. Prepare natural soil subgrade as described in Section 31 2213 ‘Rough Grading’ or prepare
fill subgrade as described in this specification section for brick unit pavers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’ for multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 4523: ‘Testing and Inspecting Services’ for testing and inspection, and testing
laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 3. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’ for:
a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork. b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections.
4. Section 31 1123: ‘Aggregate Base’ for aggregate base requirements. 5. Section 31 1413: ‘Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling’ for stripping and storing of existing topsoil.
6. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’ for grading and preparation of natural soil subgrades below fill and aggregate base materials.
7. Section 31 2316: ‘Excavation’. 8. Section 31 2323: ‘Fill’ for compaction procedures and tolerances for base.
9. Section 32 1216: ‘Asphalt Paving’ for finish grading for asphalt paving. 10. Section 32 1313: ‘Concrete Paving’ for finish grading for concrete paving.
11. Section 32 1314: 'Pervious Concrete Paving' for finish grading for pervious concrete paving. 12. Section 32 1416: ‘Brick Unit Pavers’ for finish grading for brick unit pavers.
13. Section 32 9001: 'Common Planting Requirements'. a. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common planting related sections.
14. Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’ for topsoil evaluation and placement required for topsoil grading.
15. Section 32 9121: ‘Topsoil Physical Preparation’ for physical preparation of topsoil (section included based on Topsoil Testing Report).
16. Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’ for preparation of topsoil and addition of amendments prior to landscaping.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 0501 and Section 32 9001.
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 31 0501, review following:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fine Grading 31 2216-2
a. Review backfill requirements. b. Review geotechnical report.
c. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section.
1) Review requirements and frequency of testing and inspections.
B. Scheduling:
1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before installation of fill / engineered fill to allow inspection.
2. Allow special inspector to review all subgrades and excavations to determine if site has been prepared in accordance with geotechnical report prior to placing any fill, aggregate base or
concrete. 3. Allow inspection and testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer.
Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after inspections and test results for previously compacted work comply with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation:
1) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of fill / engineered fill.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing And Inspection:
1. Owner is responsible for Quality Assurance. Quality assurance performed by Owner will be used to validate Quality Control performed by Contractor.
2. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for fill / engineering fill: a. Owner will employ testing agencies to perform testing and inspection for fill / engineering fill
as specified in Field Quality Control in Part 3 of this specification. 1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and perform contractor testing and inspection.
2) See Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: Protect utilities and site elements from damage.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Landscaping and Planting Areas: a. Before grading, dig out weeds from planting areas by their roots and remove from site.
Remove rocks larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in size and foreign matter such as building rubble, wire, cans, sticks, concrete, etc.
b. Remove imported paving base material present in planting areas down to natural subgrade or other material acceptable to Architect.
2. Asphalt Paving: a. Survey and stake parking surfaces to show grading required by Contract Documents.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fine Grading 31 2216-3
b. Subgrade (material immediately below aggregate base): 1) Compact subgrade as specified in Section 31 2213 (natural soils) and Section 31 2323
(fill). 2) Fine grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents.
3) Subgrade to be constructed smooth and even. 3. Concrete Paving:
a. Survey and stake parking surfaces to show grading required by Contract Documents. b. Subgrade (material immediately below aggregate base):
1) Compact subgrade as specified in Section 31 2213 (natural soils) and Section 31 2323 (fill).
2) Fine grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents. 3) Subgrade to be constructed smooth and even.
4. Pervious Concrete Paving: a. Prepare subgrade as specified in Section 32 1314 ‘Pervious Concrete’.
b. Subgrade (material immediately below aggregate base and filter fabric): 1) Compact subgrade as specified in Section 31 2213 (natural soils) and Section 31 2323
(fill). 2) Fine grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents.
3) Subgrade to be constructed smooth and even. 5. Brick Unit Pavers:
a. Survey and stake parking surfaces to show grading required by Contract Documents. b. SubGrade (material immediately below aggregate base):
1) Compact as specified in specified in Section 31 2213 (natural soils) and Section 31 2323 (fill).
2) Fine grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents with slight crown from center to edges to promote drainage.
3) Subgrade to be constructed smooth and even.
3.2 PERFORMANCE
A. Interface With Other Work: Do not commence work of this Section until grading tolerances specified in Section 31 2213 are met.
B. General: 1. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots.
C. Tolerances: 1. Site Tolerances:
a. Subgrade (material immediately below aggregate base): 1) 0.00 inches (0.00 mm) high.
2) Measure using string line from curb to curb, gutter, flat drainage structure, or grade break.
b. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot (28 mm). 2. Aggregate Base (Asphalt Paving) Tolerances:
a. Aggregate base shall be 6 inches (150 mm) thick minimum after compaction, except where shown thicker on Drawings.
b. Measure using string line from curb to curb, gutter, flat drainage structure, or grade break. 3. Aggregate Base (Concrete Paving) Tolerances:
a. Finished base course shall be 4 inches (100 mm) thick minimum after compaction and true to line and grade within plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m)..
4. Pervious Concrete Paving Tolerances: a. See Section 32 1314 ‘Pervious Concrete’ for paving thickness.
5. Landscaping and Planting Tolerances: a. Maximum variation from required grades shall be 1/10 of one foot (28 mm).
b. To allow for final finish grades as specified in Section 32 9121 of planting areas, fine grade elevations before placing topsoil and mulch are:
1) Sod Areas: 7 inches (175 mm) below top of walk or curb. 2) Seeded Areas: 6 inches (150 mm) below top of walk or curb.
3) Ground Cover Areas: 7 inches (180 mm) below top of walk or curb.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fine Grading 31 2216-4
4) Tree And Shrub Areas: 4 inches (100 mm) below top of walk or curb. 6. Slope grade away from building as specified in Section 32 9120.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests And Inspections:
1. Civil and structural field tests, laboratory testing, and inspections are provided by Owner’s
independent Testing Agency as specified in Section 01 4523 ‘Testing And Inspection Services’:
a. Quality Control is sole responsibility of Contractor: 1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform testing and inspection as part of his Quality Control: a) Testing and inspections, if performed by Contractor, will be responsibility of
Contractor to be performed by an independent entity. 2. Site Preparation:
a. Prior to placement of fill / engineered fill, inspector shall determine that site has been prepared in accordance with geotechnical report.
b. Footing subgrade: At footing subgrades, Certified Inspector is to verify that soils conform to geotechnical report.
3. Fill / Engineered Fill: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for fine grading.
b. Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. c. Testing Agency is to provide one (1) moisture-maximum density relationship test for each
type of fill material.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Excavation 31 2316-1
SECTION 31 2316
EXCAVATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform Project excavating and trenching as described in Contract Documents, except as
specified below. 2. Procedure and quality for excavating and trenching performed on Project under other Sections
unless specifically specified otherwise.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’ for: a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork.
b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections. 2. Section 31 1100: Clearing and Grubbing.
3. Section 31 1123: ‘Aggregate Base’. 4. Section 31 1413: ‘Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling’.
5. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’ for rough grading and preparation of natural soil subgrades below fill and aggregate base materials.
6. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for grading of subgrade below aggregate base and topsoil. 7. Section 31 2323: ‘Fill’ for compaction procedures and tolerances for base.
8. Performance of excavating inside and outside of building required for electrical and mechanical work is responsibility of respective Section doing work unless arranged differently by Contractor.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 0501: 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 and Section 31 0501, review following:
a. Review protection of existing utilities requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Carefully examine site and available information to determine type soil to be encountered.
2. Discuss problems with Architect before proceeding with work. 3. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Existing Utilities:
1. Protect existing utilities identified in Contract Documents during excavation. 2. If existing utility lines not identified in Contract Documents are encountered, contact Architect
before proceeding.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Excavation 31 2316-2
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’ for rough grading and preparation of natural soil subgrades below fill and aggregate base materials.
2. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for grading of subgrade below aggregate base and topsoil. a. Excavate as necessary for proper placement and forming of concrete site elements and
pavement structure. Remove vegetation and deleterious material and remove from site. b. Backfill over-excavated areas with compacted base material specified in Section 31 1123.
c. Remove and replace exposed material that becomes soft or unstable. 3. Utility Trenches:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be open cut. Short sections of trench may be tunneled if pipe or duct can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly
tamped in tunnel sections and if approved by Architect. b. Excavate to proper alignment, depth, and grade. Excavate to sufficient width to allow
adequate space for proper installation and inspection of utility piping. c. If trenches are excavated deeper than required, backfill until trench bottom is proper depth
with properly compacted native material. d. Pipe 4 Inches (100 mm) In Diameter Or Larger:
1) Grade bottom of trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its length.
2) Except where rock is encountered, take care not to excavate below depths indicated. a) Where rock excavations are required, excavate rock with minimum over-depth of 4
inches (100 mm) below required trench depths. b) Backfill over-depths in rock excavation and unauthorized over-depths with loose,
granular, moist earth, thoroughly compacted. 3) Whenever wet or unstable soil incapable of properly supporting pipe, as determined by
Architect, occurs in bottom of trench, remove soil to depth required and backfill trench to proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel, or other suitable material acceptable to
Architect. 4. If unusual excavating conditions are encountered, stop work and notify Architect.
3.4 REPAIR / RESTORATION
A. Repair damage to other portions of the Work resulting from work of this Section at no additional cost to
Owner. On new work, arrange for damage to be repaired by original installer. 1. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Debris and material not necessary for Project are property of Contractor and are to be removed before
completion of Project. However, if material necessary for Project is hauled away, replace with specified fill / backfill material.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fill 31 2323-1
SECTION 31 2323
FILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform Project backfilling and compacting as described in Contract Documents, except as
specified below. 2. Procedure and quality for backfilling and compacting performed on Project under other Sections
unless specifically specified otherwise.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’ for multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 4523: ‘Testing and Inspecting Services’ for testing and inspection, and testing
laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 3. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’ for:
a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork. b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections.
4. Section 31 1100: ‘Clearing and Grubbing’. 5. Section 31 1123: ‘Aggregate Base’ for aggregate base requirements.
6. Section 31 1413: ‘Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling’ for stripping and storing of existing topsoil. 7. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’ for grading and preparation of natural soil subgrades below fill
and aggregate base materials. 8. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for grading of subgrade below aggregate base and topsoil.
9. Section 31 2316: ‘Excavation’. 10. Section 31 2324: ‘Flowable Fill’.
11. Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’ for topsoil evaluation and placement required for topsoil grading.
12. Section 32 9121: ‘Topsoil Physical Preparation’ for physical preparation of topsoil (section included based on Topsoil Testing Report).
13. Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’ for preparation of topsoil and addition of amendments prior to landscaping.
14. Division 32: Compaction of subgrade under walks and paving. 15. Performance of backfilling and compacting inside and outside of building required for electrical
and mechanical work is responsibility of respective Section doing work unless arranged differently by Contractor.
C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Exterior Foundations:
a. Geomembrane. b. Geotextile:
D. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0520: ‘Geomembranes For Earthwork' for furnishing of geomembrane’.
2. Section 31 0521: ‘Geotextiles For Earthwork' for furnishing of geotextiles’.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for fill and aggregate base testing):
a. ASTM D698-12, ‘Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))’.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fill 31 2323-2
b. ASTM D1556/D1556M-15, ‘Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method’.
c. ASTM D1557-12, ‘Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3))’.
d. ASTM D2167-15, ‘Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method’.
e. ASTM D2487-17, 'Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System)’.
f. ASTM D6938-17a, 'Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)’.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 0501. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, Section 31 0501, and Section 31 2324 if
Flowable Fill is included, review following: a. Review backfill requirements.
b. Review Section 01 4523 for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section.
1) Review requirements and frequency of testing and inspections.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not backfill against bituminous dampproofing to exterior of font foundation walls for twenty-four (24) hours after application of dampproofing.
2. Before backfilling, show utility and service lines being covered on record set of Drawings. Do not backfill until utilities involved have been tested and approved by Architect and until instructed by
Architect.
C. Scheduling:
1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect seventy-two (72) hours minimum before installation of fill / engineered fill to perform proctor and plasticity index tests on proposed fill or subgrade.
2. Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before installation of fill / engineered fill to allow inspection.
3. Allow special inspector to review all subgrades and excavations to determine if site has been prepared in accordance with geotechnical report prior to placing any fill (or concrete).
4. Allow inspection and testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after inspections and test results for previously
compacted work comply with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Record Documentation: 1) Testing and Inspection Reports:
a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of fill / engineered fill.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing and Inspection: 1. Owner is responsible for Quality Assurance. Quality assurance performed by Owner will be used
to validate Quality Control performed by Contractor. 2. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for fill / engineering fill:
a. Owner will employ testing agencies to perform testing and inspection for fill / engineering fill as specified in Field Quality Control in Part 3 of this specification.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fill 31 2323-3
1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of
Contract Documents and perform contractor testing and inspection. 2) See Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Do not perform work during unfavorable conditions as specified below: a. Aggregate Base:
1) Presence of free surface water. 2) Over-saturated sub base materials.
b. Geomembrane 1) Follow Manufacturers written recommendations for installation of membrane.
c. Geotextile: 1) Follow Manufacturers written recommendations for installation of membrane.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Site Material: 1. Existing excavated material on site is suitable for use as fill and backfill to meet Project
requirements.
B. Imported Fill / Backfill:
1. Well graded material conforming to ASTM D2487 free from debris, organic material, frozen materials, brick, lime, concrete, and other material which would prevent adequate performance of
backfill. a. Under Building Footprint And Paved Areas: Fill shall comply with soil classification groups
GW, CL, GP, GM, SW, SP, or SM. Fill may not contain stones over 6 inches (150 mm) diameter and ninety-five (95) percent minimum of fill shall be smaller than 1-1/2 inch (38
mm) in any direction. b. Under Landscaped Areas:
1) Fill more than 36 inches (900 mm) below finish grade shall comply with soil classification groups GW, CL, GP, GM, SW, SP, or SM. Fill may not contain stones
over 6 inches (150 mm) diameter and ninety (90) percent minimum of fill shall be smaller than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in any direction.
2) Fill less than 36 inches (900 mm) below finish grade shall comply with soil classification groups SW, SP, SM, or SC. Fill may not contain stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38
mm) in any direction and ninety (90) percent minimum of fill shall be smaller than 3/8 inch (4.7 mm) in any direction.
C. Engineered Fill:
1. Recommended granular structural fill materials, those classified as GW, GP, SW, and SP, should consist of a 6-inch minus select, clean, granular soil with no more than 50 percent
oversize (greater than ¾-inch) material and no more than 12 percent fines (passing No. 200 sieve). These fill materials should be placed in layers not to exceed 12 inches in loose
thickness. Prior to placement of structural fill materials, surfaces must be free of all vegetation. Structural fill material should be moisture-conditioned to achieve optimum
moisture content prior to compaction. For structural fill below footings, areas of compacted backfill must extend outside the perimeter of the footings for a distance equal to the
thickness of fill between the bottom of foundation and underlying soils, or 5 feet, whichever is less. All fill materials must be monitored during placement and tested to confirm
compaction requirements, outlined below, have been achieved.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fill 31 2323-4
2. Soils recommended for use as structural fill are those classified as GW, GP, SW, and SP in
accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) (ASTM D2487). Use of silty soils (USCS designation of GM, SM, and ML) as structural fill may be acceptable. However,
use of silty soils (GM, SM, and ML) as structural fill below footings is prohibited. These materials require very high moisture contents for compaction and require a long time to dry
out if natural moisture contents are too high and may also be susceptible to frost heave under certain conditions. Therefore, these materials can be quite difficult to work with as
moisture content, lift thickness, and compactive effort becomes difficult to control. If silty soil is used for structural fill, lift thicknesses should not exceed 6 inches (loose), and fill
material moisture must be closely monitored at both the working elevation and the elevations of materials already placed. Following placement, silty soils must be protected
from degradation resulting from construction traffic or subsequent construction.
3. Each layer of structural fill must be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before placing fill, aggregate base, or finish work, prepare existing subgrade as follows: 1. Do not place fill or aggregate base over frozen subgrade.
2. Under Building Slab and Equipment Pad Areas: a. Scarify subgrade 6 inches (150 mm) deep, moisture condition to uniform moisture content of
between optimum and four (4) percent over optimum, and mechanically tamp 6 inches (150 mm) deep to ninety-five (95) percent minimum of relative compaction.
3. Under Driveways And Parking Areas: a. Scarify subgrade 6 inches (150 mm) deep, moisture condition to uniform moisture content
between optimum and four (4) percent over optimum, and mechanically tamp to ninety-five (95) percent minimum of relative compaction.
4. Under Miscellaneous Concrete Site Elements And Outside Face of Foundation Walls a. Scarify subgrade 6 inches (150 mm) deep, moisture condition to uniform moisture content
between optimum and four (4) percent over optimum, and mechanically tamp to ninety-five (95) percent minimum of relative compaction.
5. Landscape Areas: a. Compact subgrade to eighty-five (85) percent relative compaction.
3.2 PERFORMANCE
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’ for rough grading and preparation of natural soil subgrades below fill and aggregate base materials.
2. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for grading of subgrade below aggregate base and topsoil. 3. Section 31 2324: 'Flowable Fill' for backfilling of piping systems and other utilities under paving'.
B. Fill / Backfill: 1. General:
a. Around Buildings And Structures: Slope grade away from building as specified in Section 31 2216. Hand backfill when close to building or where damage to building might result.
b. Site Utilities: 1) In Landscape Areas: Use backfill consisting of on-site soil.
2) Under Pavement and Concrete Site Elements: Extend excavatable flowable fill / backfill to elevation of subgrade. Do not place aggregate base material until excavatable
flowable fill / backfill has cured seventy-two (72) hours. c. Do not use puddling or jetting to consolidate fill areas.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fill 31 2323-5
2. Compacting: a. Fill / Backfill And Aggregate Base:
1) All fill material shall be well-graded granular material with maximum size less than 3 inch (76 mm) and with not more than fifteen (15) percent passing No. 200 sieve.
2) Under Building Slab and Equipment Pad Areas: a) Place in 8 inch (200 mm) maximum layers, moisture condition to plus or minus
two (2) percent of optimum moisture content, and mechanically tamp to ninety five (95) percent minimum of maximum laboratory density as established by ASTM
D1557. 3) Under Driveways And Parking Areas:
a) Place in 8 inch (200 mm) maximum layers, dampen but do not soak, and mechanically tamp to ninety five (95) percent minimum of maximum laboratory
density as established by ASTM D1557. 4) Under Miscellaneous Concrete Site Elements And Outside Face of Foundation Walls:
a) Place in 8 inch (200 mm) maximum layers, dampen but do not soak, and mechanically tamp to ninety five (95) percent minimum of maximum laboratory
density as established by ASTM D1557. 5) Utility Trenches:
a) Site: (1) Place fill in 12 inch (300 mm) layers and moisture condition to plus or minus
two (2) percent of optimum moisture content. (2) Compact fill to ninety-five (95) percent minimum relative compaction to within
12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade. (3) Compact fill above 12 inches (300 mm) to eighty-five (85) percent relative
compaction. b) Under Slabs:
(1) Under Slabs: Place fill in 6 inch (150 mm) layers, moisture condition to plus or minus two (2) percent of optimum moisture content, and compact to ninety
five (95) percent minimum relative compaction to within 4 inches (100 mm) of finish grade.
(2) Final 4 inches (100 mm) of fill shall be aggregate base as specified in Section 31 1123.
6) Fill Slopes: Compact by rolling or using sheepsfoot roller. 7) Backfill Under Footings if required by Geotechnical Evaluation Report.
8) Landscape Areas: a) Compact fill to eighty-five (85) percent minimum relative compaction.
9) Other Backfills: Place other fills in 12 inch (300 mm) layers and compact to ninety five (95) percent relative compaction.
10) Loose material from compacted subgrade surface shall be immediately removed before placing compacted fill or aggregate base course.
b. Engineered Fill: 1) Recommended granular structural fill materials, those classified as GW, GP, SW, and
SP, should consist of a 6-inch minus select, clean, granular soil with no more than 50 percent oversize (greater than ¾-inch) material and no more than 12 percent fines
(passing No. 200 sieve). These fill materials should be placed in layers not to exceed 12 inches in loose thickness. Prior to placement of structural fill materials, surfaces
must be free of all vegetation. Structural fill material should be moisture-conditioned to achieve optimum moisture content prior to compaction. For structural fill below
footings, areas of compacted backfill must extend outside the perimeter of the footings for a distance equal to the thickness of fill between the bottom of foundation
and underlying soils, or 5 feet, whichever is less. All fill materials must be monitored during placement and tested to confirm compaction requirements, outlined below,
have been achieved. 2) Soils recommended for use as structural fill are those classified as GW, GP, SW, and
SP in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) (ASTM D2487). Use of silty soils (USCS designation of GM, SM, and ML) as structural fill may be
acceptable. However, use of silty soils (GM, SM, and ML) as structural fill below footings is prohibited. These materials require very high moisture contents for
compaction and require a long time to dry out if natural moisture contents are too high and may also be susceptible to frost heave under certain conditions. Therefore, these
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fill 31 2323-6
materials can be quite difficult to work with as moisture content, lift thickness, and compactive effort becomes difficult to control. If silty soil is used for structural fill, lift
thicknesses should not exceed 6 inches (loose), and fill material moisture must be closely monitored at both the working elevation and the elevations of materials
already placed. Following placement, silty soils must be protected from degradation resulting from construction traffic or subsequent construction.
3) Each layer of structural fill must be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698.
3.3 REPAIR / RESTORATION
A. Repair damage to other portions of the Work resulting from work of this Section at no additional cost to
Owner. On new work, arrange for damage to be repaired by original installer.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections: 1. Civil and structural field tests, laboratory testing, and inspections are provided by Owner’s
independent Testing Agency as specified in Section 01 4523 ‘Testing And Inspection Services’: a. Quality Control is sole responsibility of Contractor:
1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform testing and inspection as part of his Quality Control:
a) Testing and inspections, if performed by Contractor, will be responsibility of Contractor to be performed by an independent entity.
2. Fill / Engineered Fill: a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for fill.
b. Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect. c. Testing Agency is to provide one (1) moisture-maximum density relationship test for each
type of fill material. d. Prior to placement of engineered fill, inspector shall determine that site has been prepared in
accordance with geotechnical report. e. Footing subgrade: At footing subgrades Certified Inspector is to verify that soils conform to
geotechnical report. f. Testing Agency will test compaction of soils according to ASTM D1556/D1556M, ASTM
D2167, and ASTM D6938, as applicable. Lift thicknesses shall comply with geotechnical report. Inspector shall determine that in-place dry density of engineered fill material
complies with geotechnical report. Tests will be performed at following locations and frequencies:
1) Paved Areas: At each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one (1) test for every 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or less of paved area but in no case less than three (3) tests.
2) Building Slab Areas: At each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least on test for every 2,500 sq. ft. (232 sq. m) or less of building slab area but in no case less than three (3)
tests. 3) Foundation Wall/Continuous Footing Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least
one (1) test for each 40 linear feet (12 linear m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two (2) tests.
4) Trench Backfill: At each 12 inch (305 mm) compacted lift for each 100 linear feet (30.5 linear m) or less of trench length but no fewer than two (2) tests.
5) Sidewalks, Curbs, Gutters, Exterior Pads: Minimum of one (1) test for each lift for each 40 lineal feet (12 linear m) or one (1) test for every 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) or less of
pad area but no fewer than three (3) tests. g. Required verification and inspection of soils as referenced in 2015 IBC (or latest approved
edition) Table 1704.7 'Required Verification And Inspection Of Soils'. Periodic and continuous inspections include:
1) Verify materials below shallow foundations are adequate to achieve design bearing capacity (periodic).
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Fill 31 2323-7
2) Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material (periodic).
3) Perform classification and testing of compacted fill materials (periodic). 4) Verify use of proper materials, densities and lift thicknesses during placement and
compaction of compacted fill (continuous). 5) Prior to placement of compacted fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been
prepared properly (periodic).
3.5 CLEANING
A. Debris and material not necessary for Project are property of Contractor and are to be removed before completion of Project. However, if material necessary for Project is hauled away, replace with
specified fill / backfill material.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Flowable Fill 31 2324-1
SECTION 31 2324
FLOWABLE FILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install cement stabilized sand as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’ for multiple contracts.
2. Section 01 4523: ‘Testing and Inspecting Services’ for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods.
3. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’ for: a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork.
b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections. 4. Section 31 1123: ‘Aggregate Base’ for aggregate base requirements.
5. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’ for grading and preparation of natural soil subgrades below fill and aggregate base materials.
6. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for grading of subgrade below aggregate base and topsoil. 7. Section 31 2316: ‘Excavation’.
8. Performance of backfilling and compacting inside and outside of building required for electrical and mechanical work is responsibility of respective Section doing work unless arranged differently
by Contractor.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications: 1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI
Periodicals and Publications. a. ACI 229R-99, Controled Low-Strength Materials (Reapproved 2005).
B. Definitions: 1. Excavatable Flowable Fill /Controlled Low Strength Materials CLSM:
a. Controlled Low Strength Material, (CLSM): Self-leveling and selfcompacting, cementitious material.
b. Excavatable Flowable Fill: Unconfined compressive strength of 150 psi (1.03 MPa) or less. Strengths exceeding this limit can be excavated using mechanical equipment, depending on
mix composition and equipment. Due to continued strength-gaining characteristics of component materials such as fly ash and slag, excavatability of mixtures exceeding 150 psi
(1.03 MPa) should be proven prior to final placement. c. Excavatibility: Material properly which relates to ease at which material may be removed.
d. Flowability: Material property which relates to rheology of material. e. Flowable fill: Cementitious slurry consisting of mixture of fine aggregate or filler, water, and
cementitious material(s), which is used as fill or backfill in lieu of compacted earth. This mixture is capable of filling all voids in irregular excavations and hard to reach places (such
as under undercuts of existing slabs), is self-leveling, and hardens in matter of few hours without need for compaction in layers. Flowable fill is sometimes referred to as excavatable
flowable fill, controlled density fill (CDF), controlled low strength material (CLSM), lean concrete slurry, and unshrinkable fill. Flowable fill is not concrete nor used to replace
concrete. It is intended to contain low cementitious content for reduced strength development.
C. Reference Standards:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Flowable Fill 31 2324-2
1. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for fill and aggregate base testing): a. ASTM C33/C33M-18, ‘Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates’.
b. ASTM C40/C40M-19, 'Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete'.
c. ASTM C42/C42M-18a, ‘Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete’.
d. ASTM C94/C94M-18, ‘Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete’. e. ASTM C123/C123M-14, 'Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate'.
f. ASTM C142/C142M-17, ‘Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates’.
g. ASTM C150/C150M-18, ‘Standard Specification for Portland Cement’. h. ASTM D558-11, 'Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of
Soil-Cement Mixtures'. i. ASTM D2487-17, ‘Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)’. j. ASTM D3665-12(2017), ‘Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials’.
k. ASTM D4318-17, ‘Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index
of Soils’.
l. ASTM D6938-17a, ‘Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)’.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference in conjunction with Section 31 2323. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, Section 31 2323, and Section 31 0501,
review following: a. Review backfill requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Design Data: a. Submit mix designs to meet following requirements:
1) Excavatable Fill (Flowable/Controlled Low Strength Materials CLSM): a) Provide mix designs for review.
2. Design Data: a. Submit mix designs to meet following requirements:
1) Excavatable Fill (Flowable/Controlled Low Strength Materials CLSM): a) Provide target cement content and production data for sand-cement mixture in
accordance with requirements as specified in Part 2 of this specification. 2) Cement Stabilized Sand:
a) Design will be based on strength specimens molded in accordance with ASTM D558 at moisture content within 3 percent of optimum and within four (4) hours of
batching. (1) Design will be based on strength specimens molded in accordance with
ASTM D558 at moisture content within three (3) percent of optimum and four (4) hours of batching.
(2) Determine minimum cement content from production data and statistical history. Provide no less than 1.1 sacks of cement per ton of dry sand.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Dosage capsules have storage tolerance in temperature range of 0 deg F to 55 deg F (minus 18 deg C to plus 12.8 deg C).
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Flowable Fill 31 2324-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement Stabilized Sand: 1. Cement: Type I Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150/C150M.
2. Sand: a. Clean, durable sand meeting grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C33/C33M,
and the following requirements: 1) Classified as SW, SP, SW-SM, SP-SM, or SM by Unified Soil Classification System of
ASTM D2487. 2) Maximum compressive strength of 125 psi (862 kPa) maximum at 28 days.
3) Minimum compressive strength of 65 psi (448 kPa) maximum at 28 days. 4) Deleterious Materials:
a) Clay lumps, ASTM C142/C142M less than 0.5 percent. b) Lightweight pieces, ASTM C123/C123M less than 5 percent.
c) Organic impurities, ASTM C40/C40M color no darker than standard color. 5) Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318.
3. Water: Potable water, free of oils, acids, alkalies, organic matter or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94/C94M.
B. Excavatable Flowable Fill /Controlled Low Strength Materials CLSM: 1. Excavatable application:
2. Follow recommendations of ACI 229R. 3. Contain maximum of 50 lbs to 100 lbs of cement per yard (30 kg to 59 kg of cement per cu m) of
flowable fill / backfill 4. Air content:
a. General: 1) Stable air content of fifteen (15) to thirty-five (35) percent.
b. Darafill: 1) Stable air content of twenty (20) percent, Darafill dosage as necessary.
5. Fly ash: a. Fly ash between 0 to 900 lbs per cu yd (0 to 533.95 kg per cu m).
b. When using less than 75 lbs per cu yd (44.5 kg per cu m) of Portland cement, combined quantity of Portland cement and fly ash must be at least 100 lbs per cu yd (59.33 kg per cu
m). 6. Water content:
a. Select water content as necessary to produce consistency that will result in flowable, self-leveling product at time of placement.
b. Maximum water content of 36 gallons per yard (225 L per cu m) of backfill. 7. Slump: 7 inch (180 mm) minimum.
8. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Darafill by W R Grace & Co, Cambridge, MA www.na.graceconstruction.com.
b. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
2.2 MIXING MATERIALS
A. Cement Stabilized Sand: 1. Add required amount of water and mix thoroughly in pug mill-type mixer.
2. Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading. Reject material not placed and compacted within four (4) hours after mixing.
2.3 MIXING QUALIFICATION
A. Cement Stabilized Sand:
1. Determine target cement content of material as follows:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Flowable Fill 31 2324-4
a. Obtain samples of sand-cement mixtures at production facility representing range of cement content consisting of at least three (3) points.
b. Complete molding of samples within four (4) hours after addition of water. c. Perform strength tests (average of two (2) specimens) at forty-eight (48) hours and seventy
(7) days. d. Perform cement content tests on each sample.
e. Perform moisture content tests on each sample. f. Plot average forty-eight (48) hour strength vs. cement content.
g. Record scale calibration date, sample date, sample time, molding time, cement feed dial settings, and silo pressure (if applicable).
2. Test raw sand for following properties at point of entry into pug-mill: a. Gradation.
b. Plasticity index. c. Organic impurities.
d. Clay lumps and friable particles. e. Lightweight pieces.
f. Moisture content. g. Classification.
3. Present data obtained in format similar to that provided in sample data form attached to this Section.
4. Target content may be adjusted when statistical history so indicates. For determination of minimum product performance use formula:
a. ƒc% 1/2 standard deviation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE
A. Interface With Other Work:
1. Section 31 2323: ‘Fill'.
B. Fill / Backfill:
1. Site Utilities: a. In Landscape Areas: Use backfill consisting of on-site soil.
b. Under Pavement and Concrete Site Elements: Extend excavatable flowable fill / backfill to elevation of subgrade. Do not place aggregate base material until excavatable flowable fill /
backfill has cured seventy-two (72) hours. 2. Do not use puddling or jetting to consolidate fill areas.
3.2 PLACING
A. Cement Stabilized Sand:
1. Place sand-cement mixture in maximum 12 inch (305 mm) thick loose lifts and compact to ninety-five (95) percent of maximum density as determined in accordance with ASTM D558, unless
otherwise specified: a. Refer to related specifications for thickness of lifts in other applications.
b. Target moisture content during compaction is +3 percent of optimum. c. Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within four (4) hours after
addition of water to mix at plant. 2. Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free of water.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:
1. Flowable Fill:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Flowable Fill 31 2324-5
a. Testing is not required. b. Inspection of mix design, placement and compaction is required.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Surface Treatment:
Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal 32 0113-1
SECTION 32 0113
ASPHALT PAVING SURFACE TREATMENT: Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and apply asphalt based penetrating seal on existing asphalt paving as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’ for multiple contracts.
2. Section 01 4523: ‘Testing and Inspecting Services’ for testing and inspection, and testing laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods.
3. Section 32 0117.01: ‘Asphalt Paving Crack Seal’ for completion of crack repair. 4. Section 32 0117.02: ‘Asphalt Paving Crack Fill’ for completion of crack repair.
5. Section 32 0118: ‘Asphalt Paving Repair – Full Depth Patch’. 6. Section 32 1216: 'Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method'.
7. Section 32 1216: 'Asphalt Paving: Marshall Method'. 8. Section 32 1713: 'Parking Bumpers'.
9. Section 32 1723: 'Pavement Markings'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications: 1. Asphalt Institute:
a. MS-4, ‘The Asphalt Handbook’ (Seventh Edition). b. MS-16, ‘Asphalt in Pavement Preservation and Maintenance’ (Fourth Edition).
2. Asphalt Emulsion Manufacturers Association: a. MS-19, ‘Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual’ (Fourth Edition).
B. Definitions: 1. Seal Coat: Thin surface treatment used to improve surface texture and protect asphalt surface.
Main types of surface treatments are asphalt based emulsion seals, cape seals, chip seals, fog seals, micro surfacing, penetrating seals, refined coal tar emulsion seals, sand seals, sandwich
seals and slurry seals.
C. Reference Standards:
1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D4552/D4552M-10(2016), ‘Standard Practice for Classifying Hot-Mix Recycling
Agents'.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 01 3100:
2. Schedule asphalt based penetrating seal pre-installation conference to be held jointly with any other 'Asphalt Surface Treatment' sections involving asphalt maintenance:
3. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review following: a. Review crack repair schedule and verify that other repairs will be completed before
application of asphalt based penetrating seal.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Surface Treatment:
Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal 32 0113-2
b. Review asphalt based penetrating seal schedule. c. Review asphalt based penetrating seal mix design.
d. Review asphalt based penetrating seal preparation requirements: e. Review safety issues.
B. Scheduling: 1. Manufacturer Instructions:
a. Provide to Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days before asphalt based penetrating
seal placement commences, approved Laboratory Report and Manufacturer’s Certificate of
compliance with these specifications covering specific materials to be used on this project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s product literature.
B. Informational Submittals: 1. Design Submittals:
a. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal: 1) Provide mix design for application rate of asphalt based penetrating seal.
2. Manufacturer Instructions: a. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal:
1) Provide Manufacturer’s written substrate preparation and sealant application instructions.
3. Qualification Statement: a. Installer / Supervisor:
1) Provide Qualification documentations if requested by Owner's Representative.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Record Documentation:
1) Manufacturer’s documentation: a) Asphalt based penetrating seal product literature.
b) Design Data Submittal.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies but not limited to following: 1. Installer:
a. Minimum five (5) years experience in asphalt surface treatment installations. b. Minimum five (5) years satisfactorily completed projects of comparable quality, similar size,
and complexity in past three (3) years before bidding: 1) Project names and addresses.
2) Date of installations. 2. Supervisor:
a. Minimum of five (5) years satisfactorily completed projects of comparable quality, similar size, and complexity in past five (5) years as Supervisor of Applicators:
1) Project names and addresses. 2) Date of installation.
3) Name of Supervisor or Owner. 3. Upon request, submit documentation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Surface Treatment:
Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal 32 0113-3
a. Following Manufacturer's recommendations.
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal:
a. Do not apply asphalt based penetrating seal when ambient temperatures will be less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) for twenty-four (24) hour period or surface temperature will be less than 60
deg F (16 deg C) for twenty-four (24) hour period. b. Do not apply asphalt based penetrating seal if subsequent temperatures for forty-eight (48)
hours are anticipated to drop below 50 deg F (10 deg C). c. Do not apply asphalt based penetrating seal if it will be adversely affected by rain, or wet
conditions or when surface contains standing water.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal:
1. Type One Acceptable Product and Manufacturers: a. APR-100 by Mariani Asphalt (An Associated Asphalt Company), Tampa, FL (813) 623-3941,
www.associatedasphalt.com/companies/mariani-asphalt. b. GSB-78 Pavement Sealer and Rejuvenator by Asphalt Systems, Inc., Salt Lake City, UT
(801) 972-6433 www.asphaltsystemsinc.com. (Use GSB-88 instead of GSB-78 on pavements less than two (2) years old).
c. GSB-88 Pavement Sealer and Rejuvenator by Asphalt Systems, Inc., Salt Lake City, UT (801) 972-6433 www.asphaltsystemsinc.com.
d. Quick-Dry Anti-Oxidene Penetrating Asphalt Coating (asphalt, air-blown (CAS# 64742-93-4),equal to /or not less than 50 to 65 percent by weight, white stoddard solvent (CAS# 8052-
41-3) 35 to 50 percent by weight. No other unnecessary binders, fillers or additives) by Texas Refinery Corp., Fort Worth, TX (956) 492-6254 www.texasrefinery.com.
e. Reclamite Preservative Seal by Tricor Refining LLC, Bakersfield, CA (661) 393-7110 www.reclamite.com.
f. RS-90 Cutback Asphalt Seal Coating/Rejuvenator by Denver Industrial Sales & Service Company (DISSCO), Denver, CO (303) 935-2485 www.dissco.net.
g. Equal as approved by Owner’s Representative before bidding. See Section 01 6200. 2. Performance Requirement:
a. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal consisting of the following: 1) Asphalt, CAS 8052-42-4 (or CAS 8052-41-3), 50 to 65 percent by weight and naphtha,
CAS 8030-30-6, 35 to 50 percent by weight (or CAS 8008-20-9, 40 to 60 percent by weight) or white Stoddard solvent, CAS 64742-93-4, 35 to 50 percent by weight.
a) No water is acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Evaluation And Assessment:
1. Do not apply sealer on asphalt that has not aged for at least one (1) month minimum. 2. Do not apply sealer over wet or damp pavement, or when precipitation is imminent.
3. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Surface Treatment:
Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal 32 0113-4
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Owner Responsibilities:
1. Remove Scout Trailer(s) if needed.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. General: a. Do not allow irrigation watering for at least twenty-four (24) hours prior to application.
b. Do not apply to new asphalt pavements (less than one (1) month) in that softening may occur.
c. New asphalt and patched areas should be allowed to cure for at least thirty (30) days at 60 deg F (16 deg C) temperature prior to application to eliminate any concentration of oils on
pavement surface. Longer cure times of up to sixty (60) days may be required. New asphalt must not exhibit ribboning, crawling nor show oil rings when clean water is poured onto
surface. 1) To determine if surface oils have dissipated, pour one (1) or two (2) gallons of clean
water over pavement surface: a) If water sheets out, uniformly wetting surface and no oil rings appear, surface is
ready to be sealed. b) If water balls up and/or shows signs of oil rings, additional curing time is required
prior to sealing. 2. Paint Stripes:
a. During Evaluation and Assessment, verify if acrylic, thermoplastic or paint stripes must be removed in preparation for asphalt based penetrating seal application.
3. Grease or Oil Patches: a. Remove grease or oil patches, and spillage of any material that has adhered to pavement.
Do not place seal over unsound oil spots softened by fuel or oil. b. Clean oil spots and treat with oil spot primer.
c. Seal areas damaged by oil or grease with an oil spot primer compatible with seal being used in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Cleaning: a. Remove all debris, dirt, dust, leaves, loose material, moisture, mud spots, sand, silt spots,
vegetation (including moss), water and other objectionable and foreign material from existing surface prior to placing seal. In areas where moss is prevalent, apply herbicide.
b. Power brooms, power blowers, air compressors, vacuum sweepers, rotary brooms, water flushing equipment, and blowers, or by another approved method.
5. Cracks: a. Repair cracks if required per Section 32 0117.01 ‘Asphalt Paving Crack Seal’ or Section 32
0117.02 ‘Asphalt Paving Crack Fill’ prior to placing asphalt based penetrating seal. Cracks that contain weed and other live vegetation matter must be treated with Pre-Emergent
Herbicide prior to crack repair.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal: 1. Applied after Asphalt Paving is installed as specified in Section 1216: 'Asphalt Paving' as follows:
a. Mandatory Asphalt Paving Surface Treatment (Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal) to be applied no sooner than thirty (30) days or no later than eighteen (18) months of placing
Asphalt Paving to be included with this project. 2. Surface preparation:
a. Do not apply asphalt based penetrating sealer until completion of surface preparation items. 3. Follow Manufacturer’s recommendations for application of sealer.
4. Apply sealer without thinning from container using squeegee, brush, or sprayer at rate of 1-1/2 gallons (5.6 liters) per 100 square feet (9.3 square meters) minimum and 2 gallons (7.6 liters) per
100 square feet (9.3 square meters) maximum, depending on absorbency of pavement.
B. Paint Stripes:
1. If paint stripes were removed in preparation for penetration seal, include following: a. Apply paint stripes after asphalt based penetrating seal has been applied and cured.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Surface Treatment:
Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal 32 0113-5
3.4 CLEANING
A. General:
1. Upon completion of asphalt based penetrating seal operations, clean up and remove debris.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Do not allow traffic on paving until asphalt based penetrating seal is thoroughly cured: 1. Warm weather condition is approximately twenty-four (24) hours.
B. Do not allow irrigation watering for at least twenty-four (24) hours after application.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-1
SECTION 32 1216
ASPHALT PAVING: Superpave Method
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install asphalt paving in driveways and parking areas as described in Contract
Documents including the following, but not limited to: a. Asphalt Mix Design Criteria Summary:
1) Design team to site adapt and modify asphalt paving specifications to match LOCALLY available or preferred and successful mix design. Site adapt and edit
accordingly, including asphalt paving thicknesses. Binder grade to be site adapted and design team to determine whether asphalt fibers will be used and contact local
asphalt supplier to site adapt asphalt mix design criteria.
2) Asphalt Binder: PG 58-28 (or Binder locally used by DOT) 3) Nominal Maximum Size
Aggregate (Nmas):
3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
4) Maximum Size Aggregate: 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) 5) Mix Designator (compaction
effort); Ndesign:
50
6) Antistrip Agent: If required by supplier’s mix design (use 1 percent or greater lime slurry when required.
7) Asphalt Reinforcement Fibers: Specified in Section 32 1217 as Alternate ‘A’. 8) Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): Allowed up to 25 percent. Asphalt binder shall be one grade softer when more than 15 percent RAP is
used.
9) ROSP: Not allowed. 10) Minneral Filler: Not allowed.
11) Warm Mix Additive: If required by supplier’s mix design. 12) Recycle Agent: If required by supplier’s mix design. b. Design Air Voids:
1) Three and one-half percent (3.5 percent).
c. Tack coat: Application of asphaltic material to existing asphalt concrete or Portland concrete surfaces before asphalt concrete pavement.
d. Blotter materials and procedures for absorbing excess asphalt as required.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’ for multiple contracts. 2. Section 01 4523: ‘Testing and Inspecting Services’ for testing and inspection, and testing
laboratory services for materials, products, and construction methods. 3. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’ for:
a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork. b. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections.
4. Section 31 1123: ‘Aggregate Base’ for compaction of aggregate base. 5. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’ for rough grading and preparation of natural soil subgrades
below fill and aggregate base materials. 6. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for grading of subgrade below aggregate base and topsoil.
7. Section 31 2323: ‘Fill’ for compaction procedures and tolerances for base. 8. Section 32 0113.01: ‘Asphalt Paving Surface Treatment: Penetrating Seal’.
9. Section 32 1717: ‘Asphalt Reinforcement Fibers’. 10. Section 32 1723: ‘Pavement Markings’.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-2
1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Alternates:
1. Asphalt Reinforcement Fibers are bid as Alternate ‘A’ as specified in Price and Payment
Procedures in Part 1 of Section 32 1216. Owner’s Representative will review bid and decide if
asphalt reinforcing fibers will be included in Project.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Association Publications: 1. Asphalt Institute, 2696 Research Park Dr., Lexington, KY www.asphaltinstitute.org:
a. MS-2, ‘Mix Design Methods’ (7th Edition 2015).
B. Definitions:
1. Aggregate: Hard inert mineral material, such as gravel, crushed rock, slag, or sand. a. Coarse Aggregate: Aggregate retained on or above No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve.
b. Coarse-Graded Aggregate: Aggregate having predominance of coarse sizes. c. Dense-Graded Aggregate: Aggregate that is graded from maximum size down through filler
with object of obtaining an asphalt mix with controlled void content and high stability. d. Fine Aggregate: Aggregate passing No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve.
e. Fine-Graded Aggregate: Aggregate having predominance of fine sizes. f. Mineral Filler: Fine mineral product at least 70 percent of which passes a No. 200 (75µm)
sieve. 2. Air Voids: Total volume of small air pockets between coated aggregate particles in asphalt
cement concrete (ACC); expressed as percentage of bulk volume of compacted paving mixture. 3. Anti-Stripping Agent: Chemicals added to bitumen to improve the adhesion of the bitumen to
hydrophilic aggregates 4. Asphalt Binder: Asphalt cement or modified asphalt cement that binds aggregate particles into
dense mass. a. Asphalt Cement used in paving applications that has been classified according to the
Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder, AASHTO Designation MP 320. It can be either unmodified or modified Asphalt Cement, as long as it complies with
specifications. 5. Asphalt-Aggregate Designator: Alpha-numeric code that indicates nominal maximum size of
aggregate, and type and grade of asphalt in aggregate-asphalt mix. a. Example: “12.5 PG70-28” means aggregate asphalt mix shall be composed of aggregate
gradation with 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) nominal maximum size and performance grade asphalt binder designed to perform between temperatures of 70 deg C and -28 deg C (158 deg F
and -18.4 deg F). 6. Equivalent Single Axle Load (ESAL): Effect on pavement performance of any combination of axle
loads of varying magnitude equated to number of 18,000-lb. (80-kN) single-axle loads that are required to produce an equivalent effect.
7. Maximum Size (Superpave): One sieve larger than the nominal maximum size. 8. Ndesign (Superpave): Design number of gyrations used for design of Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA).
9. Nominal Maximum Size: One sieve size larger than first sieve size retaining more than 10 percent of Sample. Nominal maximum size sieve will retain minimum of 0 and maximum of 10 percent of
sample. Maximum size is one sieve size larger than nominal maximum size. 10. Performance Graded Asphalt Binder (PGAB): Asphalt binder designed to produce HMA that
meets certain performance standards. Designations for performance-graded asphalt binders are prefixed with PG. Each grade designation also includes two sets of numbers that denote
temperature range. This is a range of climate temperatures to which road may be exposed and still be expected to give superior performance. PG numbers do not indicate viscosity as in
conventional liquid asphalt designations. 11. Pre-emergent Herbicide: Chemical that is applied before weeds emerge. It acts by killing weed
seedlings and /or establishing layer of chemical on or near soil surface that is toxic to germinating seeds and young seedlings.
12. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): Existing asphalt mixture that has been pulverized, usually by milling, and is used like aggregate in recycling of asphalt pavements.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-3
13. Subgrade (definition varies depending upon stage of construction and context of work being performed):
a. Prepared natural soils on which fill, aggregate base, or topsoil is placed. or
b. Prepared soils immediately beneath paving. 14. Tack Coat: Very light application of liquid asphalt, or asphalt emulsion diluted with water.
C. Reference Standards: 1. American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials:
a. AASHTO T 304-17: ‘Standard Method of Test for Uncompacted Void Content of Fine Aggregate’.
b. AASHTO T 322-07(2016), ‘Standard Method of Test for Determining the Creep Compliance and Strength of Hot-Mix Asphalt (HMA) Using the Indirect Tensile Test Device.
2. ASTM International: a. ASTM C29/C29M-17a, ‘Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in
Aggregate'. b. ASTM C88-18, ‘Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium
Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate'. c. ASTM C117-17, ‘Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregates by Washing'. d. ASTM C131/C131M-14, 'Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine’. e. ASTM C142/C142M-17, ‘Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates'. f. ASTM D242/D242M-18, ‘Standard Specification for Mineral Filler For Bituminous Paving
Mixtures'. g. ASTM D977-17, 'Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt’.
h. ASTM D979/D979M-15, 'Practice for Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures'. i. ASTM D2041/D2041M-11, 'Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity
and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures’. j. ASTM D2172/D2172M-17, ‘Standard Test Methods for Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen
From Bituminous Paving Mixtures’. k. ASTM D2256/ D2256M-10(2015), ‘Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Yarns by
the Single-Strand Method’. l. ASTM D2397/D2397M-17, 'Standard Specification for Cationic-Emulsified Asphalt’.
m. ASTM D2419-14, ‘Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate'.
n. ASTM D2950/D2950M-17, ‘Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods'.
o. ASTM D3203/D3203M-17, ‘Standard Test Method for Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Bituminous Paving Mixtures'.
p. ASTM D3549/D3549M-18, ‘Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted
Bituminous Paving Mixture Specimens’.
q. ASTM D3665-12(2017), ‘Standard Practice for Random Sampling of Construction Materials’. r. ASTM D4318-17, ‘Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index
of Soils'. s. ASTM D4552/D4552M-10(2016), ‘Standard Practice for Classifying Hot-Mix Recycling
Agents'. t. ASTM D4759-11(2018), ‘Standard Practice for Determining the Specification Conformance
of Geosynthetics'. u. ASTM D4791-10, ‘Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and
Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate. v. ASTM D5444-15, ‘Standard Method for Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate'.
w. ASTM D5821-13(2017), ‘Standard Test Method for Determining the Percentage of Fractured
Particles in Coarse Aggregate’.
x. ASTM D6307-19, ‘Standard Test Method for Asphalt Content of Hot-Mix Asphalt by Ignition Method'.
y. ASTM D6932/D6932M-08(2013), ‘Standard Guide for Materials and Construction of Open-Graded Friction Course Plant Mixtures’.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-4
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 0501 ‘Common
Earthwork Requirements’:
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100 ‘Project Management and Coordination’ and Section 31 0501 ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’, review following:
a. Review surveying and staking of parking areas and installation of sleeves. b. Review proposed aggregate base schedule.
c. Review rough grading elevations before placing paving fill. d. Review fine grading elevations of subgrade fine grading operations before placing aggregate
base and paving. e. Review proposed asphalt paving schedule.
f. Review asphalt paving mix design. g. Review pre-emergent herbicide protection of adjoining property and planting area on site
requirements, schedule and application requirements. h. Review schedule of mandatory asphalt paving surface treatment to be applied after
placement of asphalt paving. i. Review schedule of paint stripes to be applied after asphalt paving surface treatment.
j. Review safety issues. k. Review Section 01 4523 ‘Testing and Inspecting Services’ for administrative requirements
and responsibilities and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section. 1) Review requirements and frequency of testing and inspections.
2) Review Contractor Testing Agency Qualifications.
B. Scheduling:Notify Testing Agency and Architect twenty-four (24) hours minimum before placing
asphalt paving.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data:
a. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: 1) Manufacturer's published product data on pre-emergent herbicide.
B. Informational Submittals: 1. Certificates:
a. Require mix plant to furnish delivery/load tickets for each batch of asphalt. Keep delivery tickets at job-site for use of Owner’s Representative. Tickets shall show following:
1) Name of mix plant. 2) Date.
3) Name of contractor. 4) Name and location of Project.
5) Serial number of ticket. 6) Asphalt mix type.
7) Time loaded. 8) Identity of truck.
b. Installer to provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance stating material authenticity and properties for review and acceptance by Architect before product use.
2. Design Data: a. Hot Mix Asphalt:
1) Design Criteria: a) Develop mix design according to current Asphalt Institute MS-2 ‘Asphalt Mix
Design Methods’ for Superpave Method. b) Submittal format:
(1) Design mix submittal shall follow format as indicated in current Asphalt Institute MS-2, ‘Mix Design Methods.
2) Mix design of asphalt paving must meet Design Criteria minimum requirements and show conformance to the following:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-5
a) Location and name of hot mix asphalt concrete production facility. b) Date of mix design. If older than two (2) years, recertify mix design.
c) Asphalt mix type. d) Mix design method used.
e) Mix density. f) Design air voids (three and one half (3.5) percent.
g) Asphalt content in percent. h) Performance grade of asphalt binder.
i) Nominal maximum size of aggregate. j) Maximum size of aggregate.
k) Aggregate source and gradation. l) Mix properties and design parameters.
m) Temperature of mix at plant and in the field for optimum field compaction. n) Amount of recycled asphalt pavement (RAP).
o) Mineral fillers, antistrip, and recycle agent percentages. p) Identify if warm mix technologies will be used and how much warm mix additive will
be used. 3) Within thirty (30) days prior to asphalt construction, submit actual design mix to
Architect, Civil Engineering Consultant of Record and Independent Testing Laboratory for review and approval.
3. Test And Evaluation Reports: a. Hot Mix Asphalt:
1) Contractor's Testing Agency copies of Field Test results to show compliance with all contract requirements and quality control for quality of asphalt mixture and asphalt
installation. 2) Owner's Testing Agency copies of Field Tests and Inspections used to validate or
determine discrepancies with testing by Contractor. 4. Manufacturer Instructions:
a. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: 1) Application instructions for pre-emergent herbicide.
5. Qualification Statement: a. Installer:
1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Owner's Representative.
C. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800 ‘Closeout
Submittals’:
a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturer’s documentation:
a) Pre-emergent herbicide documentation. b) Asphalt paving design.
c) Test reports. d) Certificates from mix plant of delivery/load tickets.
e) Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. 2) Testing and Inspection Reports:
a) Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of asphalt paving.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications. Requirements of Section 01 4301 ‘Quality Assurance - Qualifications’ applies but not limited to following:
1. Asphalt Paving: a. Foreman of asphalt paving crew has completed at least three (3) projects of similar size and
nature. b. Upon request, submit documentation.
2. Pre-emergent herbicide: a. Applicator:
1) Pre-emergent herbicide shall be applied by applicator certified by State in which Project is located as an applicator of agricultural chemicals.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-6
B. Testing and Inspection: 1. Owner is responsible for Quality Assurance. Quality assurance performed by Owner will be used
to validate Quality Control performed by Contractor. 2. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for asphalt paving:
a. Owner will employ testing agencies to perform testing and inspection for asphalt paving as specified in Field Quality Control in Part 3 of this specification.
1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in strict accordance with requirements of
Contract Documents and perform contractor testing and inspection. 2) See Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Asphalt Material: a. Each shipment must:
1) Be uniform in appearance and consistency. 2) Show no foaming when heated to specified loading temperature.
b. Do not supply shipments contaminated with other asphalt types or grades than those specified:
1) Do not use petroleum distillate as a release agent. 2. Pre-emergent herbicide:
a. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened packages with labels intact.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Pre-emergent herbicide: a. Do not freeze. Store in at temperatures above 41 deg F (5 deg C).
b. Follow Manufacturer’s storage and handling requirements.
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions: 1. Pre-emergent herbicide:
a. Follow printed Manufacturers instruction for environmental hazards: b. Follow printed Manufacturers instruction ambient conditions for application of product.
2. Tack Coat: a. Apply only when air and roadbed temperatures in shade are greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg
C). Temperature restrictions may be waived only upon written authorization from Architect or Civil Engineer.
b. Do not apply to wet surfaces. c. Do not apply when weather conditions prevent tack coat from adhering properly.
3. Asphalt paving: a. Do not perform work during following conditions:
1) Ambient temperature is below 45 deg F (7.2 deg C) or will fall below 45 deg F (7.2 deg C) during placement.
2) Temperature of aggregate base below 50 deg F (10 deg C). 3) Cold Weather Asphalt Paving Plan: If asphalt pavement is placed outside of these
temperature limits or those identified in MINIMUM Temperature Degrees, a plan is required which includes:
a) Haul times. b) Placement details.
c) Compaction aids used in production. d) Owner does not assume responsibility for asphalt when placed outside
temperature limits. 4) Presence of free surface water or weather is unsuitable.
5) Wind or ground cools mix material before compaction.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General: 1. Follow current Asphalt Institute MS-2 ‘Asphalt Mix Design Methods’ for Superpave Method.
B. Asphalt Mix: 1. Asphalt Binder:
a. Performance Graded Asphalt Binder: 1) Use performance graded asphalt binder identified under Asphalt Mix Design Criteria.
2. Aggregates: a. Use clean, hard, durable, angular, sound, consisting of crushed stone, crushed gravel, slag,
sand, or combination. b. Use nominal maximum size aggregate and maximum size aggregate per Asphalt Mix Design
Criteria. Aggregate gradation to meet Table 1 - MASTER GRADING BANDS requirements:
Table 1 - MASTER GRADING BANDS
Sieve (mm) Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size
12.5 mm 9.5 mm
Control
Sieves
19 100 -
12.5 100 100
9.5 < 90 90 – 100
4.75 -- < 90
2.36 28 – 58 32 – 60
0.075 2 – 10 2 – 10
Restricted
Zone
2.36 39.1 47.2
1.18 25.6 – 31.6 31.6 – 37.6
0.6 19.1 – 23.1 23.5 – 27.5
0.3 15.5 18.7
NOTES: 1. It is assumed fine and coarse aggregate have same bulk specific
gravity. 2. Gradation is expressed in percent passing by weight, ASTM C136.
Percentage of fines passing 0.075 mm control sieve determined by washing, ASTM C117.
c. Provide aggregate material properties to meet Table 2 – AGGREGATE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES requirements:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-8
Table 2 –AGGREGATE PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Property ASTM ESAL Min Max
Coarse Aggregate (does not pass No. 4 sieve)
Angularity (fractured faces), percent D5821
less than 0.3 55 --
0.3 to 3.0 75 --
greater than 3.0 85/80 --
Wear (hardness or toughness), percent C131/C131M
less than 0.3 -- 40
0.3 to 3.0 -- 35
greater than 3.0 -- 35
Flats or elongates (3:1 length to
width), percent, maximum D4791 -- -- 20
Fine Aggregate (passing No. 4 sieve)
Angularity (uncompacted void content), percent (AASHTO T304) --
less than 0.3 -- --
0.3 to 3.0 40 --
greater than 3.0 45 --
Sand equivalent, percent D2419
less than 0.3 40 --
0.3 to 3.0 40 --
greater than 3.0 45 --
Friable particles, percent C142 -- -- 2
Plastic limit, maximum Liquid limit D4318 -- -- 25
Plastic limit D4318 -- -- 6
Notes: 1. ESAL in millions.
2. Angularity by weight retained above 9 mm sieve, with at least one fractured face. 85/80 denotes 85 percent coarse aggregate has one fractured face and 80 percent has two or more fractured faces.
3. Wear of aggregate retained above 2.36 mm sieve unless specific aggregates have higher values are known to be satisfactory.
4. Flats or elongates retained above 4.75 mm sieve. 5. Friable particles passing No. 4.75 mm sieve.
6. Plasticity, passing No. 4.75 sieve. Aggregate is no-plastic even when filler material is added to aggregate.
Blended Physical Properties
Dry-rodded unit weight, lb/ft3, minimum C29/C29M
-
75 --
Weight loss (soundness), percent,
maximum C88 -- 16
Clay content or cleanliness (sand
equivalent), percent D2419 less than 0.3 45 --
more than 0.3 60 --
Notes: 1. Weight loss using sodium sulfate.
2. Sand equivalent value is after going through dryer or before drum mixer. The sand equivalent requirement is waived for RAP aggregate but applies to remainder of aggregate blend.
3. Friable particles of clay lumps, shale, wood, mica, and coal passing 4.75 sieve.
3. Admixture: a. Antistrip: Heat stable, cement slurry, lime slurry, dry lime, or liquid antistrip:
1) Add if mix is moisture sensitive as determined by 'Moisture Susceptibility' paragraph below.
b. Mineral Filler: Comply with requirements of ASTM D242/D242M. c. Recycle Agent: Comply with requirements of ASTM D4552/D4552M.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-9
2.2 MATERIAL
A. Aggregate Base: Conform to applicable requirements as specified in Section 31 1123: ‘Aggregate
Base’. B. Asphalt Paving Surface Treatment:
1. Include mandatory Asphalt Paving Surface Treatment to be applied no sooner than thirty (30) days or no later than eighteen (18) months of placing Asphalt Paving to be included with this
project: a. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal as specified in Section 32 0113.01 ‘Asphalt Paving Surface
Treatment: Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal’.
C. Pre-Emergent Herbicide:
1. Design Criteria: a. Selective type pre-emergence control chemical containing twenty-five (25 percent) Prometon
minimum for control of annual grasses and broadleaf weeds. b. Non-oil based sterilant.
c. Labeled for under-pavement use. 2. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Pramitol 25E Herbicide by WinField United, St Paul MN www.winfieldunited.com. 1) Apply at a rate of 10 gal (37.85 liter) per 1 acre (0.4046863 hectare) conforming to
application rates indicated on product label. b. Equal as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
D. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP). Aggregate: Restrictions include: 1. Allowed up to 25 percent. Asphalt binder shall be one grade softer when more than 15 percent
RAP is used.
E. Tack Coat:
1. Emulsified asphalt meeting requirements of ASTM D977, Grade SS-1H, CQS-1H, or ASTM D2397/D2397M, Grade CSS-1H.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. Approved Applicators. See Section 01 4301 ‘Quality Assurance - Qualifications’:
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: 1. Aggregate base and paving must be placed before any moisture or seasonal changes occur to
subgrade that would cause compaction tests previously performed to be erroneous. Re-compact and retest subgrade soils that have been left exposed to weather.
B. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: 1. Pre-emergent herbicide:
a. Take necessary precautions to protect adjoining property and areas designated for planting on building site.
b. Do not contaminate any body of water by direct application, cleaning of equipment or disposal of wastes.
2. Asphalt Paving: a. Protect all structures, including curb, gutter, sidewalks, guard rails and guide posts.
b. Protect neighborhood, storm drains and down-stream fish habitat.
C. Surface Preparation:
1. Survey and stake parking surfaces to show grading required by Contract Documents. 2. Subgrade (soil below aggregate base):
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-10
a. Prepare natural soil subgrade as specified in Section 31 2213 ‘Rough Grading’ or prepare fill subgrade as described in Section 31 2216 ‘Fine Grading’.
3. Aggregate base: a. Finish grade parking surface area to grades required by Contract Documents.
b. Compact aggregate base as specified in Section 31 1123 ‘Aggregate Base’. c. Tolerances:
1) Elevation of aggregate base shall be 0.00 inches (0.00 mm) high and no more than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) low.
2) Measure using string line from curb to curb, gutter, flat drainage structure, or grade break.
4. Tack coat: a. Clean surface of all materials such as mud, dirt, leaves, etc. that prevent tack from bonding
to existing surfaces. 1) If flushed, allow surface to dry.
5. Asphalt paving: a. Area shall be clean and tack coat applied before placing of asphalt paving.
1) Remove all moisture, dirt, sand, leaves, and other objectionable material from prepared surface before placing asphalt.
2) Locate, reference, and protect all utility covers, monuments, curb, and gutter and other components affected by asphalt paving operations.
3) Allow sufficient cure time for tack coat before placing asphalt.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Section 31 1123: ‘Aggregate Base’ for compaction of aggregate base.
2. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’ for rough grading and preparation of natural soil subgrades below fill and aggregate base materials.
3. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for grading of subgrade below aggregate base and topsoil. 4. Section 31 2323: ‘Fill’ for compaction procedures and tolerances.
B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide: 1. Asphalt paving areas:
a. Follow Manufacturer’s printed application requirements: b. Apply to prepared subgrade dispersed in liquid. Concentrate shall be such that
Manufacturer's full recommended amount of chemical will be applied to every 1000 sq ft (93 sq m) and liquid will penetrate minimum of 2 inches (50 mm).
c. Application shall be no more than one (1) day before installation of aggregate base.
C. Tack Coat:
1. General: a. Tack coat vertical surfaces or existing asphalt cement concrete or portland cement concrete
that will be in contact with asphalt paving. b. Use tack coat diluted to a 2:1 (concentrate water) ratio.
c. Use pressure distributor to apply in uniform, continuous spread. d. Cover all tacked surface areas with surfacing materials same day of application.
2. Application rate. Typically, as follows: a. Emulsions, 0.08 to 0.15 gallons per sq yd (0.303 to 0.679 L per sq m) of diluted material:
1) Apply sufficient to achieve ninety-five (95) percent or better coverage of existing surfaces.
2) Above application rates may vary according to field conditions. Obtain approval from Civil Engineer for quantities, rate of application, temperatures, and areas to be treated
before any application.
D. Asphalt Paving:
1. General: a. Paving adjacent to cast-in-place concrete site elements shall be between 1/4 inch (6 mm)
higher than concrete. b. Surface texture of hand worked areas shall match texture of machine-laid areas.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-11
c. Surface shall be uniform with no 'birdbaths’. Leave finished surfaces clean and smooth. Variations from specified grades shall not exceed 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
d. Cross Slope: 1/4 inch (6 mm) in 10 feet (3.0 m) perpendicular to centerline except at cross section grade breaks.
e. Grade: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3.0 m) parallel to centerline. f. Do not place on frozen aggregate base or during adverse climatic conditions such as
precipitation or when roadway surface is icy or wet. g. Uniformly mix materials so aggregate is thoroughly coated with asphalt.
h. Place at temperatures established by the mix design with self-propelled laydown machine. i. Use Table 3 – MINIMUM TEMPERATURE, DEGREES as guide:
Table 3 – MINIMUM TEMPERATURE, DEGREES
Ambient Air Temperature Deg F.
Ambient Air Temperature Deg C.
Compacted Paving Mat Thickness
3/4"
(19 mm)
1”
(25 mm)
1 1/2"
(38 mm)
2”
(50 mm)
3”
(75 mm)
4” +
(100 mm) +
45 – 50 7 – 10 --- --- --- --- 280 265
50 – 59 10 – 15 --- --- --- 280 270 255
60 – 69 16 – 20 --- --- 285 275 265 250
70 – 79 21 – 79 285 285 280 270 265 250
80 - 89 27 - 31 280 275 270 265 260 250
90+ 32+ 275 270 265 260 250 250
j. Longitudinal bituminous joints shall be vertical and properly tack coated if cold. Transverse
joints shall always be tack coated.
2. Compaction: a. Compact asphalt paving to ninety-four (94) percent plus or minus two (2) percent of
theoretical maximum specific gravity, ASTM D2041/D2041M (Rice Method - maximum theoretical density). b. Roll with powered equipment capable of obtaining specified density while providing required
smoothness.
c. Begin breakdown rolling immediately after asphalt is placed when asphalt temperature is at maximum.
d. Complete handwork compaction concurrently with breakdown rolling. e. Execute compaction so visibility of joints is minimized: f. Complete finish rolling to improve asphalt surface as soon as possible after intermediate
rolling and while asphalt paving is still warm.
g. Do not use vibration for finish rolling. 3. Lift Thickness:
a. Preferred Method: 1) For pavements 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) or thinner apply asphalt paving in single lift.
2) For pavements greater than 3-1/2 inch (89 mm), use alternate method below. b. Alternate Method:
1) Asphalt paving may be applied in two (2) lifts, first 2 inches (50 mm) thick minimum and second 1 1/2 inches (38 mm) thick minimum following temperature recommendations of
following paragraph. 2) Surface of first lift shall be clean and provide tack coat between first and second lifts.
3) Provide not less than two (2) times maximum aggregate size in compacted asphalt concrete mixes.
E. Asphalt Paving Surface Treatments: 1. Apply mandatory Asphalt Paving Surface Treatment no sooner than thirty (30) days or no later
than eighteen (18) months of placing Asphalt Paving to be included with this project. Do not
apply prior to asphalt curing (refer to ‘Asphalt, Concrete and Pervious Concrete Maintenance
Guidelines’): a. Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal as specified in Section 32 0113.01 ‘Asphalt Paving Surface
Treatment: Asphalt Based Penetrating Seal’.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-12
F. Paint Stripes: 1. Apply paint stripes after asphalt paving surface treatment has been applied to asphalt paving.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests And Inspections:
1. Civil and structural field tests, laboratory testing, and inspections are provided by Owner’s
independent Testing Agency as specified in Section 01 4523 ‘Testing And Inspection Services’:
a. Quality Control is sole responsibility of Contractor: 1) Owner’s employment of an independent Testing Agency does not relieve Contractor of
Contractor’s obligation to perform testing and inspection as part of his Quality Control: a) Testing and inspections will be responsibility of Contractor to be performed by an
independent entity. 2) Contractor bears full responsible for compliance with all contract requirements and
quality control on project and will be responsible for quality of asphalt mixture and asphalt installation.
B. Field Tests (Provided by Contractor): 1. General:
a. Contractor bears full responsibility for compliance with all contract requirements and quality control on project and will be responsible for quality of asphalt mixture and asphalt
installation. b. Testing and Inspection Reports to be distributed as specified in Section 01 4523 ‘Testing
And Inspection Services’. 2. Compaction Tests:
a. Contractor to provide compaction tests of asphalt being placed to establish rolling patterns and installation procedures.
b. Compaction tests by Contractor are independent of compaction tests being provided by Owner. See Section 01 4523 ‘Testing And Inspection Services’.
c. Asphalt paving shall be compacted to ninety-four (94) percent of Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity (Rice) plus three (3) percent or minus two (2) percent. Determine percent
compaction by ASTM D2041/D2041M. 3. Thickness Tests:
a. Determine thickness of paving being placed, no less than one (1) test per 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) of paving or portion thereof, three (3) tests minimum.
C. Field Tests And Inspections (Provided by Owner): 1. General:
a. Compaction tests provided by Owner will be used to validate or determine discrepancies with testing by Contractor.
b. Civil engineer applies pay factor for Gradation/Asphalt Content, In-Place Density. Civil engineer computes pay factor for each lot.
c. Opening paved surface to traffic does not constitute acceptance. d. Unless required by the Owner’s Representative, Testing Agency is to base compaction
testing on Contractor’s submitted mix design for theoretical maximum specific gravity (Rice) or Marshall specific gravity (Bulk) values.
e. Asphalt-aggregate mix sampling as per ASTM D979/D979M. 1) Test for:
a) Air voids as per ASTM D3203/D3203M. b) Asphalt binder content as per ASTM D6307.
c) Aggregate gradation as per ASTM D5444. f. Lot size: 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or part thereof.
g. Sub lot size: 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m) or part thereof. 2. At Site Testing and Inspection:
a. Asphalt Paving: 1) Testing Agency shall provide full time nuclear density testing and inspection for asphalt
paving during asphalt paving operations (nuclear density testing is informational testing only and does not constitute acceptance by Owner).
2) Inspection to include:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-13
a) Aggregate coating. b) Compaction control and effort required.
c) Suitability of spreading and asphalt paving equipment. d) Temperature of mix as delivered and placed.
(1) Reject mixes exceeding 325 deg F (163 deg C) in transport vehicle as required in Non-Conforming Work below.
(2) Dispose of cold mix in paver hopper as thin spread underlay. 3) Field Tests:
a) When tested with 10 foot (3 meter) straight edge, surface of completed work shall not contain irregularities in excess of 1/4 inch (6 mm).
b) Determine percent compaction per ASTM D2950/D2950M unless other nondestructive nonnuclear methods such as sonar are used.
c) Provide written nuclear density testing, or other nondestructive nonnuclear methods such as sonar, of asphalt paving at minimum rate of one (1) per 2,500 sq.
ft. (232 sq. m). Select test locations by ASTM D3665 and sample per ASTM D979/D979M before compaction. Minimum of three (3) tests required.
d) Compact asphalt paving to ninety-four (94) percent of Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity (Rice) plus three (3) percent or minus two (2) percent.
e) Maximum average total air voids in completed hot mix asphalt shall be eight (8) percent but more than three (3) percent as determined by ASTM D2041/D2041M.
f) Determine thickness of paving being placed, no less than one (1) test per 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) of paving or portion thereof, three (3) tests minimum.
3. At Laboratory Testing: a. General:
1) Provide at least one (1) laboratory test series for every 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or part thereof (minimum of one (1) test):
a) Test reports will show compliance with Contract Documents regarding type and depth of aggregate base, depth and density of asphalt paving, asphalt content,
aggregate gradation, flow and stability, bulk specific gravity and maximum specific gravity.
b) Reports will also give test procedures used by testing laboratory. b. Compaction and Final Density:
1) Pavement thickness and final density to be determined by results of coring. Provide one (1) core per 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or part thereof. Minimum of three (3) tests
required if under 30,000 sq. ft. (2 787 sq. m). a) Based upon core samples, compaction is acceptable if test deviations are within
pay factor 1.00 limits. b) At Project Manager’s discretion, after consulting with Design Team, a Lot with a
sub-lot test deviation greater than Reject may stay in place at fifty (50) percent cost.
c) Select test locations by ASTM D3665 and sample per ASTM D979/D979M after compaction.
c. Compaction Pay Factor: 1) Based upon core samples, compaction is acceptable if test deviations are within pay
factor 1.00 limits. 2) At Project Manager’s discretion, after consulting with design team, a Lot with a sub-lot
test deviation greater than Reject may stay in place at fifty (50) percent cost. 3) Average Density, in percent as shown in Table 4 – COMPACTION PAY FACTORS:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-14
Table 4 – COMPACTION PAY FACTORS (94 percent of theoretical maximum specific gravity – Superpave (Rice)
(ASTM D2041/D2041M plus three (3) or minus two (2) percent)
Pay Factor Density, in Percent
Average Lowest Test
0.70 More than 96 ---
1.00 92 to 96 89 or Greater
0.90 92 to 96 Less than 89
Reject Less than 92 ---
Notes: 1. At Contractor’s discretion and expense, do Hamburg wheel track test
(AASHTO T 304) on 3 additional random core samples from non-complying sub-lot of 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m). Sub-lot will be accepted if average rut
depth is less than 10 mm at 20,000 passes.
d. Pavement Thickness: 1) Pavement thickness and final density to be determined by results of coring. Provide
one (1) core per 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m) or part thereof. Minimum of three (3) tests required if under 30,000 sq. ft. (2 787 sq. m).
a) Acceptance will be based on the average of all thickness tests. b) At Project Manager’s discretion, after consulting with design team, payment may
be made for areas deficient in thickness by more than 0.75 inches (19.05 mm) at fifty (50) percent. If not, remove and replace at no additional cost to the Owner as
shown in Table 5 – THICKNESS PAY FACTORS:
Table 5 – THICKNESS PAY FACTORS
Pay Factors Thickness Deficiency, in Inches (ASTM D3549/D3549M)
1.00 0.00 to 0.25
0.90 0.26 to 0.50
0.70 0.51 to 0.75
Reject 0.76 to 1.00
e. Air Voids:
1) Basis of evaluation is laboratory compacted samples (not field compacted samples). 2) Air voids will be mix design target plus or minus one (1) percent.
3) If test results are not within this Section’s limits, options include correction of production procedures or alternate mix design acceptable to Civil Engineer.
D. Non-Conforming Work: Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following:
1. Asphalt Paving: a. Deficient asphalt paving thickness:
1) Place additional material over deficient areas. Do not skin patch. Mill for inlay if necessary. Correct deficient asphalt paving thickness at no additional cost to the
Owner. b. Rejection and Removal of Asphalt Paving:
1) Remove asphalt paving found defective after installation and install acceptable product at no additional cost to the Owner.
c. Removal of Asphalt Paving: 1) Remove spatter, over-coat, or mar at no additional cost to the Owner.
2) Remove asphalt from borrow pits or gutters at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Repair of Asphalt Paving:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Asphalt Paving: Superpave Method 32 1216-15
1) Repair or replace defective joints, seams, edges at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Tack Coat: 1. Protect all surfaces exposed to public view from being spattered or marred. Remove any
spattering, over-coating, or marring at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Traffic:
a. Do not permit traffic to travel over tacked surface until tack coat has cured and dried.
B. Asphalt Paving:
1. Protect hot mixed asphalt (HMA) pavement from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Waste Management:
1. Pre-emergent herbicide: a. Follow Manufacturer’s recommendations for disposal of product at approved waste disposal
facility. 1) Do not reuse empty containers.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Pavement Marking 32 1723-1
SECTION 32 1723
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish acrylic paint and apply pavement and curb markings as described in Contract Documents
including:
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards: 1. Federal Specifications and Standards:
a. FED-STD-595C, ‘Federal Standard: Colors Used in Government Procurement’ (16 Jan 2008).
b. FED TT-P-1952F, ‘Paint, Traffic and Airfield Marking, Waterborne’ (17 Feb 2015). 2. U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration:
a. FHWA MUTCD-10, ‘Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices’.
1.3 SUBMITTALLS
A. Action Submittal: 1. Product Data:
1) Manufacturer's published product data and certification that product supplied meets requirements of this specification.
B. Informational Submittal: 1. Test And Evaluation Reports:
a. Acrylic Paint: 1) Provide reports showing compliance to FED TT-P-1952F.
C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Record Documentation: 1) Manufacturer’s Documentation:
a) Product data. b) Specification compliance documentation.
2) Testing and Inspection Reports: a) Reports showing compliance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Paint must meet requirements of FED TT-P-1952-F and local regulations for VOC. 2. Paint handicap spaces to conform to ADA Standards and local code requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
1. Materials shall be delivered in original, unopened containers with labels intact.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Pavement Marking 32 1723-2
a. Labels to include: 1) Manufacturer’s name and address.
2) TT-P-1952F reference. 3) Classification Type.
4) Color.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Follow Manufacturer’s storage and handling requirements. 2. Protect stored material from freezing at temperatures above 35 deg F (2 deg C) or above 115 deg
F (46.1 deg C). 3. Do not invert or roll containers.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Ambient Conditions:
1. Acrylic Paint: a. Apply only on dry clean surfaces, during favorable weather (not excessively windy, dusty, or
foggy), and when damage by rain, fog, or condensation not anticipated. b. Paving surface and Ambient temperature shall be minimum 50 deg F (10 deg C) and rising.
c. Temperature shall not drop below 50 deg F (10 deg C) within twenty-four (24) hour period following application.
d. Acetone based paints that are one hundred (100) percent acrylic shall not drop below 32 deg F (0 deg C) within twenty-four (24) hour period following application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Acrylic Paint: 1. Description:
a. Low VOC, ready-mixed, one- component, acrylic waterborne traffic marking paint suitable for application on concrete, asphalt, sealers, and previously painted areas of these surfaces.
2. Design Criteria: a. General:
1) Traffic Paint. 2) Non-volatile portion of vehicle for all classification types shall be composed of one
hundred (100) percent acrylic. 3) Meet FED TT-P-1952F specification requirements.
4) Fast drying when applied at ambient conditions requirement. 5) Low VOC.
6) Non-Reflectorized. 7) Traffic paints not intended for use as floor paints. Do not use on pedestrian walkways
or large surfaces such as ramps, floors and stairs which may become slippery when wet.
b. Classification: 1) Type I for use under normal conditions.
2) Type II for use under adverse conditions. 3) Type III for increased durability.
c. Composition: 1) Non-volatile portion for all types shall be composed of one hundred (100) percent
acrylic polymer as determined by infrared spectral analysis. 2) Prohibited material:
a) Product does not contain mercury, lead, hexavalent chromium, toluene, chlorinated solvents, hydrolysable chlorine derivatives, ethylene-based glycol
ethers and their acetates, nor any carcinogen. d. Qualitative Requirements:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Pavement Marking 32 1723-3
1) Meet FED TT-P-1952F requirements for: a) Abrasion resistance.
b) Accelerated package stability. c) Accelerated weathering.
d) Appearance. e) Color requirements:
(1) Color Match (all colors except white and yellow). (2) Daylight directional reflectance.
(3) Yellow color match. f) Condition in container.
g) Dry-through (early washout) for Type II only. h) Flexibility.
i) Freeze/thaw stability. j) Heat-shear stability.
k) Scrub resistance. l) Skinning.
m) Titanium dioxide content. n) Water resistance.
e. Quantitative requirements: 1) Meet FED TT-P-1952F requirements (Table 1).
2) Acetone based paints that are one hundred (100) percent acrylic and have exempt status under Federal law are exempt from meeting FED TT-P-1925F requirements.
3. Colors: a. General:
1) Traffic Paint will be furnished in white and any Federal Standard 595 color in accordance to FED-STD-595C:
a) Yellow: 33538. b) Blue: 35180.
c) Red: 31136. b. White (Yellow may be used at Owner Representative’s discretion):
1) Lane lines, edge lines, transverse lines, arrows, words, symbol markings, speed bump markings, parking space markings.
c. Yellow: 1) Cross-hatching in medians, cross hatching in safety zones separating opposing traffic
flows, crosswalk stripes, safety markings, centerlines, edge lines along left edge of one-way roadway or one-way ramp.
d. Blue And White: 1) In parking spaces specifically designated as reserved for disabled.
e. Red: 1) Fire lanes, no parking zones, special raised pavement markers that are placed to be
visible to “wrong-way” drivers. 4. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Any product meeting design criteria of this specification as approved by Architect/Owner’s Representative before application. See Section 01 6200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Acrylic Paint: 1. Asphalt Surfaces:
a. Do not apply paint until asphalt has cooled. b. Allow new seal coated surfaces to cure for at least twenty-four (24) hours before applying
paint. 2. Concrete Surfaces:
a. Do not apply paint to new concrete surfaces until concrete has cured seven (7) days minimum.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Pavement Marking 32 1723-4
B. Surfaces shall be dry and free of grease and loose dirt particles. 1. Scrape and wire brush chipped, peeling, or damaged paint on existing curbs.
C. Perform layout with chalk or lumber crayon only.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General: 1. Mix in accordance and apply as per Manufacturer's instructions.
2. Apply at locations and to dimensions and spacing as shown on Contract Drawings.
B. Tolerances:
1. General: Make lines parallel, evenly spaced, and with sharply defined edges. 2. Line Widths:
a. Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) variance on straight segments. b. Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm) variance on curved alignments.
C. Coverage: 1. Paint stripes added to new asphalt and concrete surfaces:
a. Apply single coat. 2. Paint stripes applied to existing asphalt and concrete surfaces:
a. Apply single coat to existing asphalt parking lots which are being re-striped and where no surface treatments are being applied to asphalt.
b. Apply single coat to existing concrete parking lots which are being re-striped. c. Apply single coat to existing concrete curbs.
3. Paint stripes applied to new asphalt paving surface treatment over existing asphalt paving. a. Except for slurry seal:
1) Apply single coat after seal coat has completely dried. b. Slurry seal coat:
1) Apply first coat after seal coat has completely dried. 2) Apply second coat after first coat has thoroughly dried and then wait thirty (30) to forty-
five (45) days and after ravel sweeping to apply second coat. 4. Apply traffic paint at rate of 13 to 15 mils minimum wet thickness, 8 to 9 mils dry thickness.
Application at more than 15 mils may result in extended dry times and may cause lifting or cracking on some asphalt surfaces.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-Conforming Work:
1. Replace or correct defective material not conforming to requirements of this specification or any work performed that is of inferior quality at no cost to Owner.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General:
1. Remove drips, overspray, improper markings, and paint material tracked by traffic by sand
blasting, wire brushing, or other method approved by Architect/Owner’s Representative before
performance.
B. Waste Management:
1. Remove debris resulting from work of this Section. Dispose of or recycle all trash and excess material in manner conforming to current EPA regulations and local laws.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 1
SECTION 32 8400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION
1.GENERAL
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 9300: Plants. 2. Section 32 9200: Turf and Grasses.
2. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Automatic control valves. 4. Transition fittings. 5. Dielectric fittings. 6. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 7. Sprinklers. 8. Quick couplers. 9. Drip irrigation specialties. 10. Controllers. 11. Boxes for automatic control valves.
3. DEFINITIONS A. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.
B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. C. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure. D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or, for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
4. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves. B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated.
1. Field verify soil conditions: C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 2
1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig. 2. Circuit Piping: 150 psig.
5. SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Record Drawings: 1. As installation occurs, prepare accurate record drawing to be submitted before final inspection. Show the following: a. Detail and dimension changes made during construction. b. Significant details and dimensions not shown in original Contract Documents. c. Field dimensioned locations of valve boxes, quick coupler valves, control wire runs not in mainline trench, and both ends of sleeves. d. Take dimensions from permanent constructed surfaces or edges located at or above finished grade. e. Take record dimensions at time of installation. 2. Reduce copy of record drawing to half-size, color key circuits, and laminate both sides with 5 mil thick or heavier plastic. D. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic controller zone. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers, controllers, and automatic control valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
6. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers with 5 years experience, in business a minimum of 5 years. Approved installers: 1. A Summer Rain Landscaping 2. Artesian Sprinklers and Landscaping 3. Season’s West Landscaping
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
8. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Project Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Project Manager's written permission.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 3
9. EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Impact Sprinklers: Two units. 2. Spray Sprinklers: Equal to Two units. 3. Bubblers: Equal to Two units. 4. Emitters: Equal to Two units. 5. Drip-Tube System Tubing: 100 feet.
2.PRODUCTS
1. PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight, Type E, Grade B. 1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/ A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless-steel pipe with threaded ends. 2. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. 3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends. 4. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. C. Ductile-Iron Pipe with Mechanical Joints: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and spigot ends. 1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. D. Ductile-Iron Pipe with Push-on Joint: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and spigot ends. 1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. E. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends. F. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B), and ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C), water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 4
G. PE Pipe with Controlled ID: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound; SIDR 11.5 and SIDR 15.
1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, nylon or propylene plastic with barbed ends. Include bands or other fasteners.
H. PE Pipe with Controlled OD: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound, SDR 11.
1. PE Butt, Heat-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261. 2. PE Socket-Type Fittings: ASTM D 2683.
I. PE Pressure Pipe: AWWA C906, with DR of 7.3, 9, or 9.3 and PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 200 psig . 1. PE Butt, Heat-Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261. 2. PE Socket-Type Fittings: ASTM D 2683. 3. As shown on drawings.
J. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedules 40 and 80. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 80. 2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80. 3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends. K. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21 and SDR 26. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80.
2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP-107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends.
2. PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. F. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
3. ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. B. Form: Tube. C. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) minimum thickness. D. Color: Black.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 5
4. MANUAL VALVES A. Curb Valves:
1. As shown on drawings. B. Curb-Valve Casing:
1. As shown on drawings. C. Brass Ball Valves:
1. Manufacturers: As shown on drawings.
D. Plastic Ball Valves: 1. As shown on drawings.
5. PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators: 1. Manufacturers: As shown
6. AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A. Bronze, Automatic Control Valves:
1. Manufacturers: As shown.
7. TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Transition Couplings:
1. Manufacturers: As shown.
8. DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
9. MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4-1/2-inch diameter dial, dial range of two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 6
10. SPRINKLERS
A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at available water pressure.
B. Plastic, Pop-up, Gear-Drive Rotary Sprinklers:
1. Manufacturers: As shown
C. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers: 1. As shown
D. Plastic Shrub Sprinklers:
1. Manufacturers: As shown.
11. QUICK COUPLERS
A. Manufacturers: As shown.
12. DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES
A. Manufacturers: As shown.
B. Off-Ground Supports: Plastic stakes. C. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 3/4, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 psig. D. Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit.
E. Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts. F. Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts.
13. CONTROLLERS
A. Manufacturers: As shown.
14. BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. Plastic Boxes: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following: a. Ametek. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Brooks.
B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 inch minimum to 3 inches maximum.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 7
3.EXECUTION
1. EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs. C. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3 inches, to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt- saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 24 inches. 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches. 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches. 4. Sleeves: 24 inches.
2. PREPARATION A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain project manager’s approval before excavation.
3. PIPING INSTALLATION A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves.
C. Install piping free of sags and bends. D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 or smaller pipe connection. G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-1/2 or larger pipe connection. H. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774. I. Install expansion loops in control-valve boxes for plastic piping. J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. K. Install ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600. L. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 8
M. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. Install aboveground or in control-valve boxes. N. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves aboveground or in control-valve boxes.
O. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks.
P. Install sleeves made of Schedule 40 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
Q. Install transition fittings for plastic-to-metal pipe connections according to industry standards.
R. Install dielectric fittings for dissimilar-metal pipe connections according to industry standards.
4. JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Flanged Joints: Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. E. Ductile-Iron Piping Gasketed Joints: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. F. Copper-Tubing Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal. G. Copper-Tubing Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux to tube end unless otherwise indicated. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead- free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32. H. PE Piping Fastener Joints: Join with insert fittings and bands or fasteners according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. I. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
J. PVC Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 9
5. VALVE INSTALLATION A. Underground Curb Valves: Install in curb-valve casings with tops flush with grade. B. Underground Iron Gate Valves, Resilient Seat: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install in valve casing with top flush with grade.
1. Install valves and PVC pipe with restrained, gasketed joints.
C. Aboveground Valves: Install as components of connected piping system. D. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install as shown.
6. SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights. C. Locate part-circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 12 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries unless otherwise indicated.
7. DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A. Install freestanding emitters on pipe riser to mounting height indicated. B. Install manifold emitter systems with tubing to emitters. Plug unused manifold outlets. Install emitters on off-ground supports at height indicated. C. Install multiple-outlet emitter systems with tubing to outlets. Plug unused emitter outlets. Install outlets on off-ground supports at height indicated.
D. Install drip tubes with direct-attached emitters on ground. E. Install drip tubes with remote-discharge on ground with outlets on off-ground supports at height indicated. F. Install off-ground supports of length required for indicated mounted height of device. G. Install application pressure regulators and filter units in piping near device being protected, and in control-valve boxes. H. Install air relief valves in piping, and in control-valve boxes.
8. AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION-CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: Install interior controllers on wall. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
B. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and taped to piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 10
9. CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water supply from exterior water service piping, water meters, protective enclosures, and backflow preventers. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect wiring between controllers, decoders and automatic control valves.
10. IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install on control valves. B. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of trenches. See Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for warning tapes.
11. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
12. STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal.
13. ADJUSTING A. Adjust settings of controllers. B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. C. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will be 1/2 inch above, finish grade.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 11
14. CLEANING A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.
15. DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control valves and controller.
16. PIPING SCHEDULE A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. B. Piping in control-valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges or unions instead of joints indicated.
C. Aboveground irrigation main piping shall be the following: 1. Galvanized-steel pipe and galvanized-steel pipe nipples; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
D. Underground irrigation main piping shall be as shown on drawings.
E. Circuit piping shall be as shown on drawings.
F. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: As shown.
G. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: As shown on drawings.
H. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: As shown
17. VALVE SCHEDULE
A. As shown on drawings.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Planting Requirements 32 9001-1
SECTION 32 9001
COMMON PLANTING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Common procedures and requirements for landscaping work.
2. Provide maintenance for new landscaping as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Pre-Installation conferences held jointly with Section 32 9001 as described in Administrative Requirements on Part 1 of this specification section:
2. Section 01 4301: 'Quality Assurance – Qualifications'. 3. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’.
4. Section 31 1100: ‘Clearing and Grubbing’. 5. Section 31 1413: ‘Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling’.
6. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’. 7. Section 31 2216: 'Fine Grading'.
8. Section 31 2316: ‘Excavation’. 9. Section 31 2323: ‘Fill’.
10. Section 32 8423: 'Underground Sprinklers'. 11. Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’.
12. Section 32 9121: ‘Topsoil Physical Preparation’ (section included based on Topsoil Testing Report).
13. Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’. 14. Section 32 9219: 'Seeding'.
15. Section 32 9222: 'Hydro-Seeding'. 16. Section 32 9223: 'Sodding'.
17. Section 32 9300: 'Plants'. 18. Section 32 9413: 'Landscape Edging'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions:
1. Landscape Management Plan (LMP): LMP is an Owner’s Representative’s quick reference maintenance document. It is a combination of Irrigation Sections from 32 8000 and Planting
Sections from 32 9000. The LMP document is created from Operations and Maintenance Data, Warranty Documentation, and Record Documentation
2. Landscape Final Acceptance: Inspection, no less than (30) days following substantial completion, when all work has been completed, demonstrated, and approved by the Landscape Architect.
Coordinate with Sections 32 8423 and Sections under 32 9000 ‘Planting’. 3. Plant Establishment Period: Time required for plants to successfully develop root systems into
surrounding soil. Following this period, irrigation run times are typically modified. For purposes of this contract, the plant establishment period is assumed to be one (1) year from date of
Substantial Completion.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference and held jointly with following sections:
a. Section 32 8423: 'Underground Sprinklers'. b. Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Planting Requirements 32 9001-2
c. Section 32 9121: ‘Topsoil Physical Preparation’ (section included based on Topsoil Testing Report).
d. Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’. e. Section 32 9219: 'Seeding'.
f. Section 32 9222: 'Hydro-Seeding'. g. Section 32 9223: 'Sodding'.
h. Section 32 9300: 'Plants'. i. Section 32 9413: 'Landscape Edging'.
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following: a. Site Visits:
1) Landscape Architect to visit site five (5) times during project construction. 2) If site conditions necessitate additional visits, Landscape Architect can schedule
addition site visits with approval from Architect prior to bid. 3) During construction, addition site visits may be approved in writing by Architect or
Owner for special considerations before commencement. 4) Site visits caused by lack of work progress by Landscape Subcontractor shall reimburse
Landscape Architect amount determined by Architect or Owner for additional site visits. b. Coordination:
1) Landscape Subcontractor and Landscape Architect to coordinate site visits and include Architect and General Contractor in communications.
c. Landscape Maintenance: 1) Establish responsibility for maintenance of new landscaping during all phases of
construction period. d. Percolation Test:
1) Prepare two (2) typical landscape planting excavations and conduct percolation test to verify that water drains away within two (2) hours.
2) Discuss results of percolation tests with Architect and Owner's Representative. e. Review additional agenda items as specified in related sections listed above.
3. Approved Site Visits: a. Site Visit No. 1:
1) Description: a) Landscape pre-installation Conference.
2) Schedule: Conduct pre-installation conference after completion of Fine Grading specified in Section 31 2216, but one (1) week minimum before beginning landscape
work. 3) Required Attendees:
a) Project Manager, Facilities Manager, Architect, General Contractor, Landscape Subcontractor, Excavator, and Landscape Architect.
b) Include Landscaping Subcontractor Foreman and those responsible for installation of landscaping to be in attendance.
4) Related Sections: a) Section 31 0501: 'Common Earthwork Requirements'.
b) Section 32 8423: 'Underground Sprinklers'. c) Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’.
d) Section 32 9121: ‘Topsoil Physical Preparation’ (section included based on Topsoil Testing Report).
e) Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’. f) Section 32 9219: 'Seeding'.
g) Section 32 9222: 'Hydro-Seeding'. h) Section 32 9223: 'Sodding'.
i) Section 32 9300: 'Plants'. 5) Notes:
a) Verify project site conditions and review scope of work before installation begins. b) Verify appropriate sub-grades have been established.
b. Site Visit No. 2: 1) Description:
a) Irrigation system pressure test compliance, main line inspection, valve inspection. 2) Schedule: Conduct site visit one (1) week minimum after notification before beginning
irrigation system pressure test. 3) Required Attendees:
a) General Contractor, Landscape Subcontractor, Landscape Architect.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Planting Requirements 32 9001-3
4) Recommended Attendees: a) Project Manager, Facilities Manager.
5) Related Sections: a) Section 32 8423: 'Underground Sprinklers'.
b) Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’. c) Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’.
6) Notes: a) Verify finish grading in preparation for planting.
c. Site Visit No. 3: 1) Description:
a) Inspect and approve plant quality, plant quantity, plant pits, plant pit backfill, planting depths, and removal of packaging/distribution materials, wire, and ties.
2) Schedule: Conduct site visit one (1) week minimum after notification from Contractor before beginning site visit no. 3.
3) Required Attendees: a) General Contractor, Landscape Subcontractor, Landscape Architect.
4) Recommended Attendees: a) Project Manager, Facilities Manager.
5) Related Sections: a) Section 32 9300: 'Plants'.
6) Notes: a) Inspect irrigation system installation, inspect weed barrier fabric.
d. Site Visit No. 4: 1) Description:
a) Comprehensive Substantial Completion inspection prior to beginning thirty (30) day Landscape Subcontractor maintenance period.
2) Schedule: Conduct site visit one (1) week minimum after notification before beginning site visit no. 4.
3) Required Attendees: a) Project Manager, Facilities Manager, Architect, General Contractor, Landscape
Subcontractor, Landscape Architect. 4) Related Sections:
a) Section 32 8423: 'Underground Sprinklers'. b) Section 32 9300: 'Plants'.
5) Notes: a) Verify contract requirements have been followed including but not limited to:
planting compliance, irrigation system coverage and irrigation system operation. e. Site Visit No. 5:
1) Description: a) At the end of thirty (30) day Landscape Subcontractor maintenance period, verify
deficient items have been corrected and verify no others exist. 2) Schedule: Conduct site visit one (1) week minimum after notification before beginning
site visit no. 5. 3) Required Attendees:
a) Project Manager, Facilities Manager, Architect, General Contractor, Excavation Subcontractor, Landscape Subcontractor, Landscape Architect.
4) Related Sections: a) Section 32 8423: 'Underground Sprinklers'.
b) Section 32 9300: 'Plants'. 5) Notes:
a) Review Landscape Management Plan (LMP) with Owner's Representative. Provide landscape maintenance training.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Certificates: a. Landscape Architect will provide certificate acknowledging 'Plant Establishment Period'
commencement:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Planting Requirements 32 9001-4
1) Certificate will include name and signature of Contractor, Contractor’s company,
Contractor’s telephone number, and date.
2) Certificate will include name and signature of Owner’s Representative, Owner’s
Representative’s Group name, Owner’s Representative Group telephone number, and
date. 3) Certificate will acknowledge date when Establishment Period begins and that it extends
one (1) year from that time. 2. Special Procedure Submittals:
a. Installer to provide two (2) copies of following recommendations to be included in Closeout Submittals:
1) Landscape maintenance recommendations. 2) Individual landscape maintenance recommendations.
3) Plant establishment maintenance recommendations. 4) Post-plant establishment maintenance recommendations.
3. Qualification Statement: a. Landscape Subcontractor:
1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Landscape Architect or Owner. b. Installer:
1) Provide Qualification documentation if requested by Landscape Architect or Owner.
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800 (combine with sections of 32 8000 and sections of 32 9000 if applicable):
a. Record Documentation: 1) Submit one (1) copy certificate for 'Plant Establishment Period' acknowledgement.
2) Submit one (1) copy of recommendations specified in Special Procedure Submittals. 3) Record Drawings:
a) As installation occurs, prepare accurate record drawings. Submit one (1) full size copy prior to final inspection. Drawing shall include:
(1) Detail and dimension changes made during construction. (2) Take dimensions from permanent constructed surfaces or edges located at or
above finish grade. b. Landscape Management Plan (LMP):
1) Landscape Section: a) Submit one (1) copy certificate for 'Plant Establishment Period' acknowledgement.
b) Submit one (1) copy of recommendations specified in Special Procedure Submittals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Post-Emergent Weed Control: a. Products shall be recognized for intended use by AHJ.
2. Invasive and Non-native plants: a. Comply with all applicable laws governing invasive and non-native plants.
B. Qualifications: 1. Landscape Subcontractor. Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following:
a. Company specializing in performing work of this section. b. Minimum five (5) years’ experience in landscaping installations.
c. Minimum five (5) satisfactorily completed installations in past three (3) years of projects similar in size, scope, and complexity required for this project before bidding.
d. Upon request, submit documentation. 2. Installer:
a. Planting shall be performed under direction of foreman or supervisor with minimum three (3) years’ experience in landscape installations similar in size, scope, and complexity.
b. Foreman or supervisor required to attend pre-installation conference. c. Use trained personnel familiar with required planting procedures and with Contract
Documents.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Planting Requirements 32 9001-5
d. Upon request, submit documentation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of Manufacturer.
2. Deliver sod, plants, trees, and shrubs in healthy and vigorous condition. 3. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Store in location on site where they will not be endangered and where they can be adequately
watered and kept in healthy and vigorous condition. 2. Protect materials from deterioration while stored at site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POST-EMERGENT WEED CONTROL
A. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1. Enide by Upjohn.
2. Dymid by Elanco. 3. Treflan or Surflan by Dow Agrosciences.
4. Eptan by Syngenta. 5. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. Acceptable Installers must be approved by BYU-Idaho:
B. Acceptable Installers:
1. Meet Quality Assurance Installer Qualifications as specified in Part 1 of this specification.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Inspect site and Contract Documents to become thoroughly acquainted with locations of
irrigation, ground lighting, and utilities. 2. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Before proceeding with work, verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations between Drawings
and site to Architect before proceeding with landscape work. 1. Plant totals are for convenience of Contractor only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts
shown on Drawings. 2. All planting indicated on Contract Documents is required unless indicated otherwise.
B. Protection: 1. Take care in performing landscaping work to avoid conditions that will create hazards. Post signs
or barriers as required.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Planting Requirements 32 9001-6
2. Provide adequate means for protection from damage through excessive erosion, flooding, heavy rains, etc. Repair or replace damaged areas.
3. Keep site well drained and landscape excavations dry.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not plant trees and shrubs until major construction operations are completed. Do not
commence landscaping work until work of Section 31 2216 and Section 32 8423 has been completed and approved.
B. Coordinate installation of planting materials during normal planting seasons for each type of plant material required.
C. Hand excavate as required.
D. Maintain grade stakes until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal.
E. When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill or adverse drainage conditions, notify Architect before planting.
F. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Inspection: 1. Landscape Architect will inspect landscaping installation for Substantial Completion.
B. Non-Conforming Work. Non-conforming work as covered in the General Conditions applies, but is not limited to the following:
1. Replace damaged plantings within (10) days of notification at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Repair damage to irrigation, ground lighting, utilities, paving, concrete curb and gutters and other
items adjacent to landscaping caused by work of this Section or replace at no additional cost to Owner.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Waste Management:
1. Immediately clean up soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of deleterious materials.
3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Instruction Of Owner: 1. Include following training:
a. Review Landscape Management Plan (LMP): 1) Review maintenance recommendations.
b. Review Maintenance as specified at the end of this specification. 2. Establishment Period Acknowledgement (coordinate with 32 8000 section):
a. Landscape Architect will acknowledge Establishment Period commencement.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect planted areas against traffic or other use immediately after planting is completed by placing adequate warning signs and barricades.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Common Planting Requirements 32 9001-7
B. Provide adequate protection of planted areas against trespassing, erosion, and damage of any kind. Remove this protection after Architect has accepted planted areas.
3.9 MAINTENANCE
A. General:
1. Before beginning maintenance period, plants shall be in at least as sound, healthy, vigorous, and in approved condition as when delivered to site, unless accepted by Architect in writing at final
landscape inspection. 2. Maintain landscaping for thirty (30) continuous days minimum after Substantial Completion. If
maintenance period is interrupted by non-growing season or irrigation winter shut-down, begin maintenance period after start of growing season as agreed with Architect, and continue one (1)
continuous month therefrom. 3. Replace landscaping that is dead or appears unhealthy or non-vigorous as directed by Architect
before end of maintenance period. Make replacements within ten (10) days of notification. Lawn being replaced shall be guaranteed and maintained an additional thirty (30) days from date of
replacement.
B. Seeded Lawn:
1. Seeded lawn areas will not be accepted as complete and thirty (30) day maintenance period will not begin until uniform stand of grass at least 3 inches (75 mm) tall has been obtained.
2. After grass is established and 3 inches (75 mm) tall, mow lawn areas at least weekly to a height of 2 inches (50 mm). During this period, perform work necessary to maintain a full, even stand of
grass. 3. At end of thirty (30) days of maintenance period, fertilize lawns as specified in Section 32 9113.
4. Apply weed killers as necessary in order to obtain weed free lawn. Apply weed killer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions during calm weather when air temperature is
between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C).
C. Sodded Lawn:
1. Maintain sodded lawn areas until lawn complies with specified requirements and throughout maintenance period.
2. Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at required frequency to maintain sub-soil immediately under sod continuously moist 3 to 4 inches (75 to 100 mm) deep.
3. Cut grass first time when it reaches 3 inches (75 mm) high. Continue to mow at least once each week throughout maintenance period. Remove clippings.
4. Apply weed killer as necessary to maintain weed-free lawn. Apply weed killer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions during calm weather when air temperature is between 50 and 80 deg
F (10 and 27 deg C). 5. At end of thirty (30) day maintenance period, fertilize lawns as recommended in Section 32 9122.
D. Trees, Shrubs, And Plants: 1. Maintain by pruning, cultivating, and weeding as required for healthy growth.
2. Restore planting basins. 3. Tighten and repair stake and guy supports and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical
positions as required. 4. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.
5. Provide supplemental water by hand as needed in addition to water from sprinkling system.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Topsoil Physical Preparation 32 9121-1
SECTION 32 9121
TOPSOIL PHYSICAL PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform soil preparation work as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: 'Common Earthwork Requirements' for common site construction requirements.
a. General procedures and requirements for earthwork. 2. Section 31 1413: ‘Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling’.
3. Section 31 2213: ‘Rough Grading’. 4. Section 32 9001: 'Common Planting Requirements':
a. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common planting related sections. 5. Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’ for topsoil evaluation and placement required for topsoil
grading. 6. Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’ for preparation of topsoil and addition of amendments prior to
landscaping.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 32 9001.
2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following: a. Review physical soil amendments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Physical Soil Amendments: 1. Incorporate following soil amendments if required by Topsoil Testing Report analysis into topsoil
used for Project: a. Sand: Coordinate with landscape architect
b. Silt: Coordinate with landscape architect c. Clay: Coordinate with landscape architect
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERFORMANCE
A. Physical Soil Amendments: 1. Add specified soil amendments at specified rates to topsoil as directed by Soil Testing Laboratory.
2. Roto-till or otherwise mix amendments evenly into topsoil.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Topsoil Grading 32 9122-1
SECTION 32 9122
TOPSOIL GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform topsoil grading required to prepare site for installation of landscaping as described in
Contract Documents. 2. Perform topsoil placement and finish grading work required to prepare site for installation of
landscaping as described in Contract Documents. 3. Furnish and apply soil amendments as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’:
2. Section 31 1413: ‘Topsoil Stripping And Stockpiling’ for stripping and storing of existing topsoil. 3. Section 31 2216: ‘Fine Grading’ for landscaping and planting areas.
4. Section 32 9001: 'Common Planting Requirements': a. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common planting related sections. 5. Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’ for topsoil evaluation and placement required for topsoil grading.
6. Section 32 9121: ‘Topsoil Physical Preparation’ for physical preparation of topsoil (section included based on ‘Topsoil Testing Report’).
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 32 9001. 2. In addition to agenda items specified in Section 01 3100, review the following:
a. Review compost requirements to be within acceptable range as per Attachment 'Compost Quality Guidelines For Landscaping' and 'Compost Verification Report' in this specification.
b. Review soil fertility amendments and fertilizer requirements as per Attachment 'Topsoil
Testing Report' in Section 32 9120.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Material Data:
a. Soil Amendments and Fertilizer: 1) Product literature and chemical / nutrient analysis of soil amendments and fertilizers.
2) Proposed application rates necessary to bring topsoil up to specified requirements. 3) Source location of products. 4) Submit to Landscape Architect for approval prior to installation.
2. Samples:
a. Soil Fertility Amendments and Fertilizer: 1) Soil conditioner sample for approval before delivery to site. 2) Product analysis.
B. Informational Submittals: 1. Testing And Evaluation Reports:
a. ‘Compost Verification Report’:
1) Provide signed copy certifying that compost meets requirements of this specification.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Topsoil Grading 32 9122-2
2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Soil Fertility Amendments and Fertilizer:
1) Delivery slips indicating amount of soil amendments, compost, conditioner, and fertilizer delivered to Project site.
C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Record Documentation: 1) Submit ‘Compost Verification Report’.
2) Submit delivery slips indicating amount of physical amendments delivered to Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Soil Amendments: 1. Incorporate following soil amendments into topsoil used for Project:
1) Coordinate with landscape architect
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions:
1. Do not commence work of this Section until imported, stockpiled and in place topsoil are placed as specified in Section 32 9120 'Topsoil And Placement'.
2. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection Of In-Place Conditions: 1. Protect utilities and site elements from damage.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Surfaces that meet specified topsoil elevations. a. Seven (7) days maximum before beginning seeding and planting:
1) Loosen topsoil 6 inch (150 mm) deep, dampen thoroughly, and cultivate to properly break up clods and lumps. 2) Rake area to remove clods, rocks, weeds, roots, debris or other material 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) or more in any dimension.
3) Grade and shape landscape area to bring surface to true uniform planes free from irregularities and to provide drainage and proper slope to catch basins.
2. Addition of Soil Amendments: a. Add specified soil amendments at specified rates to topsoil as directed by Topsoil Testing Report found in Section 32 9120 'Topsoil And Placement'.
b. Add specified fertilizers at specified rates into topsoil as directed by Soil Testing Laboratory.
c. Roto-till or otherwise mix soil amendments evenly into topsoil. d. Incorporate and leach soil amendments which require leaching, such as gypsum, within such time limits that soil is sufficiently dry to allow proper application of fertilizer and soil
conditioners.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Topsoil Grading 32 9122-3
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General:
1. Limit use of heavy equipment to areas no closer than 6 feet (1.80 meter) from building or other permanent structures. Use hand held tillers for preparation of subsoil in areas closer than 6 feet
(1.80 m). 2. Do not expose or damage existing shrub or tree roots.
B. Finish Grade Tolerances (As shown on General Planting Details in Contract Documents): 1. Finish topsoil grade of planting areas before planting and after addition of soil additives shall be
specified distances below top of adjacent pavement of any kind: a. Ground Cover Areas: 2 inches (50 mm) below.
b. Seeded Areas: One inch (25 mm) below. c. Sodded Areas: 2 inches (50 mm) below.
d. Tree and Shrub Areas (not individual trees): 4 inches (100 mm) below.
C. Placed Topsoil:
1. At locations where topsoil has been placed as per Section 32 9120 'Topsoil And Placement', perform the following: a. Remove existing vegetation as required in preparation for new landscaping. b. Remove organic material, rocks and clods greater than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) in any dimension,
and other objectionable materials.
D. Grading:
1. Coordinate grading as described in Section 32 9120 'Topsoil And Placement'.
E. Immediately before planting lawn and with topsoil in semi-dry condition, roll areas that are to receive lawn in two directions at approximately right angles with water ballast roller weighing 100 to 300 lbs (45 to 135 kg), depending on soil type.
F. Rake or scarify and cut or fill irregularities that develop as required until area is true and uniform, free from lumps, depressions, and irregularities.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. After landscape areas have been prepared, take no heavy objects over them except lawn rollers.
END OF SECTION
ATTACHMENTS
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Topsoil Grading 32 9122-4
COMPOST QUALITY GUIDELINES FOR LANDSCAPING
[Source: Von Isaman MS, President of QA Consulting and Testing LLC, Dr. Rich Koenig, USU Cooperative Extension Soils Specialist, and Dr. Teresa Cerny, USU Cooperative Extension Horticulturalist, 3 March 2003]
Category pHa
Soluble Saltsa dS/m or
mmho/cm
Sodium Adsorption
Ratioa (SAR)
Carbon Nitrogen
Ratiob
(C:N)
Percent
Moisturec
≥ 98 percent
Coarse Material Passing
(dry wt basis)
Ideal 6 to 8 ≤ 5 < 10 ≤ 20:1 25 to 35 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
Acceptable 5-6, 8-9 ≤ 10 ≤ 20 21:1 to 30:1 < 25, > 35 3/4 inch (19 mm)
Suspect < 5, > 9 > 10 > 20 <10:1, > 30:1 < 20, > 50 < 98 percent 3/4 inch (19 mm)
a 1.5 Compost: Water Slurry on Coarse Material passing 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
b on Coarse Material passing 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
c on Total Sample
For composts with biosolid feedstocks, biosolids must meet EPA 503 Class A standard.
Acceptable level Soluble Salts and/or SAR composts should not exceed 3 cu yds (2.29 cu m) /1,000 sq ft (93
sq m) for every 3 inches (76 mm) of soil depth.
COMPOST VERIFICATION REPORT
pHa
Soluble Saltsa
dS/m or mmho/cm
Sodium
Adsorption
Ratioa
(SAR)
Carbon Nitrogen
Ratiob (C:N)
Percent
Moisturec
≥ 98 percent Coarse Material
Passing
(dry wt basis)
Results
See Compost Quality Guidelines for Landscaping for footnote references.
I hereby certify that the Compost meets Ideal or Acceptable requirements as set forth in COMPOST QUALITY
GUIDELINES FOR LANDSCAPING as listed with the COMPOST VERIFICATION STATEMENT. If Compost does not fall within this range, explain why and justify.
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
Signature: _______________________________ Printed Signature: ______________________________
Date: ______________________________
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 1
SECTION 32 9200 - TURF AND GRASSES
1.GENERAL
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 8400: Planting Irrigation. 2. Section 32 9300: Plants.
2. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding. 2. Hydroseeding. 3. Sodding. 4. Meadow grasses and wildflowers. 5. Turf renovation. 6. Erosion-control materials. 7. Grass paving.
B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading. 3. Division 32 Section "Porous Unit Paving" for concrete grid-type pavers shaped to provide open areas between units, planted with grass or other plants. 4. Division 32 Section "Planting Irrigation " for turf irrigation. 5. Division 32 Section "Plants" for border edgings. 6. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for subsurface drainage.
3. DEFINITIONS A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.
B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 2
G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
4. SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. E. Material Test Reports: For imported or manufactured topsoil. F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf and meadows during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.
5. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf and meadow establishment. Approved installers: 1. A Summer Rain Landscaping. 2. Artesian Sprinklers and Landscaping 3. Season’s West Landscaping B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; [sodium absorption ratio; ]deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant- nutrient content of the soil. 1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Project manager. A minimum of two representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. 3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 3
a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.
6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. C. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.
7. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant at time approved by project manager. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.
8. MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.
a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. 2. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of substantial completion.
B. Initial Meadow Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable meadow is established, but for not less than 30 days from date of substantial completion.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 4
C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
2.PRODUCTS
1. SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
B. Seed Species: State-certified seed of grass species as shown on drawings:
C. Grass Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as shown on drawings.
2. TURFGRASS SOD
A. Obtain RTF sod from Idaho Sod, Rexburg, Idaho. B. Turfgrass Sod: Certified, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. C. Turfgrass Sod Species: 1. Poa pratensis, Kentucky Bluegrass as shown on drawings. 2. Rhizomatous Tall Fescue (RTF), as shown on drawings.
3. MEADOW GRASSES AND WILDFLOWERS
A. Wildflower Seed: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of mixed species as shown on drawings. B. Native Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of mixed species shown on drawings. C. Seed Carrier: Inert material, sharp clean sand or perlite, mixed with seed at a ratio of not less than two parts seed carrier to one part seed.
4. ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Compost shall be equal to Biorem true compost organic compost, (208) 578-4383, or Ecobark Compost, (208) 359-7509. 5. FERTILIZERS A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 5
B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: 16-16-16-5.
6. PLANTING SOILS
A. Purchase topsoil from Rhode House Construction Inc., Phone number (208) 589-4445. B. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. By volume: a. Three parts topsoil b. One part compost 2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 sq. ft. surface area: 10 lbs.
7. MULCHES A. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.
8. PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.
9. EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A. Erosion-Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut-fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. B. Erosion-Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun-coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. C. Erosion-Control Mats: Cellular, non-biodegradable slope-stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface, of 3-inch nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 6
a. Invisible Structures, Inc.; Slopetame 2. b. Presto Products Company, a business of Alcoa; Geoweb. c. Tenax Corporation - USA; Tenweb.
10. GRASS-PAVING MATERIALS
A. Grass Paving: Cellular, non-biodegradable plastic mats, designed to contain small areas of soil and enhance the ability of turf to support vehicular and pedestrian traffic, as shown on drawings.
B. Base Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8. C. Sand: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate.
D. Proprietary Growing Mix: As submitted and acceptable to Project manager. E. Sandy Loam Soil Mix: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate blended with planting soil as specified. Use blend consisting of 1/2 sand and 1/2 planting soil. F. Soil for Paving Fill: Planting soil as specified.
3.EXECUTION
1. EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Project manager and replace with new planting soil.
2. PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 7
3. TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Spread topsoil to a depth of 12”, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend into top 4” of topsoil.
a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.
2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. a. Apply fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening. 3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Before planting, obtain Project manager's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 4. PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article. B. For erosion-control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion- control mats. Install erosion-control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. C. Fill cells of erosion-control mat with planting soil and compact before planting. D. For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 5. PREPARATION FOR GRASS-PAVING MATERIALS A. Reduce subgrade elevation soil to allow for thickness of grass-paving system. Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade so that installed paving is within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 8
B. Install base course, and course and soil for paving fill as recommended by paving-material manufacturer for site conditions; comply with details shown on Drawings. Compact according to paving-material manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install paving mat and fasten according to paving-material manufacturer's written instructions. D. Before planting, fill cells of paving mat with planting soil and compact according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
6. SEEDING A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.
B. Sow seed at a total rate of 3 lb/1000 sq. ft. C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:3 with erosion-control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect seeded areas with erosion-control mats where shown on Drawings; install and anchor according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. 2. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at a rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas. G. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.
7. HYDROSEEDING A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 9
8. SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.
1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:3 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.
9. TURF RENOVATION
A. Renovate existing turf. B. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required. 2. Install new planting soil as required.
C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil. D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil. E. Mow, de-thatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf. F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides. G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches. I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. J. Apply sod as required for new turf. K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.
10. TURF MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 10
1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: 1. Mow to a height of 2”. D. Turf Post fertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. 1. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area.
11. SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Project manager: 1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 3 by 3 inches . 2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. 3. Satisfactory Plugged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs has been established as well-rooted, viable patches of grass, and areas between plugs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation. 4. Satisfactory Sprigged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of sprigs has been established as well-rooted, viable plants, and areas between sprigs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.
12. MEADOW
A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
B. Sow seed at a total rate of 6 oz./1000 sq. ft.
C. Brush seed into top 1/16 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 11
D. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth.
E. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until meadow is established.
13. MEADOW MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish meadow by watering, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish a healthy, viable meadow. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and meadow damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep meadow and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and meadow-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep meadow uniformly moist. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water meadow with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1/2 inch per week for four weeks after planting unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.
14. PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already- germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
15. CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. C. Remove non-degradable erosion control measures after grass establishment period.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 1
SECTION 32 9300 - PLANTS
1.GENERAL
1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 8400: Planting Irrigation. 2. Section 32 9200: Turf and Grasses.
2. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Planting soils. 2. Plants 3. Tree stabilization. 4. Landscape edging. B. Related Sections 5. 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work. 6. Division 12 Section "Interior Planters and Artificial Plants" for live and artificial interior plants and planters. 7. Division 12 Section "Site Furnishings" for exterior unit planters. 8. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. 9. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 10. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, and erosion-control materials. 11. Division 33 Section “Sub-drainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and wall perimeters.
3. ALLOWANCES
A. Allowances for plants are specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances", if any. 1. Perform planting work under quantity allowances and only as authorized. Authorized work includes work required by Drawings and the Specifications and work authorized in writing by Project manager. 2. Notify Project manager weekly of extent of work performed that is attributable to quantity allowances. 3. Perform work that exceeds quantity allowances only as authorized by Change Orders.
4. UNIT PRICES A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices", if any. 1. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances. 2. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 2
5. DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. D. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. E. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well- established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. F. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. G. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in-ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant. H. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. I. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. J. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. K. Planting Area: Areas to be planted. L. Planting Soil: Imported topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and fertilizers to produce a soil mixture for backfill.
M. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.
N. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. O. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.
P. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
Q. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 3
R. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
S. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the Project. 3. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. T. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Mulch: 1-pint volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup. 2. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected. 3. Tree Grates and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size delivered to the site for review, to verify design and color selected. 4. Root Barrier, if specified: Width of panel by 12 inches. U. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. V. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
W. Material Test Reports: For imported or manufactured topsoil.
X. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods.
Y. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
6. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Approved Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers with 5 years experience, in business a minimum of 5 years. Approved installers: 1. A Summer Rain Landscaping 2. Artesian Sprinklers and Landscaping 3. Season’s West Landscaping
B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant- nutrient content of the soil.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 4
1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling; with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Project manager. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. 3. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. 1. Selection of plants purchased under allowances, if any, will be made by Project manager, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting. D. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes. 2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. E. Plant Material Observation: Project manager may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Project manager retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. 1. Notify Project manager of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
7. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable. B. Bulk Materials:
1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.
C. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 5
D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.
E. Handle planting stock by root ball.
F. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting. G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition.
8. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Project Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of each service or utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Project Manager’s written permission. C. Planting Restrictions: Plant at times directed by Project Manager. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion. D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. E. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.
1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 9. WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 6
d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. c. Annuals: Two months.
3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:
a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material. 10. MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: Two month from date of Substantial Completion. B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: Two months from date of Substantial Completion. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
2.PRODUCTS
1. PLANT MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well- shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected. 2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 7
B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Project manager, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. D. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings. E. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting. F. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well- established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery.
2. INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
3. ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Compost shall be equal to Biorem true compost organic compost, (208) 578-4383, or Ecobark Compost, (208) 359-7509.
4. FERTILIZERS A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: 16-16-16-5
B. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots. 1. Size: 21-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients.
C. Chelated Iron: Commercial-grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial-grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 8
5. PLANTING SOILS A. Purchase topsoil from Rhode House Construction Inc., Phone number (208) 589-4445. B. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. By volume: a. Four parts topsoil b. One part compost c. One part perlite 2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 sq. ft. surface area: 10 lbs.
6. MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Mt. West Bark Supreme Walk-on Fir Bark. B. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of following type, size range, and color: 1. As shown on drawings.
7. WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally-encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids.
8. PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.
9. TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS A. Stakes and Guys: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough-sawn, sound, new softwood with specified wood pressure- preservative treatment, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 round by length indicated, pointed at one end. 2. Wood Deadmen: Timbers measuring 8 inches in diameter and 48 inches long, treated with specified wood pressure-preservative treatment. 3. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 9
4. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. 5. Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets. 6. Guy Cables: Five-strand, 3/16-inch- (4.8-mm-) diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated turnbuckles or compression springs, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts. 7. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long.
10. LANDSCAPE EDGINGS
A. Not used.
11. TREE GRATES
A. Not used.
12. MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment if shown on drawings: AWPA C2, with waterborne preservative for soil and freshwater use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic; including ammoniacal copper arsenate, ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate, and chromated copper arsenate. B. Root Barrier if shown on drawings: Black, molded, modular panels manufactured with 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with ultraviolet inhibitors, 85 mils thick, with vertical root deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch out from panel, and each panel 24 inches wide. C. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Burlap: Non-synthetic, biodegradable. E. Planter Drainage Gravel, where shown on drawings: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8. F. Planter Filter Fabric, where shown: Woven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them.
3.EXECUTION
1. EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 10
C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Project manager and replace with new planting soil.
2. PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil- bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Project manager's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Project Manager. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. 1. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting. F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. 3. PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Spread topsoil to a depth of 12”. B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Before planting, obtain Project manager's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.
4. EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped or container-grown stock. 2. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. 3. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 11
4. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 5. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 6. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected after working hours or when unattended by Installer's personnel. 7. If drain tile is shown on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile.
B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as planting soil. C. Obstructions: Notify Project manager if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. D. Drainage: Notify Project manager if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. Notify Project Manager if water does not percolate within two hours.
5. TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements. B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch (25 mm) above adjacent finish grades. 1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole: a. One Gallon Groundcover: 1 tablet. b. 5 Gallon Shrub: 3 tablets. c. 15 Gallon Shrub / Tree: 4 tablets. d. 2” caliper Tree: 6 Tablets. 5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
6. MECHANIZED TREE SPADE PLANTING
A. Trees may be planted with an approved mechanized tree spade at the designated locations. Do not use tree spade to move trees larger than the maximum size allowed for a similar field-grown, balled-and- burlapped root-ball diameter according to ANSI Z60.1, or larger than the manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for the tree spade being used, whichever is smaller.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 12
B. When extracting the tree, center the trunk within the tree spade and move tree with a solid ball of earth. C. Cut exposed roots cleanly during transplanting operations.
D. Use the same tree spade to excavate the planting hole as was used to extract and transport the tree.
E. Plant trees as shown on Drawings, following procedures in "Tree, Shrub, and Vine Planting" Article above.
F. Where possible, orient the tree in the same direction as in its original location.
7. TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Project manager.
C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Project manager, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.
D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
8. TREE STABILIZATION
A. Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2 inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 2. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. B. Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches in caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. 1. Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method: a. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at least 36 inches below grade. Provide turnbuckle or compression spring for each guy wire and tighten securely. b. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle or compression spring. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. c. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade. d. Paint turnbuckles or compression springs with luminescent white paint. 2. Proprietary Staking and Guying Device: Install staking and guying system sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Root-Ball Stabilization if called for on drawings: Install at, or below-grade stabilization system to secure each new planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 13
1. Wood Hold-Down Method: Place vertical stakes against side of root ball and drive them into subsoil; place horizontal wood hold-down stake across top of root ball and screw at each end to one of the vertical stakes. a. Install stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation. Saw stakes off at horizontal stake. b. Install screws through horizontal hold-down and penetrating at least 1 inch into stakes. Predrill holes if necessary to prevent splitting wood. c. Install second set of stakes on other side of root trunk for larger trees as indicated.
9. ROOT-BARRIER INSTALLATION
1. Install root barrier where trees are planted within 60 inches of paving or other hardscape elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways where shown on Drawings. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations.
10. PLANTING IN PLANTERS A. Place a layer of drainage gravel at least 4 inches thick in bottom of planter. Cover bottom with filter fabric and wrap filter fabric 4 inches up on all sides. Duct tape along the entire top edge of the filter fabric, to secure the filter fabric against the sides during the soil-filling process. B. Fill planter with lightweight on-structure planting soil. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1-1/2 inches below top of planter, allowing natural settlement.
11. GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing. B. Use planting soil for backfill. C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes. E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.
12. PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Install weed-control barriers before mulching, only in areas of stone mulch, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, if shown on drawings, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins. B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.
1. Trees and Tree-like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch thickness, within 36-inch radius around trunks. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 14
2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3-inch average thickness of mineral mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems.
13. EDGING INSTALLATION
A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated. Weld joints.
14. TREE GRATE INSTALLATION A. Tree Grates: Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces as shown on Drawings. Shim from supporting substrate with soil-resistant plastic. Maintain a 3 inch minimum growth radius around base of tree; break away units of casting, if necessary, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
15. PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
16. PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas. C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already- germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
17. CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
PLANTS 32 9300 - 15
18. DISPOSAL
A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Plants 32 9300-1
SECTION 32 9300
PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install landscaping plants as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 32 8423: 'Underground Sprinklers' for irrigation system.
2. Section 32 9001: 'Common Planting Requirements' for: a. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common planting related sections. 3. Section 32 9120: ‘Topsoil And Placement’. 4. Section 32 9121: ‘Topsoil Physical Preparation’ (section included based on Topsoil Testing
Report). 5. Section 32 9122: ‘Topsoil Grading’.
6. Section 32 9219: 'Seeding'. 7. Section 32 9222: 'Hydro-Seeding'. 8. Section 32 9223: 'Sodding'.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Definitions: 1. Crop Coefficients and Hydro-Zones: Crop coefficients (Kc) are used with ETo to estimate specific
plant evapotranspiration rates. Crop coefficient is dimensionless number (between 0 and 1.2)
that is multiplied by ETo value to arrive at plant ET (ETc) estimate. Plants grouped by water needs, organized into one irrigation zone. 2. Eco-Region Irrigation Design: Bio-regional approach to irrigation and planting design that is
relevant to geographic area for which planting plan and irrigation system is designed. These geographic areas are defined by Environmental Protection Agency and have been modified by
the Church into 15 geographical areas throughout North America, and Hawaiian Islands.
3. Hardiness Zone: Hardiness zone is more precisely geographically-defined zone within an Eco-Region in which specific category of plant life is capable of growing, as defined by temperature hardiness, or ability to withstand minimum temperatures of zone. Hardiness Zones may be
defined by one of two sources:
a. Sunset Western Garden Book Maps. b. USDA Hardiness Zone Map.
Plant Hardiness zone sources shall be listed by Landscape Architect through planting and irrigation design process. 4. Hydro-Zone: Plants grouped by water needs (similar Crop Coefficients (Kc), organized into one
irrigation zone.
5. Landscape Management Plan (LMP): See Section 32 9001 for definition. 6. Plant Establishment Period: See Section 32 9001 for definition. 7. Reference Evapotranspriation (ETo): Total water lost from the soil (evaporation) and from plant
surface (transpiration) over some period.
B. Reference Standards:
1. American Nursery & Landscape Association / American National Standards Institute:
a. ANLA / ANSI Z60.1-2004, 'American Standard for Nursery Stock’. 2. American National Standard Institute / Tree Care Industry Association (TCIA): a. ANSI A300 (Part 1)-2017 Pruning, ‘American National Standard for Tree Care Operations –
Tree, Shrub, and Other Woody Plant Maintenance – Standard Practices (Pruning)’.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Plants 32 9300-2
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Participate in MANDATORY pre-installation conference as specified in Section 32 9001.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: 1. Samples:
a. Top dressing mulch for approval before delivery to site.
B. Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800: a. Operations And Maintenance Data: 1) Submit one (1) copy of recommendations specified in Special Procedure Submittals. b. Warranty Documentation:
1) Include written warranty.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements: 1. Deliver trees, shrubs, ground covers, and plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. 2. Do not prune before delivery, except as approved by Landscape Architect.
3. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, whipping, and other handling and tying damage.
4. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy natural shape.
5. Provide protective covering during delivery.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements; 1. Handle balled stock by root ball or container. Do not drop trees and shrubs during delivery.
2. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set planting materials in shade and protect from weather and mechanical damage.
3. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, saw dust, or other acceptable material
approved by Landscape Architect. 4. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 5. Do not store plant material on pavement.
6. Water root systems of trees and shrubs stored on site with fine spray. Water as often as
necessary to maintain root systems in moist condition. Do not allow plant foliage to dry out.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: 1. Provide written warranties as follows: a. Warranty will extend thirty (30) continuous days minimum after Substantial Completion. If a
continuous first thirty (30) days of the warranty period is interrupted by non-growing season
or irrigation winter shut-down, begin warranty period after start of growing season as agreed on with Architect. Thereafter, continue warranty per the period described herein. b. Warranty shrubs, ground covers, and vines to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and
healthy condition for 90 days minimum from date of Substantial Completion and meet or exceed material standards set forth in Materials heading of Part 2 of this specification.
c. Warranty trees to live and remain in strong, vigorous, and healthy condition and meet or
exceed material standards set forth in Materials heading of Part 2 of this specification for one year from date of Substantial Completion. d. When trees are completely accepted at end of warranty period, remove staking.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Plants 32 9300-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Plants: 1. Conform to requirements of Plant List and Key on Contract Documents and to ANLA / ANSI
Z60.1. 2. Nomenclature:
a. Plant names used in Plant List conform to 'Standardized Plant Names' by American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature except in cases not covered. In these instances,
follow custom of nursery trade. Plants shall bear tag showing genus, species, and variety of at least 10 percent of each species delivered to site.
3. Quality: a. Plants shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, free from plant disease, insect pests or their eggs,
noxious weeds, and have healthy, normal root systems. Container stock shall be well established and free of excessive root-bound conditions.
b. Do not prune plants or top trees prior to delivery. c. Plant materials shall be subject to approval by Landscape Architect as to size, health, quality, and character. d. Bare root trees are not acceptable.
e. Provide plant materials from licensed nursery or grower. 4. Measurements:
a. Measure height and spread of specimen plant materials with branches in their normal position as indicated on Contract Documents or Plant List. b. Measurement should be average of plant, not greatest diameter. For example, plant measuring 15 inches (375 mm) in widest direction and 9 inches (225 mm) in narrowest
would be classified as 12 inch (300 mm) stock. c. Plants properly trimmed and transplanted should measure same in every direction.
d. Measure caliper of trees 6 inches (150 mm) above surface of ground.
e. Where caliper or other dimensions of plant materials are omitted from Plant List, plant materials shall be normal stock for type listed. f. Plant materials larger than those specified may be supplied, with prior written approval of
Landscape Architect, and: 1) If complying with Contract Document requirements in all other respects.
2) If at no additional cost to Owner.
3) If sizes of roots or balls are increased proportionately. 5. Shape and Form: a. Plant materials shall be symmetrical or typical for variety and species and conform to
measurements specified in Plant List.
b. Well grown material will generally have height equal to or greater than spread. However, spread shall not be less than 2/3's of height.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Planting Mix: 1. Mixture of three (3) parts excavated soil and one part well rotted composted manure, approved
commercial mix, or other amendment recommended in 'Topsoil Testing Report'.
B. Fertilizer: 1. Fertilizer as recommended on ‘Topsoil Testing Report’.
C. Tree Stakes:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. 2 inch (50 mm) diameter Lodgepole Pine, Douglas Fir, White Fir, or Hemlock Fir.
b. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Plants 32 9300-4
D. Tree Staking Ties: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. 32 inch (800 mm) Cinch-Tie tree ties by V.I.T. Products Inc, Escondido, CA www.vitproducts.com.
b. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
E. Tree Guys:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. Duckbill Model 68DTS guying kit.
b. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
F. Pre-Emergent Herbicide:
1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Chipco Dimension Granular by The Andersons Inc, Maumee, IL www.andersonsinc.com.
b. Elanco XL2G granular by Crop Data Management Systems, Marysville, CA www.cdms.net. c. Ronstar G granular by Bayer Crop Science, Monheim, Germany
www.bayercropscience.com. d. Surflan AS liquid by United Phosphorous Inc, Trenton, NJ www.upi-usa.com. e. Oryzalin 4 A.S. liquid by FarmSaver, Seattle, WA www.farmsaver.com.
G. Weed Barrier:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a. DeWitt 4.1 oz (116 g) 20 year woven polypropylene weed barrier.
b. Hanes Pro-Platinum 4.1 oz (116 g) 20 year woven polypropylene weed barrier. c. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before bidding. See Section 01 6200.
H. Bark Or Wood Top Dressing Mulch: 1. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Medium size Fir bark. b. Medium or large size Redwood bark.
c. Shredded pine bark.
d. Shredded Cedar. e. Equal as approved by Landscape Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
I. Rock Mulch:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products: a) Coordinate with landscape engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Evaluation And Assessment: 1. Before proceeding with work, check and verify dimensions and quantities. Report variations
between Drawings and site to Landscape Architect before proceeding with work of this Section.
2. Plant totals are for convenience only and are not guaranteed. Verify amounts shown on Contract Documents. All planting indicated on Contract Documents is required unless indicated otherwise. 3. Do not commence with this Work until grading tolerances specified in Section 32 9122 ‘Topsoil
Grading’ are met. 4. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Plant Approval: 1. Compliance:
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Plants 32 9300-5
a. Prior to any plant installation, evaluate plants for compliance with material standards. b. Remove plants from site that do not comply.
2. Inspection: a. Prior to any tree installation, inspect one (1) extra deciduous tree and one (1) extra
evergreen tree for root health. b. In presence of Landscape Architect or by video recording, remove root container/packing
material and inspect root balls for soil depth, firmness and root structure by washing soil off of roots.
c. If delivered plants exhibit soil 1 inch (25 mm) or more above root collar, demonstrate that all trees have had excess soil removed prior to planting or that they meet standard.
d. Remove and replace tree plant material if roots are loose, significantly circling, significantly asymmetrical or damaged.
e. Continue inspection process until trees meet standard.
B. Layout individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings:
1. Stake locations and outline areas. 2. Secure Landscape Architect's approval before planting. 3. Make minor adjustments as may be requested.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Do not commence work of this Section until work of Section 32 9122 has been completed and
approved.
B. Excavation: 1. If underground construction work or obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting holes, Landscape Architect will select alternate locations.
2. Plant Excavation Size: a. Diameter: Twice diameter of root ball or container minimum.
b. Depth: Equal to container or rootball depth.
3. Unless excavated material meets topsoil requirements as specified in Section 32 9113, remove from landscape areas and do not use for landscaping purposes. 4. Roughen sides and bottoms of excavations.
5. With approval of Landscape Architect, select five (5) typical planting excavations throughout site for drainage testing.
a. Fill selected excavations with water and verify that water drains away at rate of 3 inches (75
mm) per hour minimum. Inform Landscape Architect in writing of excavations where water does not drain properly. b. Select three (3) excavations approximately 5 feet (1 500 mm) away from each non-draining
excavation and repeat tests. Continue testing process until non-draining areas have been
identified. c. In excavations located in identified non-draining areas, auger 6 inch (150 mm) diameter hole 4 feet (1 200 mm) deep in low point of each excavation and fill with tamped planting mix.
d. Do not plant trees or shrubs in holes that do not properly drain.
C. Planting:
1. Removing Binders And Containers:
a. Remove top one / third of wire basket and burlap binders. b. Remove plastic and twine binders from around root ball and tree trunk. c. Remove plastic containers.
d. Remove wood boxes from around root ball. Remove box bottoms before positioning plant in hole. After plant is partially planted, remove remainder of box without injuring root ball.
2. Plant immediately after removing binding material and containers:
a. Place tree and shrub root balls on undisturbed soil. b. After watering and settling, top of tree root balls shall be approximately two inches (50 mm) higher than finished grade and trunk flare is visible.
c. Shrub root balls shall be approximately one inch (25 mm) higher than finished grade.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Plants 32 9300-6
3. Properly cut off broken or frayed roots. 4. Center plant in hole, remove remaining wire basket and burlap taking care not do damage root
ball: a. Replace damaged material.
b. Backfill with specified planting mix. c. Except in heavy clay soils, make ring of mounded soil around hole perimeter to form
watering basin. 5. Add fertilizer in plant pit as per ‘Topsoil Testing Report’ and during proper season.
6. Fill landscape excavations with tamped planting mix and recommended fertilizer: a. Compact in 6 inch (150 mm) lifts.
b. Settle by watering to ensure top of root ball is 2 inches (50 mm) higher for trees and one inch (25 mm) higher for shrubs than surrounding soil following compaction and settling.
7. Do not use muddy soil for backfilling. 8. Make adjustments in positions of plants as directed by Landscape Architect.
9. Thoroughly water trees and shrubs immediately after planting. 10. At base of each tree, leave 36 inch (900 mm) diameter circle free of any grass.
D. Tree and Shrub Pruning: 1. Prune trees and shrubs to remove dead, broken, and split branches in conformance with ANSI
A300 (Part 1) Pruning.
E. Supports for New Trees:
1. Provide new supports for trees noted on Contract Documents to be staked. a. Remove nursery stakes delivered with and attached to trees. b. Support shall consist of at least two (2) tree stakes driven into hole base before backfill so roots are not damaged. Place stakes vertically and run parallel to tree trunk. Install stakes
so 3 feet (900 mm) of stake length is below finish grade. c. Deciduous Trees:
1) Place tree ties 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) below crotch of main tree canopy.
Second set of tree ties may be required 18 to 24 inches (450 to 600 mm) above finish grade, if directed by Landscape Architect. 2) Remove tops of tree stakes so top of stake is 6 inches (150 mm) below main tree
canopy to prevent damage to tree branches and canopy growth. d. Evergreen Trees:
1) Place tree ties 2/3's of height of tree up from root ball.
2. Provide root guying kits to support 24 inch (600 mm) box, 3 inch (75 mm) caliper and larger trees. 3. Staking and guying should allow some tree movement.
F. Vines:
1. Remove from stakes, untie, and securely fasten to wall or fence next to which they are planted.
G. Ground Covers: 1. Container-grown unless otherwise specified on Contract Documents. Space evenly to produce a uniform effect, staggered in rows and intervals shown.
H. Post Planting Weed Control: 1. Apply specified pre-emergent herbicide to shrub and ground cover planting areas and grass-free
areas at tree bases after completion of planting.
2. Areas shall be weed free prior to Landscape Final Acceptance.
I. Weed Barrier Fabric: 1. After planting and application or herbicide in shrub beds, apply covering of specified weed barrier
fabric. 2. Achieve 100 percent coverage over ground areas while allowing space for growth from root ball.
3. Overlap seams 6 inches (150 mm) minimum.
4. Staple at 5 feet (1500 mm) on center each way and within 3 inches (75 mm) of edge of shrub bed, with two (2) at each corner.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Plants 32 9300-7
J. Mulching: 1. After application of herbicide, mulch shrub and ground cover planting areas with 3 inches (75
mm) deep layer of specified top dressing or rock mulch. 2. Cover grass-free area at tree bases with 3 inches (75 mm) of top dressing mulch or rock mulch.
3. Place mulch to uniform depth and rake to neat finished appearance.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
EARTHWORK AND CONCRETE FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE 33 0500 - 1
SECTION 33 0500 - EARTHWORK AND CONCRETE FOR STEAM, CONDENSATE, & CHILLED WATER UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints CES Standard Contract Requirements. C. See other specification sections for structural reinforcing steel and concrete. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Work in sequence in areas as noted on the drawings and as scheduled with the Owner.
B. Provide excavation for all mechanical and related utility work. Include incidental rock removal preparatory to steam vault reconstruction (If necessary), revised steam line routing, and expansion loop extensions, etc. C. Provide backfill and compaction for all mechanical and related utility work. D. Make preparation of sub-grade for vaults, walks, curbs, driveways, etc. E. Provide concrete forming and placement, and reinforcing steel work required for mechanical utility installation. Allocate trade responsibility during the bid period so that no work is left out. This section is primarily responsible to see that the steam system modifications and extensions are provided, complete, workmanlike, and intact. The structural dimensions and re-bar requirements for reinforced poured-in-place concrete manholes are shown on the mechanical drawings. It is expected that the trade doing the actual work will refer to these drawings for dimensions and steel placement. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Installer's Qualifications: Licensed firm with 3 years minimum experience in steam related utility work and familiar with work on the BYU-Idaho campus. B. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of Owner, and of governing authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Work Schedules: Submit schedules of anticipated work times to facilitate timely visits for review of work. Clearly identify required utility outages noting the need to limit these outages in both occurrence and duration. B. Proposed Methods: Submit a written outline of how work will be accomplished. Note requirement to keep live steam in service to Buildings throughout the work period, except for scheduled outages of brief duration.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
EARTHWORK AND CONCRETE FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE 33 0500 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BEDDING MATERIALS: A. Use only clean compactable materials including sand and gravel suitable for the area of placement. B. Local material, Use only selected material, free of cobble-rock larger than 2". Use only for volume backfill, not around pipe or structure, for 12" above or below, or 18" on sides. C. Pea Gravel: Use for underlayment of direct buried piping, overlayment and general backfill. Settle and compact after initial placement.
D. Sand: Use for backfill over insulated pipe and around manholes. See details on drawings. Use with care as piping and structures may tend to float with compaction. 2.2 CONCRETE: (Non-structural only - See other sections for structural concrete and reinforcing steel) A. General: Ready mix or on-site mix. B. Cement: Portland Type II. C. Sand and Gravel: Proportions not critical, nominal 1 part sand to 1 part gravel.
D. Provide concrete with maximum water/cement ratio of 0.50; use at least 5-1/2 bags of cement per cubic yard of concrete. Mix sand, gravel, cement and water to a nominal 3-4 inch slump consistency, air entrainment 6-1/2 percent +\- 1-1/2 percent, 3,000 psi minimum 28 day test rating.
E. Place concrete as soon as possible. Do not place if ambient is 40oF or less without protection. Protect from sun, wind, and cold. Provide insulating blankets, and temporary heat as needed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION: A. Excavate trenches mechanically, or by hand, in straight lines between anchor and guide points with uniformly sloped trench bottoms. Remove backfill material which is unacceptable from the site and legally dispose of same. Use equipment suited for work. Excavate by hand within 2 feet of buried utilities. Use hand operated, air driven rock hammer tools for any incidental required rock excavation. Where excavation is in unconsolidated material, rock or large cobble stone, over-excavate, bring trench or structure bottom to grade with compacted backfill that is at least 12 inches deep.
B. Provide shoring and protection for workers in trenches. C. De-water open trenches if ground water or storm water runoff is encountered. Lay piping supports, anchors, and set footings, etc., only on dry compacted bedding. D. Provide protections for workers and installation where hot, live steam lines are involved.
E. Excavate as needed for new steam vaults, or enlargement of existing vaults. Protect against cave- ins
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
EARTHWORK AND CONCRETE FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE 33 0500 - 3
3.2 BACKFILL: A. Construct steam vaults. Set piping and support on smooth graded trench bottoms. B. Construct forms for insulation as detailed. Install insulation. C. Initially backfill and mechanically compact to midpoint of pipe.
D. Do not cover any joints until any pressure tests are completed.
E. Further, place and compact backfill, in layers not to exceed 6 - 8" thick, of moistened material per layer. F. Bring backfill up to finish grade or to within 6-8" of finish grade if other trades have landscape or flat concrete work to do.
3.3 COMPACTION: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. A. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soils) determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils).
1. Steps and Pavements: Compact in 6-12" lifts of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum density for cohesive material or 95% relative density for cohesionless material. 2. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact in 6-12" lifts of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 85% maximum density for cohesive materials and 90% relative density for cohesionless soils. 3. Walkways: Compact in 6-12" lifts of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum density for cohesive material or 95% relative density for cohesionless material. B. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 1. In sub-freezing weather, work only with non frozen material. Do not leave unconsolidated material overnight without concluding placement work. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 3.2 CONCRETE FOR UTILITY WORK: A. Provide all concrete for manhole bases, thrust blocks, anchors and other miscellaneous related to utility installation. B. Relate to tie rods, anchors, structure, etc.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
EARTHWORK AND CONCRETE FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE 33 0500 - 4
3.3 THRUST BLOCKS: Follow details on drawings. The objective of thrust blocks is to provide enough soil bearing surface to resist forces created by pipe line pressure or expansion and contraction. Pipe must be secured to thrust block material, block material must tie to undisturbed or compacted earth. 3.4 CLEANUP: A. Remove all excess or reject material from site, leave area clean and smooth. Clean adjacent paved areas of excavation remnants.
END OF SECTION 33 0500
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 1
SECTION 33 0501 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping joining materials.
2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Sleeves. 5. Identification devices. 6. Grout. 7. Flowable fill. 8. Piped utility demolition. 9. Piping system common requirements. 10. Equipment installation common requirements. 11. Painting. 12. Concrete bases. 13. Metal supports and anchorages.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions.
B. Concealed Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
C. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
D. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Identification devices.
B. Welding certificates.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Steel Piping Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 2
processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting if devices are applied to surfaces.
C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Formwork, reinforcement, and concrete requirements are specified in Division 03.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
H. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 3
2.02 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
B. Transition Couplings NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: 1. Underground Piping: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 2. Aboveground Piping: Specified piping system fitting.
C. AWWA Transition Couplings NPS 2 and Larger: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson. 2. Description: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling for underground pressure piping.
D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Spears Manufacturing Co.
2. Description: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint or threaded end.
E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Colonial Engineering, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Spears Manufacturing Co. 2. Description: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVCfour-part union. Include brass or stainless-steel threaded end, solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
F. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities. 2. Description: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.
2.03 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Dielectric Fittings, General: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 4
c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries, International, Inc. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. 2. Description: Factory fabricated, union, NPS 2 and smaller. a. Pressure Rating: 250 psig at 180 deg F.
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Epco Sales, Inc. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 and larger. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.
b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Kits:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Description: Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges, NPS 2-1/2 and larger. a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum b. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. c. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. d. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. 2. Description: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, NPS 3 and smaller. a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. b. End Connections: Threaded.
F. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Perfection Corporation. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining. a. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F. b. End Connections: Threaded or grooved.
2.04 SLEEVES
A. Mechanical sleeve seals for pipe penetrations are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 5
B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.
C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
D. Cast-Iron Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Molded PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G. Molded PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 33 Sections. If more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped. 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data. 2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Stencils: Standard stencils prepared with letter sizes complying with recommendations in ASME A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches for ducts, and 3/4 inch for access door signs and similar operational instructions. 1. Material: Brass. 2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd-gloss black enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 3. Identification Paint: Exterior, oil-based, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Snap-on Plastic Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, semirigid, snap-on type. Include color-coding according to ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensitive- vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
F. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
G. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
H. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Architect.
I. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. 1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions of flow, or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
J. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive vinyl tape, at least 3 mils thick. 1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2 inches for larger pipes. 2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch hole for fastener. 1. Material: 0.032-inch- thick, polished brass 2. Material: 0.0375-inch- thick stainless steel. 3. Material: 3/32-inch- thick plastic laminate with 2 black surfaces and a white inner layer.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 6
4. Material: Valve manufacturer's standard solid plastic. 5. Size: 1-1/2 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated. 6. Shape: As indicated for each piping system.
L. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link or beaded chain; or brass S-hooks.
M. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening. 1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment identification. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Thickness: 1/16 inch, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 inches in length, and 1/8 inch for larger units. 4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.
N. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes: 1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components. 3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components. 4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above. 5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1. 6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and speed. 7. Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for equipment.
O. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with mat finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inches. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT OPERATE.
P. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in piped utility identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of piped utility systems and equipment. 1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of same name are indicated.
2.06 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.07 FLOWABLE FILL
A. Description: Low-strength-concrete, flowable-slurry mix. 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, portland. 2. Density: 145-lb/cu. ft.. 3. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine and crushed gravel or stone, coarse. 4. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, fine. 5. Admixture: ASTM C 618, fly-ash mineral. 6. Water: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 7
7. Strength: 200 psig 28 days.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPED UTILITY DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove piped utility systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping. Fill abandoned piping with flowable fill, and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.
3.02 DIELECTRIC FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Dry Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric unions. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Dielectric flanges or dielectric flange kits.
B. Wet Piping Systems: Connect piping of dissimilar metals with the following: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Dielectric couplings or dielectric nipples. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Dielectric nipples. 3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 8: Dielectric nipples or dielectric flange kits. 4. NPS 10 and NPS 12: Dielectric flange kits.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on the Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
E. Install piping at indicated slopes.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 8
H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
I. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
J. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
K. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. a. PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions.
L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
M. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements.
3.04 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 33 Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
G. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end pipe coupling with coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32.
I. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Assemble joints for plain-end copper tube and mechanical pressure seal fitting with proprietary crimping tool according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
K. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 9
5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
L. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
M. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
N. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
O. Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.05 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Install dielectric fittings at connections of dissimilar metal pipes.
3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Install equipment to allow right of way to piping systems installed at required slope.
3.07 PAINTING
A. Painting of piped utility systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.08 IDENTIFICATION
A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Stenciled Markers: According to ASME A13.1. 2. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot noninsulated piping. 3. Locate pipe markers on exposed piping according to the following: a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for equipment and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch if flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors or enter inaccessible enclosures. d. At manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of equipment. 1. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch high for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch high for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR UTILITIES 33 0501 - 10
larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering. 2. Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish among multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
C. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices that become visually blocked by work of this or other Divisions.
3.09 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete".
3.10 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor piped utility materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.11 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
END OF SECTION 33 0501
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
MANHOLES 33 0513 - 1
SECTION 33 0513 – MANHOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install precast manholes, including precast barrel sections and top slab, cast
iron frame and cover as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCE
A. ASTM C-478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
B. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings for materials to be installed under this section.
B. Manufacturer’s certification that manholes and appurtenances meet or exceed specified requirements.
C. Installation instructions, to be maintained at job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS
A. Provide manholes with barrel sections fabricated in maximum lengths possible to minimize joins between sections.
B. Conform to ASTM C-478.
C. Use flat slab covers where specified.
2.02 FRAME AND COVER
A. ASTM A48 cast iron, 24 inch opening.
B. All castings to be planed or ground where necessary, to ensure complete contact
between ring and cover.
C. Provide vented covers on sewer and storm drain manholes where shown on the drawings.
D. Provide Neenah R-3430-A covers or equal on standard catch manhole.
2.03 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Steps shall be No. 4 deformed steel reinforced bar, covered with a polypropylene plastic, per Idaho Standards for Public Works Construction SD-509. Product shall be Kor-N-Seal by NPC, Inc. or approved equal.
2.04 PIPE PENETRATION SEALS
A. Seal all pipes entering manholes with elastomeric seals cast into the manhole section
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
MANHOLES 33 0513 - 2
and having a neoprene boot to fit the pipe. The boot shall have a collar with a stainless
steel band clamp to seal the pipe at the boot. The seal shall provide a watertight seal between the pipe and the manhole.
2.05 MANHOLE JOINT SEALANT
A. Flexible butyl resin sealant suitable for sealing joints between manhole sections
exposed to internal water pressure.
2.06 EXTERIOR JOINT SEALANT
A. For the exterior joint sealant, use a flexible Butyl resin, bonded to a geotextile material, with an integral bonder to bond the sealant strip to manhole concrete joint.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE BASES
A. Level area under base to within 1/2 inch of true grade, provide base materials as shown, and compact to 96 percent of maximum density, as determined by ASTM D-698.
B. Construct concrete base for the manhole so that the first section of the precast manhole section will have uniform bearing throughout the full circumference of the section wall, extending at least 3 inches into the concrete base forming a completely watertight joint.
C. Use precast concrete manhole bases.
3.02 BARREL SECTIONS
A. Place precast manhole sections vertical and true to line and grade as established by the ENGINEER.
B. Construct manholes so they are absolutely watertight both in the floor and for the full
height of the walls. Seal all joints watertight using flexible joint sealant. Fill pick holes with grout.
3.03 MANHOLE EXTENSIONS
A. Do not use more than three grade rings. Fabricate manhole sections the proper length to
set the top of manhole cover to finish grade. Manhole frames shall be sealed and grouted
to the top slab to resist water infiltration.
3.04 MANHOLE STEPS
A. Cast, mortar or attach steps by mechanical means to meet the loading and testing requirements of ASTM C 478 and Test Method C 497.
3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Seal space between the hole in the manhole and the pipe entering the manhole using neoprene boot seals at all pipe penetrations. Grout inside of manhole at seal boots to fill seal space.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
MANHOLES 33 0513 - 3
3.06 JOINT SEALING
A. Seal all joints in manhole sections using double seals. One seal compressed in the joint
between manhole sections and the second seal wrapped around the outside of the
manhole joint. Seal all joints in all manholes. Grout pack grade rings between the top of the manhole and cover frame.
END OF SECTION 33 0513
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 33 0660 - 1
SECTION 33 0660 – UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. Extent of work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. Work is primarily related to running chilled water lines between the capped lines in the Spori Building mechanical enclosure to the new Spori Annex Building. Relates to distribution system chilled water, supply and return. Also includes a pair of PVC data communications conduits for HVAC related control. B. Earthwork for excavation and backfill. Provide complete for this work. Comply with Section 33 0500 “Earthwork and Concrete for Steam, Condensate & Chilled Water Utilities” and Section 33 0501 “Common Work Results for Utilities”. C. "Concrete Work". Provide complete for this work for anchors, thrust blocks, etc. Comply with Section 33 0500 “Earthwork and Concrete for Steam, Condensate & Chilled Water Utilities” and Section 33 0501 “Common Work Results for Utilities”. D. Section 02 4119 “Selective Demolition”, for other requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of specified materials of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Use domestically manufactured pipe and fittings.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Licensed firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with local area underground water work similar to that required for project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for insulation materials and products. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for underground piping systems showing piping materials, size, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures, connections, thrust blocks, and anchors. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed water system piping and products, in accordance with requirements of General Conditions. D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for system materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of General
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 33 0660 - 2
Conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - CHILLED WATER
2.1 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements
B. Piping: Provide pipes of the following materials, of weight/class indicated. Provide pipe fittings and accessories of same material and weight/class as pipes, with joining method as indicated.
1. Ductile Iron Pipe System:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe with bell and spigot joints: AWWA C151; Class 51 Use only in non-traffic areas, unless otherwise indicated. In traffic areas use Class 53 or heavier.
b. Fittings: Ductile-iron complying with AWWA C110, with rubber gaskets conforming to AWWA C111. 2. Alternate Ductile Iron Pipe System:
a. Ductile Iron Pipe with grooved joints: AWWA C151; Class 53 or heavier.
b. Fittings: Victaulic ductile iron with machined flexible or rigid grooved ends to suit. c. Couplings: Victaulic Style 31 with Coal Tar enamel coating, with stainless steel bolts and nuts, with Victaulic “FlushSeal” Grade “S” nitrile gaskets
C. Insulation System:
1. Insulating Board: 2” thick Styrofoam “Blue Board.” Cut to suit.
2. In-trench fill: Clean sand, minimum 6 inches all around and between pipes.
D. Chilled Water System Control Communications Ducts
1. Duct material: Two 2” underground grey PVC conduits with long radius fittings.
2. Pull boxes: 24” x 24” precast concrete boxes, depth to suit, used to pull and turn long runs of HVAC controls data and communications wiring.
2.2 VALVES: A. Gate Valves 12” and Smaller: AWWA C500, 175 psi working pressure. Provide threaded, flanged, hub, or other end configurations to suit size of valve and piping connection. Provide inside screw type for use with curb valve box, epoxy coated, iron body, bronze-mounted, rubber encapsulated ductile iron wedge, non-rising stem. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gate valves of one of the following:
a. American Flow Control Series 500 b. Waterous Co.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 33 0660 - 3
B. Gate Valve Accessories: 1. Anchorages: Provide anchorages for tees, wyes, crosses, plugs, caps, bends and valves. After installation, apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-retarding material to surfaces of ferrous anchorages.
a. Clamps, Straps, and Washers: Steel, ASTM A 506. b. Rods: Steel, ASTM A 575. c. Rod Couplings: Malleable-iron, ASTM A 197. d. Bolts: Steel, ASTM A 307. e. Cast-Iron Washers: Gray-iron, ASTM A 126. f. Thrust Blocks: Concrete, 4,000 psi.
2. Valve Boxes: Provide valve boxes as indicated, constructed of 2 piece cast iron 5-1/2” shaft screw type (M&H Valve and Fitting Co. Cat No. 562.S). Provide 18”x18” collar around valve cover. Refer to drawings for additional detail.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - CHILLED WATER
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which system's materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Chilled Water Pipe Installation:
1. After excavation, using styrofoam board, form a trench 10 – 12 inches wider than the pipe pair. Place and compact a 4 – 6” layer of sand along the length of the trench. Concurrently fill behind the forms with pea gravel as the work and fill progresses. Prepare for guides and thrust blocking at points indicated. 2. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600 "Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances". Place additional sand up to the mid line of the pipe and compact. Place additional sand up to and over the piping to a depth of 4 – 6” over and compact. Place a layer of 2” Styrofoam board over the top of the trench, form to form.
3. Depth of Cover: Provide minimum cover over piping of 42 - 48" below finished grade including sand, gravel and insulation board. 4. Service Termination: Terminate piping inside building where indicated. Provide sleeve cast into building wall, and double water-tight sleeve seal (Linkseal). Provide anchor and blind flange or grooved joint for connection by Division 23. 5. Reference details on drawings for required sand bed and additional trenching, anchoring, etc. requirements.
6. At points of crossover with electrical ductbank, installation may be modified to minimize conflict. Ductbank may protrude into chilled water bank, but do not threaten plastic ducts with physical damage from settlement, etc.
7. Thrust Block: Provide thrust blocks at each elbow, tee, valve, etc. using 4,000 psi reinforced concrete. Refer to drawings for additional detail.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
UNDERGROUND CHILLED WATER 33 0660 - 4
B. Installation of Gate Valves:
1. General: Install valves as indicated with stems pointing up. Provide valve box over underground valves.
2. Anchorage: Anchor all valves into concrete thrust block, poured in place. C. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered, and after thrust blocks have sufficiently hardened. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing, and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.
1. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2-hrs. (175 psi minimum) 2. Test fails if leakage exceeds 2-qts per hour per 100 gaskets or joints, irrespective of pipe diameter.
3. Increase pressure in 25 psi increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for one hour, decrease to 0 psi. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for one more hour.
D. Chilled Water Communications Duct Installation: Sleeving through the east pit wall, run the two three inch PVC communications ducts to the east alongside the chilled water piping. Place a pre-cast concrete pull box at the point of turn to the north, (avoid conflict with the thrust block) and continue the run across to the new Science and Technology Building. Sleeve and seal into Science and Technology Building. Seal watertight.
END OF SECTION 33 0660
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 33 1116-1
SECTION 33 1116
SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform trenching and backfilling required for work of this Section.
2. Water meter not installed in building: a. Furnish and install piping for domestic water supply from water main to within 5 feet (1.50
meter) of building as described in Contract Documents complete with meter, shut-off valve, and connections. 3. Water meter installed in building: a. Furnish and install piping from water main to meter inside of building as described in
Contract Documents complete with shut-off valve and connections.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 31 2316: 'Excavation' for criteria for performance of excavation. 2. Section 31 2323: 'Fill' for criteria for performance of backfill and compaction.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. American Welding Society: a. AWS A5.8M/A5.8:2011-AMD 1 An American National Standard, 'Specification for Filler
Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding’.
2. ASTM International: a. ASTM B88-16, 'Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube’. 3. ASTM International (Standard Specifications for Polyethylene (PE) pipe):
a. ASTM D2239-12a, 'Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter'.
b. ASTM D2737-12a, 'Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing'.
c. ASTM D3035-15, ‘Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter'. 4. NSF International Standard / American National Standards Institute:
a. NSF/ANSI 61-2017, 'Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects'.
b. NSF/ANSI 372-2016, 'Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content'.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM
A. Thermoplastic Plastic Piping: 1. Manufacturers Contact List:
a. PP-R Aquatherm, Inc., Lindon, UT www.aquathermpipe.com.
b. PP-RCT Prestan North America, Titusville, PA www.pestampipes.com. 2. Materials: a. Pipe: HDPE DR9 meeting ASTM and NSF requirements.
b. Pipe: PP-R SDR 7.4 Greenpipe faser by Aquatherm. c. PP-RCT SDR 7.4 Red Stripe fiber core by Prestan.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 33 1116-2
B. Copper Pipe: 1. Type K copper meeting requirements of ASTM B88 with wrought copper, brazed fittings
2. Brazing Rods In accordance with AWS A5.8M/A5.8: a. Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6 percent silver).
b. Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15 percent silver). c. Classification BAg-5 Silver (45 percent silver).
d. Do not use rods containing Cadmium. 3. Flux:
a. Type Two Acceptable Products: 1) Stay-Silv white brazing flux by J W Harris Co, Cincinnati, OH www.jwharris.com.
2) High quality silver solder flux by Handy & Harman, Fairfield, CT www.handyharman.com.
3) Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
C. Water Meter: As required by local agency furnishing water.
D. Connection Material: 1. Thermoplastic Plastic Piping: a. Factory approved fusion only.
E. Stop And Waste Valves:
1. Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories. a. Mueller: Mark II Oriseal stop and waste valve H10288.
b. Mueller: Buffalo screw type curb box H-10350 complete with lid and H-10349 enlarged base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional requirements:
1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Contract Drawings.
2. Excavate to required depth. 3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required. 4. Remove debris from trench before laying pipe.
5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect.
6. Excavate trenches so outside pipe will be at least 12 inches (300 mm) minimum below frost line or 24 inches (600 mm) minimum below finish grade, whichever is deeper.
7. Backfill only after pipe lines have been tested and inspected, and approved by Architect.
B. Install piping system so it may contract and expand freely. Eliminate completely cross connections, backflow, and water hammer.
C. Install shut-off valve at meter.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests 1. Sterilization And Negative Bacteriological Test:
a. Sterilize potable water system with solution containing 200 parts per million minimum of available chlorine and maintaining a pH of 7.5 minimum. Introduce chlorinating materials
into system in manner approved by Architect. Allow sterilization solution to remain for
twenty-four (24) hours and open and close valves and faucets several times during that time.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Site Water Utility Distribution Piping 33 1116-3
b. After sterilization, flush solution from system with clean water until residual chlorine content is less than 0.2 parts per million.
c. Water system will not be accepted until negative bacteriological test is made on water taken from system. Repeat dosing as necessary until such negative test is accomplished.
2. Pressure Test: Before covering pipes, test system in presence of Architect or governing agency at 100 psi (0.69 MPa) hydrostatic pressure for two (2) hours and show no leaks.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove excess earth from site or place as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Sanitary Utility Sewerage 33 3313-1
SECTION 33 3313
SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavating and backfilling required for work of this Section.
2. Furnish and install sanitary sewage system as described in Contract Documents beginning at 5 feet (1.50 meter) from where it enters building and connecting to serving sewer system.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3111: 'Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete' for: a. Pre-installation conference held jointly with concrete specifications. 2. Section 22 1313: 'Facility Sanitary Sewers' for sanitary sewage system within building and within
5 feet (1.50 meter) of building. 3. Section 31 0501: ‘Common Earthwork Requirements’ for:
a. Pre-installation conference held jointly with other common earthwork related sections. 4. Section 31 2316: 'Excavation' for criteria for performance of excavation. 5. Section 31 2323: 'Fill' for criteria for performance of backfill and compaction.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 03 3111.
2. Participate in pre-installation conference as specified in Section 31 0501.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM A74-17, ‘Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings'. b. ASTM A888-18a, ‘Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications’.
c. ASTM C564-14, ‘Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings'. d. ASTM C1277-18, 'Standard Specification for Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings'.
e. ASTM D2235-04(2016), ‘Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings'.
f. ASTM D2321-18, ‘Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications'. g. ASTM D2564-12(2018), ‘Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems'.
h. ASTM D2661-14, ‘Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings'. i. ASTM D2665-14, ‘Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,
Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings'. j. ASTM D3034-16, ‘Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings'.
k. ASTM F656-15, ‘Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings'.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Sanitary Utility Sewerage 33 3313-2
2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute: a. CISPI 301-12, 'Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for
Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications. b. CISPI 310-12, 'Standard Specification for Couplings for use in connection with Hubless Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications.
c. CISPI Handbook. 'Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook' (2018).
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals 1. Install cleanouts in accordance with local governing authority and State codes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. ABS: 1. ABS Schedule 40 solid wall plastic pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D2661 joined
with pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2235.
B. Cast Iron Soil Pipe And Fittings: 1. Meet requirements of ASTM A74, Service Grade: a. Cast iron for bell and spigot fittings.
b. Cast iron for no-hub joints. 2. Approved Joint Material And Manufacturers:
a. For Bell And Spigot Pipe: Rubber gaskets meeting requirements of ASTM C564 and
compatible with pipe used. b. For No-Hub Pipe: 1) Category Four Approved Products. See Section 01 6200 for definitions of Categories:
a) SuperGrip 304 American Brass & Iron (AB&I), Oakland, CA www.abifoundry.com. b) Husky SD 4000 coupling by Anaco-Husky, Corona, CA www.anaco-husky.com.
c) Neoprene gaskets with type 304 stainless steel clamp and 24 ga type 304
stainless steel housing by Clamp-All Corp, Haverhill, MA www.clampall.com. d) MG Coupling by MG Piping Products Co, Stanton, CA www.mgcoupling.com.
C. PVC:
1. Schedule 40 solid wall plastic pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D2665 joined
using cement primer meeting requirements of ASTM F656 and pipe cement meeting requirements of ASTM D2564.
2. Gasket joint gravity sewer pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D3034. Joints shall be integral wall and elastomeric gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification Of Conditions: 1. Before installation, inspect pipe for defects and cracks. 2. Do not use defective, damaged, or unsound pipe.
3. Contractor is responsible for utility locate prior to any excavation.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Sanitary Utility Sewerage 33 3313-3
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Sections 31 2316 and Section 31 2323 with following additional
requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Contract Drawings.
2. Excavate to required depth and grade to obtain fall required. 3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required.
4. Remove debris from trench before laying pipe. 5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect/Engineer.
6. Excavate trenches so outside pipe will be 12 inches (300 mm) minimum below frost line or 18 inches (450 mm) minimum below finish grade, whichever is deeper.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. When work is not in progress, close open ends of pipe and fittings so no trench water, soil, or other substances will enter pipes or fittings.
2. Keep trenches free from water until pipe jointing material has set. Do not lay pipe when condition of trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. 3. Trench width at top of pipe: a. Minimum: 18 inches (450 mm) or diameter of pipe plus one foot (305 mm), whichever is
greater. b. Maximum: Outside diameter of pipe plus two feet (610 mm).
B. Placing And Laying of Underground Pipe:
1. Deflections from straight line or grade, as required by vertical curves, horizontal curves, or offsets, shall not exceed 6/D inches per linear foot (12 500/D mm per m) of pipe where D represents nominal diameter of pipe expressed in inches mm
2. Deflections to be determined between center lines extended of two connecting pipes. 3. If alignment requires deflection in excess of these limitations, provide special bends or sufficient
number of shorter lengths of pipe to provide angular deflections within limits approved by
Architect. 4. Laying: a. Pipe laying shall proceed up-grade with spigot ends of bell-and-spigot pipe pointing in
direction of flow. b. Lay each pipe true to line and grade and in such manner as to form close concentric joint
with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets of flow line.
c. As work progresses, clear interior of pipe of dirt and superfluous materials. Where cleaning after laying is difficult because of small pipe, keep suitable swab or drag in pipe and pull forward past each joint immediately after jointing has been completed.
5. Make joints between cast iron pipe and other types of pipe with standard manufactured cast-iron
adapters and fittings. 6. Valve, plug, or cap, as directed by Architect, where pipe ends are left for future connections.
C. Cast Iron Pipe And Fittings:
1. Shape trench bottom to give substantially uniform circumferential support to lower third of each pipe. Provide depression under bell of each joint to maintain even bearing of sewer pipe.
2. Connect to street main as required by local authorities.
3. Use jacks to make-up gasketed joints.
D. Thermoplastic Pipe And Fittings: 1. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations and ASTM D2321.
2. Stabilize unstable trench bottoms. 3. Bed pipe true to line and grade with continuous support from firm base.
a. Bedding depth: 4 to 6 inches (100 to 150 mm).
b. Material and compaction to meet ASTM standard noted above.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Sanitary Utility Sewerage 33 3313-4
4. Excavate bell holes into bedding material so pipe is uniformly supported along its entire length. Blocking to grade pipe is forbidden.
5. Piping and joints shall be clean and installed according to Manufacturer's recommendations. Break down contaminated joints, clean seats and gaskets and reinstall.
6. Do not use back hoe or power equipment to assemble pipe. 7. Initial backfill shall be 12 inches (305 mm) above top of pipe with material specified in referenced
ASTM standard. 8. Minimum cover over top of pipe:
a. 36 inches (915 mm) before allowing vehicular traffic over pipe. b. 48 inches (1 200 mm) before use of compaction equipment other than hand or impact
tampers.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-Conforming Work: 1. Failure to install joints properly shall be cause for rejection and replacement of piping system at
no additional cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Natural-Gas Distribution 33 5100-1
SECTION 33 5100
NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Perform excavation and backfill required for work of this Section.
2. Furnish and install gas piping and fittings as described in Contract Documents from gas main to meter.
3. Provide, make necessary arrangements for, and pay necessary fees to local gas utility company for gas service lines and proper size gas meter.
B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 03 3111: 'Cast-In-Place Structural Concrete' for concrete meter base.
2. Section 05 0523: 'Metal Fastening' for welding standards and requirements. 3. Section 31 2316: 'Excavation' for procedure and quality of excavating.
4. Section 31 2323: 'Fill' for procedure and quality of backfilling and compacting.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards: 1. ASTM International:
a. ASTM A53/A53M-18, ‘Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless'.
b. ASTM A234/A234-18a, ‘Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel
and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service'. c. ASTM D2513-18a, ‘Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings'.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals:
1. Certificates:
a. Welder certificates certifying welders comply with requirements specified under Quality Assurance Article of this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Agency Sustainability Approvals:
1. Lay underground pipe in accordance with federal pipeline safety regulations and local gas utility company regulations and specifications.
B. Qualifications: Requirements of Section 01 4301 applies, but not limited to following: 1. Polyethylene Pipe Installers: a. Properly trained and certified in procedure for joining polyethylene pipe.
2. Welders:
a. Certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days before commencing work on project. b. If there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Owner's Representative may require welder to take another test.
c. This shall be done at no cost to Owner.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Natural-Gas Distribution 33 5100-2
d. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other approved authority.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage And Handling Requirements: 1. Do not store polyethylene pipe so it is exposed to sunlight.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPONENTS
A. Above-Ground Pipe And Fittings: 1. Black carbon steel, butt welded, Schedule 40 pipe meeting requirements of ASTM A53/A53M.
2. Welded forged steel fittings meeting requirements of ASTM A234/A234M.
B. Below-Ground Pipe And Fittings: 1. Polyethylene pipe and fittings meeting requirements of ASTM D2513 with No. 14 coated copper tracer wire.
C. Valves: 1. Iron body, 125 psi (862 kPa) square head cock, with bronze plug.
2. Class One Quality Standard: Powell No. 2200: a. Crane Valves, Long Beach, CA www.cranevalve.com or Crane Canada Inc, Plumbing Div, Montreal, QB (514) 735-3592. b. The Powell Co, Cincinnati, OH www.powellvalves.com.
c. Stockham Valve, Birmingham. AL www.stockham.com.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Excavate and backfill as specified in Section 31 2316 and 31 2323 with following additional requirements: 1. Runs shall be as close as possible to those shown on Contract Drawings.
2. Excavate to required depth.
3. Bottom of trenches shall be hard. Tamp as required. 4. Remove debris from trench before laying pipe.
5. Do not cut trenches near footings without consulting Architect. 6. Place 4 inches (100 mm)of sand around pipe before trench is backfilled. 7. Bury outside pipe 12 inches (300 mm) minimum below frost line or 18 inches (450 mm) minimum
below finish grade, whichever is deeper.
8. Backfill only after pipe lines have been tested, inspected, and approved by Architect.
B. General installation shall be as specified in Division 23:
1. Steel pipe 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) and larger shall have welded fittings and joints. 2. Provide 24 inch (600 mm) minimum steel pipe between vertical rise of riser and end of polyethylene line if anode-less riser is not used. Use plastic-to-steel transition or compression
fitting between end of service line and steel meter riser. Provide cathodic protection for steel riser
or use anode-less riser. 3. Place tracer wire along side of polyethylene pipe from meter to main.
C. Set meter on concrete base.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set | November 27, 2019
Natural-Gas Distribution 33 5100-3
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Provide necessary protection against damage for meter.
END OF SECTION
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-1
SECTION 33 6310 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS AND REVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. See Section 02 4119, "Selective Demolition", for other requirements.
B. See Section 33 0500 “Earthwork and Concrete for Steam, Condensate & Chilled Water Utilities” and Section 33 0501 “Common Work Results for Utilities”, for excavation and backfill and concrete required for steam and condensate systems repairs. C. Extent of steam and condensate piping valves, specialties, insulation work as indicated on drawings and by requirements of this section. Includes runs of underground distribution piping, and reconstruction of piping, valves and fittings to a complete end, in steam vaults. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of steam and condensate piping products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years and are located in the U.S.A. B. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firm with at least 5 years in business, and 10 or more complex projects of successful installation experience with steam and condensate piping, valves and insulating work similar to that required for this project. Mechanical project foreman/superintendent to be an experienced master/journeyman with specific experience with steam/condensate systems and pipefitting. C. INSULATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS: Use experienced insulation subcontract firms for pipe insulation and jacketing, and only firms recommended by Owner at that. Do not suppose that insulation work is of little concern. Do not use any firm, or anyone unskilled in the work for this assignment. D. CODES AND STANDARDS: 1. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and install steam and condensate piping in accordance with ASME B31.9 "Building Service Piping".
2. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install steam and condensate piping in accordance with the IMC "International Mechanical Code" and ASME Standards pertaining to Pipe Welding. 3. Welding: Qualify welding procedures, welders and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1, or ASME B31.9 or ANSI and ASTM, as applicable, for shop and project site welding of piping work.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-2
4. Idaho State Plumbing Code 5. International Building Code
6. Industry Standards: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI B31.1 piping) b. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) c. Ame rican Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) d. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) e. ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL) f. Hydronics Institute (HI) g. Idaho Safety Standard (OSHA), Idaho State Industrial Council h. Hydraulic Institute (HI) i. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA)
E. MANUFACTURERS SUPERVISION: Manufacturers involvement is required regarding the installation of the direct bury dry powder insulation system (Gilsulate 500XR). 1. Install the insulation material with the styrofoam blueboard forms as a system according to manufacturer’s instructions, and after a project specific training session for all workers, training to be conducted by an authorized Gilsulate manufacturer's representative. 2. Prior to installation, the manufacturer’s representative shall inspect the installed pipe and support system for compliance with the recommendations and procedures. 3. Backfilling operations shall be witnessed by an Owner’s representative. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: 1. Submit manufacturer’s data sheets for materials and components used in the work. See list below. Includes most components of the work.
B. WELDING CERTIFICATIONS: Applies to all welders employed on this project. 1. Each welder shall have passed a qualification test within the past six months. 2. The test shall be conducted by an authorized agency and conducted in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding Qualifications", ASME Section VIII, and ANSI 313. 3. The test report shall certify that the welder is qualified to weld the material to be used at the job site.
4. The Contractor shall submit three copies of each welder's qualification test report to the Project Manager for approval prior to commencing the work. No welder shall be employed on the project until so certified. C. SHOP DRAWINGS: For all steam system components. 1. Pipe and pipe fittings 2. Valves 3. Strainers 4. Steam traps and specialties 5. Gaskets
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-3
6. Field fabrications, anchors, guides, insulation techniques 7. Pipe insulations and jacketing D. RECORD DRAWINGS: Use a protected copy of the contract documents and maintain and protect a complete red-line record of changes to the work and actual final conditions including dimensions and coordinates. E. MAINTENANCE INFORMATION: Provide for all manufactured items, with parts lists, instructions, sources of parts, etc. F. INSULATION GUARANTEE: In addition to the comprehensive Contractor’s warranty for materials and installation involved in this work, provide a written guarantee for the material and installation of the new and revised construction, including the dry insulating powder system (Gilsulate), in force for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by the Owner, against deterioration of insulating value, compaction, or water leakage under normal operating conditions. (Vendor will provide written guarantee for material to Contractor to allow a comprehensive single source. G. SAFETY: Note that medium pressure steam at 350°F and 100-150 psig is inherently hazardous, and that steam vaults are by definition enclosed spaces. Establish a plan, conduct training and maintain records to confirm that workers are competent, knowledgeable and trained in working with steam systems such as this. Provide required supervision, gear and installation to assure a safe working environment. Let no worker work alone or untended in an enclosed vault environment. Provide ventilation for all work in an active vault or enclosed space work environment.
1.5 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS: Make all tests required by code or specification in the presence of a representative of the Owner, recorded and certified by the Contractor and Representative. Involve local authorities where required. 1.6 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES: Pay for all permits, fees and licenses required for the conduct of the specified work and be responsible for all criteria associated with the same. Comply with requirements for inspection, certifications, etc. 1.7 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS: A. Prepare and submit drawings for steam vault construction including reinforcing steel placement, grating assembly, sleeving and anchorage.
B. Use a marked up construction print to indicate intended location of piping supports, guides, anchors and expansion loops. Present for review in an early weekly construction meeting. Work from reviewed drawings. 1.8 SCHEDULING/METHODS OF PROCEDURE: Where interruptions of service are needed to effect work of this contract, outline the work, coordinate with other trades, determine the Owners acceptable downtime and prepare a time based schedule to accomplish the work. Give notice of a necessary utility interruption (or shutdown) to any existing system to the Campus Construction Coordinator not less than 7 days prior to the proposed shutdown. This will then be coordinated with the Campus Utility Services Department and the campus areas involved for approval to go ahead with the shutdown or re-schedule. Set up for evening, nighttime or weekend hours as necessary to accomplish the work with minimum disruption. See Supplemental General Conditions for more details. Steam system shutdowns may require more than a 7 day lead time.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-4
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. D. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. E. Protect insulation against dirt, water and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. 1.10 PURCHASING CONSTRAINT: Contractor is to procure equipment and materials only from vendors who are willing to itemize items which are sold, with a price for each item or collective group of similar items, which line item costs add up to the total sum of the proposed offer. This will allow Contractor to work with bid-time unit prices if work is to be added or subtracted from the contract. A vendor may offer a package price for all listed items, but it shall be recognizable as the sum of the component unit prices. This will also facilitate buying around quasi-proprietary items which might be used to lock up a non-itemized package. The Spirax-Sarco thermo-dynamic steam traps with sensors and the steam/condensate valves in general, are particular items which should be priced on a line item basis.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS: A. GENERAL: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products, valves and fittings, steam and condensate specialties, insulation materials, etc., which have been manufactured in the U.S.A., of sizes, types, ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ASME B31.9 Code for Building Services Piping where applicable, base pressure rating on steam and condensate system maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings and materials which match pipe materials used in steam and condensate piping systems. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is at Installer's option. Provide piping materials and factory- fabricated, piping products, valves and fittings 2.2. BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:
A. GENERAL: Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with and in accordance with the following listing: B. HIGH PRESSURE STEAM (125 TO 250 PSI): Not applicable. C. MEDIUM PRESSURE STEAM (15 TO 125 PSI):
1. Use ASTM A53 Grade B, seamless, Schedule 40, black steel, pipe. For 2" and smaller, use pipe Schedule 80.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-5
2. Fittings shall be seamless forged black steel ASTM A-234, ASA B16.9, ASA B-10 of grade and schedule of pipe to which connected. Provide flanged fittings with AFlexitallic type CGI@ gaskets for piping 2-1/2" and larger. Provide threaded fittings for piping 2" or less. All fittings shall be rated for minimum 150 psig. Other than demountable joints, the system shall be an all welded assembly. 3. Use pipe and fittings manufactured in the United States of Ameraca.. D. LOW PRESSURE STEAM (15 PSI OR LESS): Not applicable.
E. CONDENSATE PIPING: 1. Schedule 40 Stainless Steel.
2.3. MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS:
A. WELDING MATERIALS: Except as otherwise indicated, provide welding materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials. 2.4 PIPING GUIDES: See details on drawings. A. Provide a complete guide support system for all steam and condensate system installation. Accommodate expansion, contraction, line offsets, etc. 2.5 INSULATION FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING, FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES: A. Pre-Qualified Installers:
1. Listed below are the only mechanical contractors which are allowed to bid the mechanical insulation work on this project. No exceptions taken: a. Mountain States Insulation b. Rivers West Construction c. Jenco Mechanical Insulation
B. Insulate all new piping exposed in steam vaults, inside buildings and in expansion elbows, loops, etc. buried in accordance with this section. C. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation both previously damaged, or damaged during this construction. Use insulation of same thickness as specified herein. Install new aluminum jacket over insulation inside manhole. D. Applied Piping Insulation Materials for Piping Inside Steam Vaults & Buildings:
1. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1, pre-formed fiberglass with all-service self sealing jacket, mitered for fittings unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical insulation materials of one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Babcock and Wilcox Co., Insulating Products Div. c. CertainTeed Corp. d. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH. e. Manville Products Corp.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-6
f. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. g. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. h. Rubatex Corp. E. Piping Insulation Materials for Piping in Trench: 1. Granular Insulation: Contractor shall furnish (purchase and install) the direct bury granular insulation for this contract. Include all costs of purchasing and placing the material and guarantying the work in this contract. Install material in accordance with the drawings, manufacturer’s recommendations, and these specifications. Material to be equivalent to Gilsulate 500 XR. Order 5% more material than calculated and turn excess over to the Owner at the completion of the insulation work.
2. Board Insulation:As detailed on the drawings use 2" thick, Dow “Blue Board”, foamed (not beaded) construction grade for sideforms and top cover of steam and condensate piping in the trench. Maintain a full 6" or more thickness of granular insulation between the pipe and the board.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1. INSPECTION: A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which steam and condensate piping materials and products are to be installed. Correct, or see that unsatisfactory conditions are corrected, before proceeding with the work. 3.2. INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION: A. General: After piping installation, insulation, and jacketing is complete, label steam and condensate piping with two inch high lettering indicating service, pressure and temperature. Use a black high temperature paint system. Prepare the substrate properly with cleaner and primer. 3.3. PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS: A. General: Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system. B. Threaded: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
C. Welded:
1. Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31. 2. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:
Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0oF (-18oC)
where possible, with minimum pipe preheat to 50oF.
Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove slag, metal particles and dirt.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-7
Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds for pipe sizes 12" to 20". Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blowholes and non-metallic inclusions. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to comply with requirements. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated; or install regular "T" fitting. D. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets. 3.4. INSTALLATION OF STEAM AND RETURN CONDENSATE PIPING: A. Where new piping follows same path as removed piping, match existing piping elevations, spacing, etc., except where indicated and in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.
B. Where new piping follows a new path, field verify exact routing, elevation, etc., to avoid conflict with existing underground utilities, power lines, etc. Install piping in accordance with applicable codes and regulations. C. Provide pipe guides as indicated on the plans. D. Condensate piping:
1. Install condensate piping to return steam condensate collection as indicated. E. Fabrication and installation of steam and condensate piping components: 1. General: Fabricate and install piping components in accordance with applicable requirements of ASME B31.9, and, where not otherwise indicated, comply with recognized industry practices to ensure that components serve intended function. 2. Drip-Legs: Provide new drip-legs as indicated on the drawings. 3.5. CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING: A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials and prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and accessory items.
B. All new piping systems for steam shall be thoroughly flushed and cleaned before being placed into service.
3.6. PIPING TESTS: A. Prior notification of at least 10 days will be required for an intent to perform hydrostatic testing. The Contractor's notice shall be reviewed and approved by the Project Manager prior to commencement of the required testing.
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-8
B. Complete piping tests prior to painting, insulating, or covering the pipe. C. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gages. Test piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible and remove control devices before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time. 1. Required test period is 4 hours. 2. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed. 3. Test medium, low pressure steam and condensate lines at 175 psig (hydraulic) and in accordance with ANSI B31. D. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. E. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. F. X-Ray Testing: Test a minimum of 5% of all welds. If a weld is found to be bad, then additional welds shall be tested until a satisfactory number has been found to be free of defects. In addition to the 5% minimum, x-ray testing of 100% of joints not capable of being pressure tested shall be performed; furnish copy of test results from an approved test laboratory for Engineer/Owner's review. Test to be in accordance with ASME requirements. Cost of all x-ray testing is borne by the Contractor. G. Startup testing: Since the steam and condensate piping will move on warmup and during operation, some initial leakage at flanged joints may be encountered. Tighten any joints found to be leaking. Verify that forces imposed on gaskets are guided straight and do not impose a moment force on the connection.
3.7. UNDERGROUND PIPING INSULATION INSTALLATION:
A. Procurement and installation of the direct bury insulation system shall adhere to the requirement contained herein and the details shown on the drawings. The installation shall allow adequate space for free movement of the piping without stress or abrasion. 1. Complete all piping tests and obtain approval before installing the direct bury insulation. 2. Store insulation materials on wood platforms. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for safe stack height and product protection. Insulation damaged while under Contractor’s jurisdiction shall be replaced as directed by the Owner’s Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Excavation, Application of the Insulation, and Backfill: Note the excavation and backfill requirements of Section 02200. Additionally, the following requirements apply to direct bury insulation. 1. The trench bed, walls, and cover which will surround the insulation system shall be a mixture of fine clay and fine sand, with a maximum of 5% rock not exceeding 3/4" diameter. 2. Where applicable, when there is enough trench depth and space for final cover, re-use existing concrete pad under the pipe, grade and compact the trench next to the existing under-pipe pad as needed to provide the required space for the insulation system. Clean dirt and debris from the
BYU Idaho Spori Annex Building Bid Set │ November 27, 2019
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEM EXTENSIONS & REVISIONS 33 6310-9
pipe and pad.
3. Install precut insulation board forms and spacers. Use a horizontal spacer to establish the envelope width. Hold the board forms away from the pipe by temporary spacers which are to be removed as the insulation is installed and compacted. The side forms must not extend above the finished compacted level of the insulation enveloped. 4. Backfill and compact the surrounding sand simultaneously with the insulation on both sides of the empty forms. Compact the sand backfill behind the forms to pipe height. 5. Place the insulation around the pipe. To minimize dust, empty the bags near the pipe with as little "free fall" as possible. Fill the forms in three inch lifts to mid-pipe height and compact, paying attention to fully load the underside of the pipe. Remove intermediate pipe supporting spacers as the work progresses. 6. Add additional insulation in layers and compact each layer to the specified density. Use a rod-type concrete vibrator with a 1-1/2" to 2" diameter head to compact the insulation. Insert the head of the vibrator into the insulation and pull along slowly. 7. Provide the minimum depth of insulation of 6-8-10" compacted over the highest part of the pipe (varies to 10" - see detail). the minimum bury depth of the insulation should be not less than 2-1/2 feet between the top of the insulation and the finish grade level. Place a 6 – 8 foot wide sheet of 10 mil Vis-queen over the insulated pipe in the trench tapered out and away to intercept vagrant ground moisture and shunt it away from the pipe conduit. See details. 8. Complete the compaction of the sand backfill behind the forms. When the insulation is fully installed and compacted, place a layer of flattened empty insulation bags on top of the insulation envelope. Walk over the bags to fully flatten the bag cover. Place the 2" insulation board over the trench. Hand apply a 6" sand backfill over the board and bags to anchor the board and bags. Complete backfilling and compacting to grade level or to the level of a protective overpad without delay. END OF SECTION 33 6310